Preface

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di sl/840Di/810D Cycles

1
______________
General

Drilling cycles and drilling

2
SINUMERIK ______________
patterns

840D sl/840D/840Di sl/840Di/810D

3
______________
Milling cycles

Cycles 4
______________
Turning cycles

Error Messages and Error

5
Programming Manual ______________
Handling

A
______________
List of abbreviations

B
______________
List of parameters

Valid for

Controls
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl
SINUMERIK 840D powerline/840DE powerline
SINUMERIK 840Di powerline/840DiE powerline
SINUMERIK 810D powerline/810DE powerline

Software Version
NCU system software for 840D sl/840DE sl 1.3 with
cycles 6.5
cycles for 840D/840DE 6.5
cycles for 840Di/840DiE 6.5
cycles for 810D/810DE 6.5

6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.

Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed Usage
Note the following:

Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by
Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly
as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.

Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG Order No.: 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Copyright © Siemens AG 2005.

Automation and Drives Edition 05/2006 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90437 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Preface

Structure of the documentation

The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:
• General documentation
• User documentation
• Manufacturer/service documentation
You can find a publications overview that is updated monthly indicating the currently
available languages on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Follow the menu items "Support" → "Technical Documentation" → "Publications Overview".

The Internet version of the DOConCD, the DOConWEB, is available at:

http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb

Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) can be found at
the following website:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol , under "Support"

Target group
This documentation is intended for machine tool programmers.

Benefits
This programming manual enables the target group to develop, write, and test programs and
to correct errors.

Standard scope
The functionality of the standard scope (cycles SW 6.5) is described in this programming
manual. Additions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by
the machine tool manufacturer.
It may be possible to execute other functions not described in this documentation in the
control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new
control or when servicing.
Further, for the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed
information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of
installation, operation or maintenance.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 iii
Preface

Technical Support
If you have questions, contact the following hotline:

Europe and Africa time zone

A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 223
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
E-mail: mailto:[email protected]

Asia and Australia time zone

A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +86 1064 719 990
Fax: +86 1064 747 474
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
E-mail: mailto:[email protected]

America time zone

A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +1 423 262 2522
Fax: +1 423 262 2289
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
E-mail: mailto:[email protected]

Note
Country telephone numbers for technical support are provided at the following Internet
address:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

Questions about the Manual

If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please
fax or e-mail us:
Fax: +49 (0) 9131 / 98 - 63315
E-mail: mailto:[email protected]
Fax form: See the reply form at the end of this publication

SINUMERIK Internet address

http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

Cycles
iv Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Preface

Validity
This Programming Guide is valid for Cycles Version 6.5.

Structure of descriptions
All cycles and programming options have been described according to the same internal
structure, as far as this is meaningful and practicable. The various levels of information have
been organized such that you can selectively access the information you need for the task in
hand.

Supplementary devices
The applications of SIEMENS controls can be expanded for specific purposes through the
addition of special add-on devices, equipment and expansions supplied by SIEMENS.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 v
Preface

Cycles
vi Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... iii
1 General................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Overview of cycles ..................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Drilling cycles, hole pattern cycles, milling cycles, and turning cycles ...................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Cycle auxiliary subroutines ........................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Programming cycles .................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.1 Call and return conditions .......................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 Messages during execution of a cycle....................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.3 Cycle call and parameter list...................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.4 Simulation of cycles ................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3 Cycle support in the program editor........................................................................................... 1-8
1.3.1 Menus, cycle selection............................................................................................................... 1-8
1.3.2 Functions of the input screen forms........................................................................................... 1-9
1.4 Cycle support for user cycles................................................................................................... 1-18
1.4.1 Overview of necessary files ..................................................................................................... 1-18
1.4.2 Getting started with cycle support............................................................................................ 1-18
1.4.3 Cycle support configuration ..................................................................................................... 1-19
1.4.4 Bitmap size and screen resolution ........................................................................................... 1-20
1.4.5 Bitmap storage in the data management of HMI Advanced .................................................... 1-20
1.4.6 Bitmap handling for HMI Embedded........................................................................................ 1-21
1.5 Cycle startup ............................................................................................................................ 1-22
1.5.1 Machine data............................................................................................................................ 1-22
1.5.2 Definition files for cycles GUD7.DEF and SMAC.DEF ............................................................ 1-23
1.5.3 New delivery forms for cycles in HMI Advanced...................................................................... 1-25
1.5.4 Upgrading the cycles with SW 6.4 and higher in HMI Advanced with SW 6.3 and higher ...... 1-25
1.6 Additional functions for cycles.................................................................................................. 1-26
2 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns.......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Drilling cycles ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 General information ................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Requirements............................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 .................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.4 Drilling, counterboring - CYCLE82:............................................................................................ 2-7
2.1.5 Deep-hole drilling - CYCLE83.................................................................................................. 2-10
2.1.6 Rigid tapping - CYCLE84......................................................................................................... 2-18
2.1.7 Tapping with compensating chuck - CYCLE840 ..................................................................... 2-25
2.1.8 Boring 1 - CYCLE85 ................................................................................................................ 2-32
2.1.9 Boring 2 - CYCLE86 ................................................................................................................ 2-35
2.1.10 Boring 3 - CYCLE87 ................................................................................................................ 2-39
2.1.11 Boring 4 - CYCLE88 ................................................................................................................ 2-42
2.1.12 Boring 5 - CYCLE89 ................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.2 Modal call of drilling cycles ...................................................................................................... 2-48

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 vii
Table of contents

2.3 Drilling pattern cycles ............................................................................................................... 2-51

2.3.1 Requirements........................................................................................................................... 2-51
2.3.2 Row of holes - HOLES1 ........................................................................................................... 2-52
2.3.3 Row of holes - HOLES2 ........................................................................................................... 2-55
2.3.4 Dot matrix - CYCLE801............................................................................................................ 2-58
3 Milling cycles .......................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 General information.................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Requirements............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.3 Thread milling - CYCLE90 ......................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Long holes located on a circle - LONGHOLE .......................................................................... 3-11
3.5 Slots on a circle - SLOT1 ......................................................................................................... 3-17
3.6 Circumferential slot - SLOT2.................................................................................................... 3-25
3.7 Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1 .................................................................................. 3-32
3.8 Milling circular pockets - POCKET2......................................................................................... 3-38
3.9 Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3 ................................................................................. 3-43
3.10 Milling a circular pocket - POCKET4........................................................................................ 3-52
3.11 Face milling - CYCLE71........................................................................................................... 3-58
3.12 Path milling - CYCLE72 ........................................................................................................... 3-65
3.13 Rectangular spigot milling - CYCLE76..................................................................................... 3-73
3.14 Circular spigot milling - CYCLE77............................................................................................ 3-79
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75................................................ 3-84
3.15.1 General information.................................................................................................................. 3-84
3.15.2 Transfer pocket edge contour - CYCLE74............................................................................... 3-85
3.15.3 Transfer island contour - CYCLE75 ......................................................................................... 3-86
3.15.4 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73 .................................................................................... 3-89
3.15.4.1 General information.................................................................................................................. 3-89
3.15.4.2 Examples.................................................................................................................................. 3-92
3.15.4.3 Description of technology in Example 2................................................................................. 3-100
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800 .......................................................................................................... 3-109
3.16.1 General information................................................................................................................ 3-109
3.16.2 Programming via screen form ................................................................................................ 3-111
3.16.2.1 General information................................................................................................................ 3-111
3.16.2.2 Parameters of input screen form............................................................................................ 3-111
3.16.2.3 Operator and programmer instructions .................................................................................. 3-117
3.16.2.4 Examples of input screen form .............................................................................................. 3-118
3.16.3 Programming using parameters............................................................................................. 3-120
3.16.4 Setting of tools - CYCLE800 .................................................................................................. 3-122
3.16.5 Setting up workpieces with swiveled machining planes ........................................................ 3-124
3.16.5.1 General information................................................................................................................ 3-124
3.16.5.2 Parameters of input screen form............................................................................................ 3-125
3.16.5.3 Data transfer of swivel data in “Swiveling in JOG"................................................................. 3-130
3.16.6 Startup - CYCLE800 .............................................................................................................. 3-131
3.16.6.1 General information................................................................................................................ 3-131
3.16.6.2 Startup of kinematic chain...................................................................................................... 3-135
3.16.6.3 Startup of rotary axis parameter ............................................................................................ 3-143
3.16.6.4 Startup of fine kinematics....................................................................................................... 3-145
3.16.6.5 Startup examples for machine kinematics ............................................................................. 3-146
3.16.7 Manufacturer Cycle TOOLCARR.SPF - CYCLE800 ............................................................. 3-154

Cycles
viii Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Table of contents

3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832 .......................................................................................... 3-159

3.17.1 General information ............................................................................................................... 3-159
3.17.2 Programming via input screen form....................................................................................... 3-162
3.17.2.1 General information ............................................................................................................... 3-162
3.17.2.2 Parameters of input screen form............................................................................................ 3-162
3.17.3 Programming via parameters................................................................................................. 3-166
3.17.4 Customizing technology......................................................................................................... 3-167
3.17.4.1 General information ............................................................................................................... 3-167
3.17.4.2 Customizing of machine setter/programmer.......................................................................... 3-167
3.17.4.3 Customization by the machine manufacturer ........................................................................ 3-168
3.17.4.4 Customizing additional program parameters CYC_832T ...................................................... 3-169
3.17.5 Ports....................................................................................................................................... 3-172
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60..................................................................................................... 3-174
4 Turning cycles ........................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 General information ................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Conditions .................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.3 Grooving cycle - CYCLE93 ........................................................................................................ 4-5
4.4 Undercut cycle - CYCLE94 ...................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95.............................................................................................. 4-19
4.6 Thread undercut - CYCLE96 ................................................................................................... 4-34
4.7 Thread cutting - CYCLE97....................................................................................................... 4-38
4.8 Thread chaining - CYCLE98 .................................................................................................... 4-46
4.9 Thread recutting ....................................................................................................................... 4-54
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950 ............................................................................ 4-56
5 Error Messages and Error Handling........................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1 General information ................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Error handling in the cycles........................................................................................................ 5-1
5.3 Messages in the cycles.............................................................................................................. 5-2
A List of abbreviations................................................................................................................................A-1
B List of parameters ...................................................................................................................................B-1
Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... Glossary-1
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 ix
Table of contents

Cycles
x Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
General
The first section provides you with an overview of the available cycles. The following
1
sections describe the general conditions that apply to all cycles regarding
• Programming the cycles and
• Operator guidance for calling the cycles.
beschrieben.

1.1 1.1 Overview of cycles

Cycles are generally applicable technology subroutines, with which you can implement
specific machining processes such as tapping a thread or milling a pocket. These cycles are
adapted to individual tasks by parameter assignment.
The system provides you with the technologies
• Drilling
• Milling
• Turning
in various standard cycles.

1.1.1 Drilling cycles, hole pattern cycles, milling cycles, and turning cycles
You can run the following cycles with the SINUMERIK 810D, 840D and 840Di controls:

Drilling cycles

CYCLE81 Drilling, centering

CYCLE82 Drilling, counterboring
CYCLE83 Deep-hole drilling
CYCLE84 Rigid tapping
CYCLE840 Tapping with compensating chuck
CYCLE85 Boring 1
CYCLE86 Boring 2
CYCLE87 Boring 3
CYCLE88 Boring 4
CYCLE89 Boring 5

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-1
General
1.1 Overview of cycles

Hole pattern cycles

HOLES1 Machining a row of holes

HOLES2 Machining a circle of holes
CYCLE801 Dot matrix

Milling cycles

CYCLE90 Thread milling

LONGHOLE Milling pattern of elongated holes on a circle
SLOT1 Groove milling pattern on a circle
SLOT2 Circumferential groove milling pattern
POCKET1 Rectangular pocket milling (with face cutter)
POCKET2 Circular pocket milling (with face cutter)
POCKET3 Rectangular pocket milling (with any milling tool)
POCKET4 Circular pocket milling (with any milling tool)
CYCLE71 Face milling
CYCLE72 Contour milling
CYCLE76 Rectangular spigot milling
CYCLE77 Circular spigot milling
CYCLE73 Pocket milling with islands
CYCLE74 Transfer of pocket edge contour
CYCLE75 Transfer of island contour
CYCLE800 Swiveling
CYCLE832 High speed settings
CYCLE60 Engraving cycle

Turning cycles

CYCLE93 Recess
CYCLE94 Undercut (DIN form E and F)
CYCLE95 Stock removal with relief cutting
CYCLE96 Thread undercut (DIN forms A, B, C, and D)
CYCLE97 Thread cutting
CYCLE98 Chaining of threads
CYCLE950 Extended stock removal

1.1.2 Cycle auxiliary subroutines

Included in the cycle package is the auxiliary subroutine
• PITCH
This auxiliary subroutine must always be loaded in the control.

Cycles
1-2 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.2 Programming cycles

1.2 1.2 Programming cycles

A standard cycle is defined as a subroutine with name and parameter list. The conditions
described in the "SINUMERIK Programming Guide Part 1: Fundamentals" are applicable for
calling a cycle.

Note
The cycles are supplied on diskette/CD or with the relevant software version for HMI
Advanced. They are loaded to the part program memory of the control via the V.24 interface
or from the diskette drive (see operator's guide).

1.2.1 Call and return conditions

The G functions active before the cycle is called and the programmable frame remain active
beyond the cycle.
You define the machining plane (G17, G18, G19) before the cycle call. A cycle operates in
the current plane with the
• Abscissa (1st geometry axis)
• Ordinate (2nd geometry axis)
• Applicate (3rd geometry axis of the plane in space)
In the drilling cycles, the drilling is executed in the axis that is vertical on the plane (3rd
geometry plane). In milling, the depth infeed is carried out in this axis.

=
$SSOLFDWH

<
 QDWH
* UGL
2

*


*

$E
VF
LVV
D
;

Plane and axis assignment:

Command Plane Vertical infeed axis

G17 X/Y Z
G18 Z/X Y
G19 Y/Z X

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-3
General
1.2 Programming cycles

1.2.2 Messages during execution of a cycle

During various cycles, messages that refer to the state of machining are displayed on the
screen of the control system during program execution. These messages do not interrupt the
program execution and remain until the next message appears or the cycle is completed.
The message texts and their meaning are listed together with the cycle to which they refer.

Note
You can find a summary of all messages in Appendix A of this programming guide.

Block display during execution of a cycle

The cycle call is displayed in the current block display for the duration of the cycle.

1.2.3 Cycle call and parameter list

The standard cycles use user-defined variables. The defining parameters for the cycles can
be transferred via the parameter list when the cycle is called.

Note
Cycle calls always require a block for themselves.

Fundamentals of standard cycle parameter assignment

The Programming Guide describes the parameter list of every cycle with the
• order and the
• type.
It is imperative to observe the order of the defining parameters.
Each defining parameter of a cycle has a certain data type. The parameter being used must
be specified when the cycle is called. In the parameter list,
• Variables or
• Constants
can be transferred.
If variables are transferred in the parameter list, they must first be defined in the calling
program and assigned values. Cycles can be called
• With an incomplete parameter list or
• by leaving out parameters

Cycles
1-4 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.2 Programming cycles

If you want to exclude the last transfer parameters that have to be written in a call, you can
prematurely terminate the parameter list with ")". If any parameters are to be omitted within
the list, a comma "..., ,..." must be written as a placeholder.

Note
No plausibility checks are made of parameter values with a discrete or limited value range
unless an error response has been specifically described for a cycle.
During a cycle call, if the parameter list contains more entries than there are parameters
defined in the cycle, the general NC alarm 12340 "Too many parameters" appears, and the
cycle is not executed.

Cycle call
The various methods for writing a cycle call are shown in the following example, CYCLE100,
which requires the following input parameters.
Example

FORM char ;Definition of the form to be machined, values: E and F

MID real ;Infeed depth (to be entered without sign)
FFR real ;Feed
VARI integer ;Machining type, values: 0, 1, or 2
FAL real ;Finishing allowance

This cycle is called via the Cycle100 (FORM, MID, FFR, VARI, FAL) command.
1. parameter list with constant values
Rather than input individual parameters, you can directly enter the concrete values to be
used in the cycle.
Example

CYCLE100 ("E", 5, 0.1, 1, 0) ;Cycle call

2. Parameter list with variables as transfer parameters

You can transfer the parameters as R variables that you define before calling the cycle and
to which you must assign variables.
Example

DEF CHAR FORM="E" ;Definition of a parameter, value assignment

DEF REAL MID=5, FFR, FAL ;Definition of parameters with and without
DEF INT VARI=1 ;value assignments
N10 FFR=0.1 FAL=0 ;Value assignments
N20 CYCLE100 (FORM, MID, FFR, VARI, ;Cycle call
FAL)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-5
General
1.2 Programming cycles

3. Use of predefined variables as transfer parameters

To assign parameters to cycles, you can also use variables such as R parameters.
Example

DEF CHAR FORM="E" ;Definition of a parameter, value assignment

N10 R1=5 R2=0.1 R3=1 R4=0 ;Value assignments
N20 CYCLE100 (FORM, R1, R2, R3, R4) ;Cycle call

As R parameters are predefined as type real, it is important to ensure that the type of the
target parameter in the cycle is compatible with the type real.

Note
More detailed information about data types and type conversion and compatibility is given in
the Programming Guide.
In the event of type incompatibilities, the system displays alarm 12330 "Type of parameter ...
incorrect".

4. Incomplete parameter list and omission of parameters

If an assigned parameter for a cycle call is not required or if it should have a value of zero, it
can be omitted from the parameter list. In its place, only the comma "..., ,..." is to be written in
order to ensure the correct assignment of subsequent parameters or if the parameter list is
to be closed early with ")".
Example

CYCLE100 ("F", 3, 0.3, , 1) ;cycle call, 4th parameter omitted

;(i.e., the value zero)
CYCLE100 ("F", 3, 0.3) ;Cycle call, a value of zero is assigned
;to the last two parameters
;(e.g., they have been omitted)

5. Expressions in the parameter list

Expressions, the results of which are assigned to the corresponding parameter in the cycle,
are also permitted in the parameter list.
Example

DEF REAL MID=7, FFR=200 ;Definition of the parameters, value

;assignments
CYCLE100 ("E", MID*0.5, FFR+100,1) ;Cycle call infeed depth 3.5, Feed rate 300

Cycles
1-6 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.2 Programming cycles

1.2.4 Simulation of cycles

Programs with cycle calls can be tested first in simulation.

Function
In HMI Embedded configurations, the program runs normally in the NC and the traversing
motion is traced on screen during simulation.
In HMI Advanced configurations, the program is simulated on the HMI only. This makes it
possible to run cycles without tool data or without prior selection of a tool offset in the MM.
The finished contour is then traversed in the case of cycles that have to include tool offset
data in the calculation of their traversing motion (e.g., milling pockets and grooves, turning
with recess) and a message indicates that simulation without tool is active.
This function can be used, for example, to check the position of the pocket.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-7
General
1.3 Cycle support in the program editor

1.3 1.3 Cycle support in the program editor

The program editor provides cycle support for Siemens and user cycles.

Function
The cycle support offers the following functions:
• Cycle selection via soft keys
• Input screen forms for parameter assignment with help displays
• Online help for each parameter (HMI Advanced only)
• Support of contour input
From the individual screen forms, a program code that can be reset is generated.

1.3.1 Menus, cycle selection

Technology-oriented cycle selection is carried out using soft keys:

&RQWRXU Geometry input via the geometry processor or contour definition screen forms

%RUH Input screen forms for drilling cycles and drilling patterns

0LOOLQJ Input screen forms for milling cycles

7XUQLQJ Input screen forms for turning cycles

After confirming the screen form input by clicking OK, the technology selection bar remains
visible. Similar cycles are supplied from shared screen forms. Within the screen forms, it is
then possible to switch between cycles via soft key, e.g., for tapping or undercut.
The editor cycle support also contains screen forms that insert a multi-line DIN code in the
program instead of a cycle call, e.g., contour definition screen forms and the input of any
drilling positions.

Cycles
1-8 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.3 Cycle support in the program editor

1.3.2 Functions of the input screen forms

Function
• Many cycles allow you to influence the processing type via the VARI parameter. It often
contains several settings composing one code. In the cycle support screen forms, these
individual settings can be divided among different input fields that can be switched using
the toggle key.

• The input screen forms are changed dynamically. Only the input fields required for the
selected processing type are displayed. Unnecessary input fields are not shown.
• One input may, therefore, automatically assign several dependent parameters. This is the
case for thread cutting, where metric thread tables are currently supported. During the
thread cutting cycle CYCLE97, for example, with input 12 in the input box for the thread
size (parameter MPIT), the thread pitch (parameter PIT) is automatically assigned a value
of 1.75 and the thread depth (parameter TDEP) is automatically assigned a value of
1.074. This function is not active if the metric thread table has not been selected.
• If a screen form is displayed a second time, the most recently entered values are
assigned to all fields. When cycles are called up several times in a row in the same
program (e.g., pocket milling when roughing and finishing), few parameters then have to
be changed.
• In screen forms for drilling and milling cycles, certain parameters may be input as
absolute or incremental values. The abbreviation ABS for absolute and INC for
incremental input is displayed behind the input field. This can be toggled with the
"Alternative" soft key. This setting will remain the next time these screen forms are called.

Alter-
native

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-9
General
1.3 Cycle support in the program editor

• HMI Advanced allows you to view additional information on each cycle parameter in the
online help. If the cursor is positioned on a parameter and the help icon appears in the
lower right corner, the help function can be activated.

By pressing the info key, the parameter explanation is displayed from the Cycle
Programming Guide.

Cycles
1-10 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.3 Cycle support in the program editor

Operating the help display

3DJH
XS
Paging backward in the documentation

3DJH
GRZQ
Paging forward in the documentation

1H[WHQWU\
Enables the user to jump to another piece of text included in the help display

*RWR
Enables the user to jump to a selected piece of text

=RRP
Zoom the text in the help window

=RRP
Reduce the text in the help window

([LW
KHOS
Return to the cycle screen form

Contour input support

Free contour programming
*HQHUDWH
FRQWRXU
Starts the free contour programming, which is used to enter the contiguous contour sections
(see references: /BA/).

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-11
General
1.3 Cycle support in the program editor

Contour definition programming

&RQWRXU
OLQH
These soft keys support the contour definitions that are possible.

&RQWRXU
OLQH

&RQWRXU
OLQH
These consist of one or more straight lines with intermediary contour transition elements
(radii, chamfers). Each contour element may be preassigned by means of end points or point
and angle and supplemented by a free DIN code.
Example
The following DIN code is generated from the following input screen form for a contour
definition with two straight lines:

X=AC(20) ANG=87.3 RND=2.5 F2000 S500 M3

X=IC(10) Y=IC(-20); incremental end point

Cycles
1-12 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.3 Cycle support in the program editor

Drilling support
The drilling support includes a selection of drilling cycles and drilling patterns.

The "Drilling pattern position" soft key branches into a submenu with a selection of several
drilling patterns.
'ULOOLQJ
FHQWHULQJ

'HHSKROH
GULOOLQJ

%RUH

7DSSLQJ

Selection of drilling patterns

+ROH
SDWWHUQSRV

'HVHOHFW
PRGDO

Note
Cycles CYCLE81, CYCLE87 and CYCLE89 cannot be parameterized with this support. The
function of CYCLE81 is covered by CYCLE82 ("Drilling, centering" soft key), as is the
function of CYCLE89. The function of CYCLE87 is covered by the function of CYCLE88
("Drilling, centering" -> "Drilling with stop" soft keys).

Drilling patterns may be repeated if, for example, drilling and tapping are to be executed in
succession. To this end, a name for the drilling pattern, which is later entered in the "Repeat
Position" screen form, is assigned in the drilling pattern.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-13
General
1.3 Cycle support in the program editor

Example with cycle support generated

N100 G17 G0 G90 Z20 F2000 S500 M3 ;Main block

N110 T7 M6 ;Change drilling machine
N120 G0 G90 X50 Y50 ;Initial drilling position
N130 MCALL CYCLE82(10,0,2,0,30,5) ;Modal drilling cycle call
N140 Circle of holes 1: ;Label – name of drilling pattern
N150 HOLES2(50,50,37,20,20,9) ;Call drilling pattern cycle
N160 ENDLABEL:
N170 MCALL ;Deselect modal call
N180 T8 M6 ;Change tap
N190 S400 M3
N200 MCALL CYCLE84(10,0,2,0,30,,→ ;Modal call of tapping cycle
→3,5,0.8,180,300,500)
N210 REPEAT Circle of holes 1 ;Repeat drilling pattern
N220 MCALL ;Deselect modal call

Moreover, any drilling position may be entered as a repeatable drilling pattern by means of
screen forms.

Up to 5 positions can be programmed in the plane; all values are optionally absolute or
incremental (can be toggled with "Alternative" soft key). The "Delete all" soft key generates
an empty screen form.

Cycles
1-14 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.3 Cycle support in the program editor

Milling support
Milling support includes the following selection possibilities:

The "Standard pockets", "Grooves", and "Spigot" soft keys each branch into submenus with
a selection of several pocket, groove, or spigot cycles.
)DFH 7KUHDG
PLOOLQJ PLOOLQJ
3DWK 6ZLYHOLQJ
PLOOLQJ F\FOHV

6WDQGDUG
PLOOLQJ
*URRYHV

6SLJRW

!! 

Note
Pocket milling cycles POCKET1 and POCKET2 cannot be parameterized with this support.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-15
General
1.3 Cycle support in the program editor

Turning support
Turning support includes the following selection possibilities:

&XW
The undercut cycles for forms E and F (CYCLE94) as well as for the thread undercuts of
forms A to D (CYCLE96) are grouped together under the "Undercut" soft key.
7KUHDG
The "Thread" soft key contains a submenu for selection between single thread cutting or
*URRYH thread chaining.

8QGHUFXW

Recompiling
Retranslating program codes serves to change an existing program with the help of cycle
support. The cursor is placed on the line to be changed, and the "Recompile" soft key is
pressed.
This reopens the corresponding input screen form, which created the program piece, and
values may be modified.
Entering modifications directly into the created DIN code may prevent recompilation.
Therefore, consistent use of the cycle support is required and modifications are to be carried
out with the help of recompilation.

Cycles
1-16 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.3 Cycle support in the program editor

Default settings for cycle support

Cycles SW 6.4 and higher includes a field for setting data _SC_MASK[10] for cycle support.
These are integer type data and are created as NCK global data in the GUD7_SC.DEF.

Date Value Meaning

_SC_MASK [0] - CYCLE84:
Default settings for the _TECHNO parameter
(set by the machine tool manufacturer during commissioning)
_SC_MASK [1] - CYCLE840:
Default setting for the _TECHNO parameter
(set by the machine tool manufacturer during startup)
_SC_MASK [2] CYCLE97:
0 Suggested values when using a metric thread table according
to DIN13-1 version 11.1999
1 Suggested values when using a metric thread table according
to DIN13-1 version prior to 1999
(for backward compatibility of existing programs)
_SC_MASK [3 to 9] internal

Support for programming user cycles

References: /IAM/, HMI Installation and Startup Guide
BE1 "Expanding the User Interface"
IM2 "Startup of HMI Embedded"
IM2 "Startup of HMI Advanced"

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-17
General
1.4 Cycle support for user cycles

1.4 1.4 Cycle support for user cycles

1.4.1 Overview of necessary files

The following files constitute the basis for cycle support:

Assignment File Application File type

Cycle selection aeditor.com Standard and user Text file
cycles
common.com Standard and user Text file
(HMI Embedded only) cycles
Input screen form for *.com Standard or user cycles Text file
parameter assignment
Help screens *.bmp Standard or user cycles Bitmap
Online help pgz_<language>.pdf Standard cycles only pdf file
(HMI Advanced only) and
pgz_<language>.txt

Note
Any names can be chosen for the cycle support configuration files (*.com ).

1.4.2 Getting started with cycle support

Function
The horizontal soft key HS6 in the program editor is designated as the Entry soft key for user
cycles. Its function must be configured in file aeditor.com. Assign a text to the soft key and
configure a function in the press block for soft key operation.

Example

//S(Start)
...
HS5=($80270,,se1)
PRESS(HS5)
LS("Turning",,1)
END_PRESS
HS6=("Usercycle",,se1) ;HS6 is configured with the "Usercycle" text
PRESS(HS6)
LS("SK_Cycles1","cycproj1") ;When the soft key is pressed, a soft key bar is
;loaded from the file cycproj1.com
END_PRESS

Cycles
1-18 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.4 Cycle support for user cycles

A detailed description of the configuration is given in:

References: /IAM/, HMI Installation and Startup Guide: BE1 "Expanding the User Interface"

%_N_COMMON_COM
;$PATH=/_N_CUS_DIR
...
[MMC_DOS]
...
SC315=AEDITOR.COM
SC316=AEDITOR.COM

1.4.3 Cycle support configuration

Function
The soft key bars and input screen forms of cycle support can be configured in any file and
stored as type *.com in the HMI of the control.
A detailed description of the configuration is given in:
References: /IAM/, HMI Installation and Startup Guide: BE1 "Expanding the User Interface"
In HMI Advanced, the *.com files are stored in data management in the directories:
• dh\cst.dir (for Siemens cycles)
• dh\cma.dir or
• dh\cus.dir
and the usual search sequence is followed: cus.dir, cma.dir, cst.dir. The files are not loaded
into the NCU.
For HMI Embedded, the *.com files can be loaded into the NCU (read in via "Services" using
V.24). But as they occupy NC memory there, it is better to integrate them in the HMI. They
must be packed and incorporated into the application software of the HMI version. The tool
to pack the files is included with the standard cycle software under \hmi_emb\tools.

Step sequence for creation

1. Copy file arj.exe from directory \hmi_emb\tools to an empty directory on a PC.
2. Copy the separate *.com configuration files to this directory.
3. Pack each individual com file with the command:
arj a <Target file name> <Source file name>
The target files must have the co_ target extension.
Example: Pack configured file cycproj1.com to:
arj a cycproj1.co_ cycproj1.com.
4. Copy the *.co_ files to the relevant directory of the HMI application software and create a
version.
References:
/BEM/, HMI Embedded Operator's Guide
/IAM/, HMI Installation and Startup Guide: IM2 "Startup of HMI Embedded"

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-19
General
1.4 Cycle support for user cycles

1.4.4 Bitmap size and screen resolution

With SW 6.2, there are three different screen resolutions in the HMI.
For each of the resolutions, there is a maximum bitmap size for the cycle screen forms (see
the following table), which is to be observed when creating your own bitmaps.

Screen resolution Bitmap size

640 * 480 224 * 224 pixels
800 * 600 280 * 280 pixels
1024 * 768 352 * 352 pixels

Bitmaps are created and stored as 256-color bitmaps.

1.4.5 Bitmap storage in the data management of HMI Advanced

New paths in the data management are set up for the different screen resolutions, such that
the bitmaps can be stored in parallel in different sizes.
Standard cycles:
• dh\cst.dir\hlp.dir\640.dir
• dh\cst.dir\hlp.dir\800.dir
• dh\cst.dir\hlp.dir\1024.dir
Manufacturer cycles:
• dh\cma.dir\hlp.dir\640.dir
• dh\cma.dir\hlp.dir\800.dir
• dh\cma.dir\hlp.dir\1024.dir
User cycles:
• dh\cus.dir\hlp.dir\640.dir
• dh\cus.dir\hlp.dir\800.dir
• dh\cus.dir\hlp.dir\1024.dir
Depending on the current resolution, the appropriate directory (for example,
dh\...\hlp.dir\640.dir for 640 * 480) is searched first, followed by dh\...\hlp.dir.
Otherwise, the search sequence cus.dir, cma.dir, cst.dir applies.

Cycles
1-20 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.4 Cycle support for user cycles

1.4.6 Bitmap handling for HMI Embedded

Introduction
With HMI Embedded, the bitmaps are incorporated in the HMI software. They are grouped
together into a package cst.arj. Bitmaps can always be integrated in *.bmp format. However,
to save more space and display faster, use a *.bin binary format.

Requirement
In order to generate this, you need the tools supplied in the \hmi_emb\tools directory of the
standard cycles software:
• arj.exe, bmp2bin.exe and
• sys_conv.col
• arj_idx.exe
and the script files:
• mcst_640.bat,
• mcst_800.bat or
• mcst1024.bat.
File cst.arj contains all standard and user cycle bitmaps, so you will have to link together the
standard cycle bitmaps and your own bitmaps.

Step sequence for creation

1. Copy all the files from directory \hmi_emb\tools to an empty directory on a PC.
2. Create a subdirectory \bmp_file in this new directory.
3. Copy your own *.bmp bitmaps to this \bmp_file subdirectory.
4. Depending on the resolution, for which a cst.arj is being created, start
mcst_640.bat/mcst_800.bat or mcst1024.bat.
5. The cst.arj created will then be located in the same directory as the generation tools.
6. As of SW 6.3, a further file, cst.idx, is also created in this directory. This is integrated into
the HMI software along with cst.arj.
References:
/BEM/, HMI Embedded Operator's Guide
/IAM/, HMI Installation and Startup Guide: IM2 "Startup of HMI Embedded"

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-21
General
1.5 Cycle startup

1.5 1.5 Cycle startup

1.5.1 Machine data

The following machine data must be taken into account when using cycles: The minimum
values for these machine data are given in the table below.

Relevant machine data

MD MD name Minimum value

number
18118 MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES 7
18130 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN 20
18150 MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM 2 * number of channels
18170 MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES 40
18180 MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM 500
28020 MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL 200
28040 MM_NUM_LUD_VALUES_MEM 25

Notice
These specifications are valid only for the Siemens standard cycles.
For user cycles, the corresponding values must be added.
When using ShopMill or ShopTurn, comply with the information relevant to these products.

The following machine data settings are also required:

MD MD name Minimum value

number
20240 CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCK 4

The machine data files are delivered with these defaults by the machine manufacturer.
Remember: Any changes you make to these machine data will not apply until you perform a
power ON.

Notice
For the cycle CYCLE840 (tapping with compensating chuck), the axis-specific machine data
element MD 30200: NUM_ENCS must also be taken into account.

Cycles
1-22 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.5 Cycle startup

1.5.2 Definition files for cycles GUD7.DEF and SMAC.DEF

Standard cycles require Global User Data definitions (GUDs) and macro definitions. These
are stored in definition files GUD7.DEF and SMAC.DEF, supplied with the standard cycles.

Relevant definition files

To facilitate the system startup engineer's task of combining GUDs and macros in in one
block without editing the original SIEMENS files, starting with SW 6.3, the following files are
supplied in their entirety along with the "standard cycles":
• GUD7.DEF
• SMAC.DEF
These two files contain no definitions and are simply shortcuts to predefined, product-
specific definition files. The call-up mechanisms now included in these cycles allow
automatic call-up and compilation of all product-specific GUD and macro definitions.
Each package will now only contain its own definitions. New cycle files GUD7_xxx.DEF and
SMAC_xxx.DEF, which will be in data management in the definition directory DEF.DIR, will
be introduced.
The new files for the standard cycles are:
• GUD7_SC.DEF and
• SMAC_SC.DEF.
For other cycle packages the following file IDs are currently occupied by SIEMENS:
(xxx stands for "GUD7" or "SMAC")

File ID SIEMENS assignment

xxx_JS JobShop cycles in general
xxx_MC Measuring cycles
xxx_MJ Measuring in JOG
xxx_MT ManualTurn
xxx_SM ShopMill
xxx_ST ShopTurn
xxx_ISO ISO compatibility
xxx_C950 Extended stock removal
xxx_C73 Pocket with islands

Note
Additional IDs not shown here can also be used by the system!

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-23
General
1.5 Cycle startup

According to the definition of Defining user data (see programming guide "Defining user
data" production planning), the GUD7 blocks and the SMAC.DEF are NOT available to the
machine tool manufacturer/user! MGUD, UGUD, GUD4,8,9 and MMAC, UMAC should
preferably be employed in user applications.
However, in order to give users the option of integrating their existing definitions in these
blocks in this system, the following IDs are kept free:

File ID Assignment
xxx_CMA Manufacturer
xxx_CUS User

Startup, upgrading for standard cycles

1. If a GUD7.DEF is already active in the control system, select the GUD7 user data via
"Services", "Data out", "NC active data" and back up the current values in an archive or
on diskette.
2. Read in files GUD7_SC.DEF and SMAC_SC.DEF and load them into NCU.
3. Read in and activate GUD7.DEF and SMAC.DEF.
4. Switch the NCU power on.
5. Read in the archive of saved values again.

Loading an additional cycle package

1. Unload GUD7.DEF and SMAC.DEF (first back up the values, if necessary).
2. Read in files GUD7_xxx.DEF and SMAC_xxx.DEF and load them into NCU.
3. Reactivate GUD7.DEF and SMAC.DEF.

Note
When loading or unloading individual definition files, if a call-up file is already loaded it
must be unloaded and then reloaded. Otherwise, the NC retains the previous GUD/macro
configuration.

Operation in the HMI Advanced simulation

After upgrading the cycle version in the NCU, machine data adjustment followed by an NC
reset of the simulation is necessary as soon as you start the simulation, in order to activate
the modified definition files.

Cycles
1-24 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.5 Cycle startup

1.5.3 New delivery forms for cycles in HMI Advanced

As of HMI Advanced 6.3, the delivery form of standard cycles in the HMI will change. The
cycle files will no longer be stored as individual files in the corresponding directories of the
data management. Instead, they will be available as archive files under:
→ Archives/cycle archives.
This will enable the previously existing cycle version in data management to be retained
unchanged when the HMI is upgraded.
For upgrading, these archive files must be read in via "Data in". If these archive files are read
in, after the upgrade there are no longer different versions of the cycles in the NCU and on
the hard disk. The loaded cycles are overwritten in the NCU, not loaded on the hard drive.
The new cycle files are always stored on the hard disk.
References: For current information, see:
• "siemensd.txt" file in the supplied software (standard cycles) or
• In the case of HMI Advanced, F:\dh\cst.dir\HLP.dir\siemensd.txt.

1.5.4 Upgrading the cycles with SW 6.4 and higher in HMI Advanced with SW 6.3 and
higher
When upgrading a cycle version with SW 6.4 and higher, the archives in HMI Advanced
must first be exchanged under:
→ Archives/cycle archives.
To this end, the supplied software contains several archives for overwriting the existing cycle
archives. These archives can be found in the supply software in the path
→ hmi_adv
References: For current information, see:
• "siemensd.txt" file in the supplied software (standard cycles) or
• In the case of HMI Advanced, F:\dh\cst.dir\HLP.dir\siemensd.txt.
Once the cycle archives have been overwritten, they must be loaded as described in the
previous section "New delivery forms for cycles in HMI Advanced".

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-25
General
1.6 Additional functions for cycles

1.6 1.6 Additional functions for cycles

Version display
To provide an overview and for diagnosis of the cycle versions and their definition files, as of
SW 6.3 it will be possible to display and use version screens.
These can be found in HMI under "Diagnostics => "Service displays" => "Version" => "Cycle
Version" or "Definit. Version". A LOG file in ASCII format can be generated and read out
under "Services" => "Diagnostics" => "LOG files".

Note
This function can also only be run with HMI software versions SW 6.3 and higher.

Different overviews are possible with cycle version display:

• Overview of all available cycles.
• Overview of individual directories of data management for user cycles (CUS.DIR),
manufacturer cycles (CMA.DIR), and Siemens cycles (CST.DIR).
• Package overview of all cycle packages available in the control system.
• Details of individual packages and cycle files.
References:
/BAD/, HMI Advanced Operator's Guide
/BEM/, HMI Embedded Operator's Guide, Service Display section
The version display includes all the *.SPF cycle files and all the *.COM files of cycle support.
No additional files are required for version display via directories or all cycles. To display
overviews of individual cycle packages, each cycle package must contain a package list of
all associated files.

Package lists
A new file type for packages lists is introduced:
*.cyp (for cycle package), cycle package list in plain text.
Users can create package lists for their own cycle packages. They must look like this:
Structure of a package list:

1. Line Version entry (after the key word

;VERSION:) and package name (after the key word
;PACKAGE:)
Starting from the List of files associated with the cycle package with their name and type
2nd line
Last line M30

Cycles
1-26 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 General
1.6 Additional functions for cycles

Example

%_N_CYC_USER1_CYP
;$PATH=/_N_CUS_DIR
;VERSION: 01.02.03 31.10.2002 ;PACKAGE: $85200
ZYKL1.SPF
ZYKL2.SPF
ZYKL3.COM
M30

Input in the text file uc.com:

85200 0 0 "Cycle package 1"
The following is displayed in the package overview:

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 1-27
General
1.6 Additional functions for cycles

The following is displayed in the detail overview:

Note
The cycle package name behind the keyword PACKAGE can also be written as a string in "
". However, it is language-dependent in this case.

Version entries in cycles

Exactly as in the case of package lists, the entry after the keyword ";VERSION:" is assessed
as the version ID.
The version entry has to be located in the first ten lines of the cycle, the search does not go
any further.
Example

%_N_ZYKL1_SPF
;$PATH=/_N_CUS_DIR
;VERSION: 01.02.03 31.10.2002
;Comment
PROC CYCLE1(REAL PAR1)
...

Cycles
1-28 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns 2
2.1 2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.1 General information

Function
Drilling cycles are motional sequences specified according to DIN 66025 for drilling, boring,
tapping, etc.
They are called in the form of a subroutine with a defined name and a parameter list.

Boring cycles
A total of five cycles is provided for boring. They all follow a different technological procedure
and are, therefore, parameterized differently:

Boring cycle Cycle Special parameterization features

Boring 1 CYCLE85 Different feed rates for boring and retraction (for reaming)
Boring 2 CYCLE86 Oriented spindle stop, specification of retraction path, retraction in rapid
traverse, specification of direction of spindle rotation (for boring)
Boring 3 CYCLE87 Spindle stop M5 and program stop M0 at drilling depth, continue after
NC start, retraction in rapid traverse, specification of direction of spindle
rotation
Boring 4 CYCLE88 Like CYCLE87 plus dwell time at drilling depth
Boring 5 CYCLE89 Boring and retraction at the same feedrate

The drilling cycles can be modal, that is, they are executed at the end of each block
containing motion commands. Other cycles written by the user can also be called modally.

Parameters
There are two types of parameters:
• Geometrical parameters and
• Machining parameters

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-1
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

The geometrical parameters are identical for all drilling cycles, drilling pattern cycles and
milling cycles. They define the reference and retraction planes, the safety clearance and the
absolute or relative final drilling depth. Geometrical parameters are assigned once during the
first drilling cycle CYCLE81.
The machining parameters have a different meaning and effect in the individual cycles. They
are therefore programmed in each cycle separately.

*HRPHWULFDOSDUDPHWHUV

5HWUDFWLRQSODQH
6DIHW\FOHDUDQFH
5HIHUHQFHSODQH

)LQDOGULOOLQJGHSWK

2.1.2 Requirements

Call and return conditions

Drilling cycles are programmed independently of the actual axis names. The drilling position
must be approached in the higher-level program before the cycle is called.
The required values for feedrate, spindle speed and direction of spindle rotation must be
programmed in the part program if there are no defining parameters in the drilling cycle.
The G functions and current frame active before the cycle was called remain active beyond
the cycle.

Cycles
2-2 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Plane definition
Drilling cycles generally assume that the current workpiece coordinate system, in which the
machining operation is to be performed, has been defined by selecting a plane (G17, G18 or
G19) and activating a programmable frame. The drilling axis is always the axis in this
coordinate system that is vertical on this plane.
A tool length compensation must be selected before the cycle is called. Its effect is always
perpendicular to the selected plane and remains active even after the end of the cycle.
FRPSHQVDWLRQ
'ULOOLQJD[LV

/HQJWK

Spindle handling
The drilling cycles are set up such that the spindle commands they contain always refer to
the active master spindle of the control system. If you want to use a drilling cycle on a
machine with several spindles, you must first define the spindle with which you will be
working as the master spindle.

Dwell time programming

The parameters for dwell times in the drilling cycles are always assigned to the F word and
must therefore be assigned with values in seconds. Any deviations from this procedure must
be expressly stated.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-3
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.3 Drilling, centering - CYCLE81

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the specified final drilling
depth.

;

Programming
CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR)

Parameters

Parameters Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)

Cycles
2-4 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Example of drilling, centering

Use this program to produce 3 drill holes using the CYCLE81 drilling cycle, whereby this is
called using different parameters. The drilling axis is always the Z axis.

< < $%






% ; =

    

N10 G0 G90 F200 S300 M3 ;Specification of technology values

N20 D1 T3 Z110 ;Approach retraction plane
N21 M6
N30 X40 Y120 ;Approach first drilling position
N40 CYCLE81(110, 100, 2, 35) ;Cycle call with absolute end drilling
;depth, safety clearance and incomplete
;parameter list
N50 Y30 ;Approach next drilling position
N60 CYCLE81(110, 102, , 35) ;Cycle call without safety clearance
N70 G0 G90 F180 S300 M03 ;Specification of technology values
N80 X90 ;Approach next position
N90 CYCLE81(110, 100, 2, , 65) ;Cycle call with relative end drilling
;depth, and safety clearance
N100 M30 ;Program end

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Traversing to the final drilling depth at the feedrate programmed in the calling program
(G1)
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-5
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Explanation of the parameters

=
*
*

573
5)36',6
5)3
;

'3 5)3'35

RFP and RTP (reference plane and retraction plane)

Normally, reference plane (RFP) and return plane (RTP) have different values. The cycle
assumes that the retraction plane precedes the reference plane. The clearance between the
retraction plane and the final drilling depth is therefore greater than the clearance between
the reference plane and the final drilling depth.

Note
If the values for reference and retraction planes are identical, a relative depth specification is
not permitted. The error message 61101 "Reference plane defined incorrectly" is output and
the cycle is not executed.
This error message is also output if the retraction plane is located after the reference plane,
i.e. its distance to the final drilling depth is smaller.

SDIS (safety clearance)

The safety clearance (SDIS) acts with reference to the reference plane. This reference plane
is shifted by the amount of the safety clearance.
The direction in which the safety distance is active is automatically determined by the cycle.
DP and DPR (final drilling depth)
The final drilling depth can be specified as either absolute (DP) or relative (DPR) to the
reference plane.
With relative specification, the cycle will calculate the resulting depth automatically using the
positions of reference and retraction planes.

Note
If a value is entered both for DP and for DPR, the final drilling depth is derived from DPR. If
this differs from the absolute depth programmed via DP, the message "Depth:
Corresponding to value for relative depth" is output in the dialog line.

Cycles
2-6 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.4 Drilling, counterboring - CYCLE82:

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the specified final drilling
depth. A dwell time can be allowed to elapse when the final drilling depth has been reached.

;

Programming
CYCLE82 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at final drilling depth

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-7
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Example of drilling, counterboring

The program machines a single hole of a depth of 27 mm at position X24 Y15 in the XY
plane with cycle CYCLE82.
The dwell time programmed is 2 s, the safety clearance in the drilling axis Z is 4 mm.

< < $%

%


 ;  =


N10 G0 G90 F200 S300 M3 ;Specification of technology values

N20 D1 T3 Z110 ;Approach retraction plane
N21 M6
N30 X24 Y15 ;Approach drilling position
N40 CYCLE82 (110, 102, 4, 75, , 2) ;Cycle call with absolute end drilling
;depth, and safety clearance
N50 M30 ;Program end

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Traversing to the final drilling depth at the feedrate programmed in the calling program
(G1).
• Execution of dwell time at final drilling depth.
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0.

Cycles
2-8 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Explanation of the parameters

=
*
*
*

573
5)36',6
5)3
;
'3 5)3'35

DTB (dwell time)

The dwell time to the final drilling depth (chip breaking) is programmed under DTB in
seconds.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-9
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.5 Deep-hole drilling - CYCLE83

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling
depth.
Deep hole drilling is performed with a depth infeed of a maximum definable depth executed
several times, increasing gradually until the final drilling depth is reached.
Optionally, the drilling machine can be retracted after each infeed depth either to the
reference plane + safety clearance for chip removal or by the length of the programmed
retraction path for chip breakage.

;

Programming
CYCLE83 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, FDEP, FDPR, DAM, DTB, DTS, FRF,
VARI, _AXN, _MDEP, _VRT, _DTD, _DIS1)

Cycles
2-10 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
FDEP real First drilling depth (absolute)
FDPR real First drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DAM real Degression (enter without sign)
Values: > 0: Degression as a quantity
< 0: Degression factor
= 0: No degression
DTB real Dwell time at drilling depth (chip breakage)
Values: > 0: in seconds
< 0: in revolutions
DTS real Dwell time at starting point and for chip removal
Values: > 0: in seconds
< 0: in revolutions
FRF real Feedrate factor for first drilling depth (enter without sign
Value range: 0.001...1
VARI integer Machining type
Values: 0: Chip breakage
1: Chip removal
_AXN integer Tool axis
Values: 1: 1. geometrical axis
2: 2. geometrical axis
otherwise 3rd geometrical axis
_MDEP real Minimum drilling depth (only in connection with degression factor)
_VRT real Variable retraction value for chip breakage (VARI=0)
Values: > 0: if retraction value
= 0: retraction value 1 mm set
_DTD real Dwell time at final drilling depth
Values: > 0: in seconds
< 0: in revolutions
= 0: Value same as DTB
_DIS1 real Programmable limit distance for reimmersion in the drill hole (for chip
removal VARI=1)
Values: > 0: Programmable value applies
= 0: automatic calculation

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-11
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Example of deep-hole drilling

This program executes the cycle CYCLE83 at the positions X80 Y120 and X80 Y60 in the
XY plane. The first drill hole is drilled with a dwell time zero and machining type chip
breaking.
The final drilling depth and the first drilling depth are entered as absolute values. In the
second cycle call, a dwell time of 1 s is programmed. Machining type chip removal is
selected, the final drilling depth is relative to the reference plane. The drilling axis in both
cases is the Z axis.
The drilling stroke is calculated on the basis of a degression factor and must not become
shorter than the minimum drilling depth of 8 mm.

< < $%

$


%


 ;  =



DEF REAL RTP=155, RFP=150, SDIS=1, ;Definition of parameters

DP=5, DPR=145, FDEP=100, FDPR=50,
DAM=20, DTB=1, FRF=1, VARI=0, _VRT=0.8,
_MDEP=8, _DIS1=0.4
N10 G0 G17 G90 F50 S500 M4 ;Specification of technology values
N20 D1 T42 Z155 ;Approach retraction plane
N30 X80 Y120 ;Approach first drilling position
N40 CYCLE83 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, ,-> ;Call of cycle depth parameters with
-> FDEP, , DAM, , , FRF, VARI, , , _VRT) ;absolute values
N50 X80 Y60 ;Approach next drilling position
N55 DAM=-0.6 FRF=0.5 VARI=1 ;Value assignment
N60 CYCLE83 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, , DPR, , -> ;Call of cycle with relative
-> FDPR, DAM, DTB, , FRF, VARI, , _MDEP, ;specifications of final drilling depth
-> , , _DIS1) ;and 1st drilling depth, the
;safety clearance is 1 mm and the
;feedrate factor is 0.5
N70 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block.

Cycles
2-12 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.
The cycle creates the following sequence:
Deep-hole drilling with chip removal (VARI=1):

*
*
*

573
5)36',6
5)3
;
)'(3

)'(3

'3 5)3'35

• Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Traversing to the first drilling depth with G1, whereby the feedrate results from the
feedrate programmed during the cycle call that is compensated with the FRF (feedrate
factor) parameter.
• Execution of dwell time at final drilling depth (DTB parameter).
• Retraction to the reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
for chip removal.
• Execute dwell time at starting point (DTS parameter).
• Approach of the last drilling depth reached, minus the limit distance, programmable or
calculated within the cycle, with G0.
• Traversing to next drilling depth with G1 (motion sequence is continued until the final
drilling depth is reached).
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-13
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Deep-hole drilling with chip breakage (VARI=0):

*
*
*

573
5)36',6
5)3
;

)'(3

'3 5)3'35

• Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Traversing to the first drilling depth with G1, whereby the feedrate results from the
feedrate programmed during the cycle call that is compensated with the FRF (feedrate
factor) parameter.
• Execute dwell time at final drilling depth (DTB parameter).
• Variable retraction (Parameter _VRT) from the current drilling depth with G! and the
feedrate programmed in the calling program (for chip breakage).
• Traversing to next drilling depth with G1 and the programmed feedrate (motion sequence
is continued until the final drilling depth is reached).
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0.

Explanation of the parameters

FDEP and FDPR (first drilling depth absolute and relative)
The first drilling depth is programmed by either one of these two parameters. The FDPR
parameter has the same effect in the cycle as the DPR parameter. If the values for the
reference and retraction planes are identical, the first drilling depth can be defined as a
relative value.
DAM (Degression)
With deep holes, drilled in several steps, it is useful to work with degressive values for the
individual drilling strokes (degression). This allows for removal of the chips and there is no
tool breakage.
In the parameter, either program an incremental degression value in order to reduce the first
drilling depth step by step or a % value to act as a degression factor.
DAM=0 no degression
DAM>0 degression as value

Cycles
2-14 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

The current depth is derived in the cycle as follows:

• In the first step, the depth parameterized with the first drilling depth FDEP or FDPR is
traversed, as long as it does not exceed the total drilling depth.
• From the second drilling depth on, the drilling stroke is obtained by subtracting the
amount of degression from the stroke of the last drilling depth, provided that the latter is
greater than the programmed amount of degression.
If a value smaller than the programmed amount of degression has already been obtained
for the second drilling stroke, this is executed in one cut.
• The next drilling strokes correspond to the amount of degression, as long as the
remaining depth is greater than twice the amount of degression.
• The last two drilling strokes are divided and traversed equally and are therefore always
greater than half of the amount of degression.
• If the value for the first drilling depth is incompatible with the total depth, the error
message 61107 "First drilling depth defined incorrectly" is output and the cycle is not
executed.
Example of drilling strokes:
Programming the values RTP=0, SDIS=0, DP=-40, FDEP=-12, and DAM=3 results in the
following drilling strokes:

Value Meaning
-12 Corresponds to the first drilling depth
-21 The incremental difference 9 results from the first drilling depth 12
minus the degression value 3
-27 Previous drilling depth minus degression value 3
-30, -33, -36 Degression value
-38, -40 Remaining depth divided into two cuts

DAM<0 (-0.001 to -1) degression factor

The current depth is derived in the cycle as follows:
• The first step is traversing the depth parameterized with the first drilling depth FDED or
FDPR, provided it does not exceed the total drilling depth.
• The next drilling strokes are calculated from the last drilling stroke multiplied by the
degression factor, as long as the stroke does not fall below the minimum drilling depth.
• The last two drilling strokes are divided equally and traversed and are, therefore, always
greater than half of the minimum drilling depth.
• If the value for the first drilling depth is incompatible with the total depth, the error
message 61107 "First drilling depth defined incorrectly" is output and the cycle is not
executed.
• If the value DAM<-1 is programmed, the cycle aborts and generates error message
61019 “Parameter DAM defined incorrectly“.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-15
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Example of drilling strokes:

Programming the values RTP=0, SDIS=0, DP=-40, FDEP=-10, DAM=-0.8, and MDEP=5
results in the following drilling strokes:

Value Meaning
-10 Corresponds to the first drilling depth
-18 The incremental difference 8 corresponds to 0.8 • the first drilling depth
-24.4, -29.52 The relevant previous drilling depth • degression factor
-34.52 Minimum drilling depth MDEP is in effect
-37.26, -40 Remaining depth divided into two cuts

DTB (dwell time)

The dwell time at final drilling depth (chip breaking) is programmed in DTB in seconds or
revolutions of the main spindle.
DTS (dwell time)
The dwell time at the starting point is only performed if VARI=1 (chip removal).
FRF (feedrate factor)
With this parameter, you can specify a reduction factor for the active feedrate which only
applies to the approach to the first drilling depth in the cycle.
If the FRF programmed is too large, no alarm is output. The factor is limited to 1 within the
cycle.
VARI (machining type)
If parameter VARI=0 is set, the drill retracts by the programmed retraction distance after
reaching each drilling depth for chip breaking. If VARI=1 (for chip removal), the drill traverses
in each case to the reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance.
_AXN (tool axis)

Cycles
2-16 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

By programming the drilling axis via _AXN, it is possible to omit the switchover from plane
G18 to G17 when the deep-hole drilling cycle is used on turning machines.
The identifiers have the following meanings:

_AXN=1 1. axis of the current plane

_AXN=2 2. axis of the current plane
_AXN=3 3. axis of the current plane
For example, to machine a center hole (in Z) in the G18 plane, you program:
G18
_AXN=1

_MDEP (minimum drilling depth)

You can define a minimum drilling depth for drill stroke calculations based on a degression
factor. If the calculated drilling stroke becomes shorter than the minimum drilling depth, the
remaining depth is machined in strokes equaling the length of the minimum drilling depth.
_VRT (variable retraction value for chip breakage with VARI=0)
You can program the retraction path for chip breaking.
_DTD (dwell time at final drilling depth)
The dwell time at final drilling depth can be entered in seconds or revolutions.
_DIS1 (programmable limit distance for VARI=1)
The limit distance after re-insertion in the hole can be programmed.
The limit distance is calculated within the cycle as follows:
• Up to a drilling depth of 30 mm, the value is set to 0.6 mm.
• For larger drilling depths, the limit distance is the result of
(RFP + SDIS – current depth) / 50. If this calculated value >7, a limit of 7 mm, maximum,
is applied.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-17
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.6 Rigid tapping - CYCLE84

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final thread
depth.
CYCLE84 can be used to make tapped holes without compensating chuck.
The cycle is also capable of performing tapping operations in several stages (deep-hole
drilling).

Notice
CYCLE84 can be used if the spindle to be used for the boring operation is technically able to
be operated in the position-controlled spindle operation.

;

Programming
CYCLE84 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, SDAC, MPIT, PIT, POSS, SST,
SST1, _AXN, _PTAB, _TECHNO, _VARI, _DAM, _VRT)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at thread depth (chip breaking)

Cycles
2-18 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Parameter Data type Meaning

SDAC integer Direction of rotation after end of cycle
Values: 3, 4 or 5
MPIT real Pitch as a thread size (signed):
Range of 3: (for M3) to 48: (for M48), the sign determines the
values: direction of rotation in the thread
PIT real Pitch as a value (signed)
Range of 0.001 ... 2000.000 mm), the sign determines the
values: direction of rotation in the thread:
if _PTAB=0 or 1: in mm (as previously)
if _PTAB=2: in thread grooves per inch
if _PTAB=3: in inches/rotation
POSS real Spindle position for oriented spindle stop in the cycle (in degrees)
SST real Speed for tapping
SST1 real Speed for retraction
_AXN integer Tool axis
Values: 1: 1. geometrical axis
2: 2. geometrical axis
otherwise 3rd geometrical axis
_PTAB integer Evaluation of thread pitch PIT
Values: 0: corresponds to programmed measuring system inch/metric
1: Pitch in mm
2: pitch in thread grooves per inch
3: pitch in inches/rotation
_TECHNO integer Technological settings
Values: UNITS DIGIT: Exact stop behavior
0: As programmed before cycle call
1: (G601)
2: (G602)
3: (G603)
TENS DIGIT: Feed-forward control
0: As programmed before cycle call
1: with feed-forward control (FFWON)
2: without feed-forward control (FFWOF)
HUNDREDS DIGIT: Acceleration
0: As programmed before cycle call
1: Axis acceleration with jerk limitation (SOFT)
2: Abrupt axis acceleration (BRISK)
3: Reduced axis acceleration (DRIVE)
THOUSANDS DIGIT:
0: Reactivate spindle operation (for MCALL)
1: Remain in position-controlled operation (for MCALL)
_VARI integer Machining type
Values: 0: Tapping in one pass
1: Deep-hole tapping with chip breakage
2: Deep-hole tapping with chip removal
_DAM real Incremental drilling depth
value range: 0 <= Max. value
_VRT real Variable retraction value for chip breakage
value range: 0 <= Max. value

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-19
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Example of rigid tapping

A thread is tapped without compensating chuck at position X30 Y35 in the XY plane; the
tapping axis is the Z axis. No dwell time is programmed; the depth is programmed as a
relative value. The parameters for the direction of rotation and for the pitch must be assigned
values. A metric thread M5 is tapped.

< < $%

%


 ; =



N10 G0 G90 T4 D1 ;Specification of technology values

N20 G17 X30 Y35 Z40 ;Approach drilling position
N30 CYCLE84 (40, 36, 2, , 30, , 3, 5, -> ;Cycle call, parameter PIT has been
->, 90, 200, 500) ;omitted, no indication of absolute
;depth, no dwell time,
;Spindle stop at 90 degrees,
;rotational speed during tapping is 200,
;Speed for retraction is 500
N40 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Note
For tapping with compensating chuck, a separate cycle CYCLE840 is provided.

See also
Tapping with compensating chuck - CYCLE840 (Page 2-25)

Cycles
2-20 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Oriented spindle stop with SPOS (value in POSS parameter) and transfer of spindle to
axis operation.
• Tapping to final drilling depth with G331 and speed of rotation SST.
• Execute dwell time at thread depth (DTB parameter).
• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance with G332,
speed of rotation SST1 and direction of rotation reversal.
• Retraction of the retraction plane with G0, by rewriting the last programmed spindle
speed of rotation before the cycle call and the direction of rotation programmed under
SDAC, the spindle operation is reinitiated (if this is programmed as such in the _TECHNO
parameter).

Explanation of the parameters

6'$&
=
*
*
*
*

573
5)36',6
5)3
;

'3 5)3'35

DTB (dwell time)

The dwell time must be programmed in seconds. When tapping blind holes, it is
recommended that you omit the dwell time.
SDAC (direction of rotation after end of cycle)
Under SDAC, the direction of rotation after end of cycle is programmed. For tapping, the
direction is changed automatically by the cycle.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-21
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

MPIT and PIT (as thread size and as value)

The value for the thread pitch can be defined either as the thread size (for metric threads
between M3 and M48 only) or as a value (distance from one thread turn to the next as a
numerical value). The parameter not required in each case is omitted in the call or is
assigned the value zero.
RH or LH threads are defined by the sign of the pitch parameters:
• Positive value → right (same as M3)
• Negative value → left (same as M4)
If the two thread pitch parameters have conflicting values, alarm 61001 "Thread pitch wrong"
is generated by the cycle and cycle execution is aborted.
POSS (spindle position)
In the cycle, the spindle is oriented and stopped, and brought into position control before
tapping with the SPOS command.
The spindle position for this spindle stop is programmed under POSS.
SST (speed)
Parameter SST contains the spindle speed for the tapping block with G331.
SST1 (speed for retraction)
The speed for retraction from the tapped hole is programmed under SST1 with G332. If this
parameter is assigned the value zero, retraction is carried out at the speed programmed
under SST.
_AXN (tool axis)

By programming the drilling axis via _AXN, it is possible to omit the switchover from plane
G18 to G17 when deep-hole tapping is used on turning machines.

Cycles
2-22 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

The identifiers have the following meanings:

_AXN=1 1. axis of the current plane

_AXN=2 2. axis of the current plane
_AXN=3 3. axis of the current plane
For example, to machine a tapped hole (in Z) in the G18 plane, you program:
G18
_AXN=1
_PTAB (Evaluation of thread pitch PIT)
Parameter _PTAB determines the unit of measurement of the thread pitch.
• 0 = According to programmed system of units inch/metric
• 1 = Pitch in mm
• 2 = Pitch in thread starts per inch
• 3 = Pitch in inches/revolution
This parameter is needed in connection with the option for selecting different thread tables in
the cycles support.
_TECHNO (Technological settings
Parameter _TECHNO can be set to select technological characteristics for tapping
operations.
Possible settings: see CYCLE84 parameter table
With the "Technology" "Yes" input box, both the machine tool manufacturer and the
operator/programmer can make technology adjustments for tapping.
• Adjustments by the machine tool manufacturer (Cycles SW 6.4 and higher)
– Requirements: Manufacturer password is set, input box "Technology" = "Yes"
– When the input cycle screen form CYCLE84 is opened, the parameters are
preassigned with the value of GUD7 variable _SC_MASK[0]. When the parameters
are changed, the values are written directly to this GUD7 variable (see "Cycle support
in program editor" in General section)
– This enables the machine manufacturer to customize the default settings to the
characteristics of his machine.
• Adjustments by the operator/programmer (Cycles SW 6.4 and higher)
– Requirements: Manufacturer password is deleted, input box "Technology" = "Yes"
– The modified data are used to generate CYCLE84. The machine manufacturer
settings will take effect the next time a tapping cycle is called.
Input field "Technology" and the following input fields are not shown if the keyswitch is in
position 0 or 1.
Deep-hole tapping _VARI, _DAM, _VRT
With the _VARI parameter, it is possible to distinguish between simple tapping (_VARI = 0)
and deep-hole tapping (_VARI ≠ 0).

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-23
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

In conjunction with deep-hole tapping, it is possible to choose between chip breaking

(retraction by variable distance from current drilling depth, parameter _VRT, _VARI = 1) and
chip removal (withdrawal from reference plane _VARI = 2). These functions work
analogously to the normal deep-hole drilling cycle CYCLE83.
The incremental drilling depth for one pass is specified via parameter _DAM. The cycle
internally calculates the intermediate depth as follows:
• The programmed incremental drilling depth is executed in each step until the rest up to
the final drilling depth is less than (<) 2 • _DAM
• The remaining drilling depth is halved and executed in two steps. Thus, the minimum
drilling depth is not smaller than _DAM/2.

Note
The direction of rotation when tapping in the cycle is always reversed automatically.
Within the cycle, the programmed direction of rotation in the thread can be reversed via
_ZSD[7]. With this setting, the cycle on turning machines can be adjusted to the C-axis
direction described in DIN 66217,
_ZSD[7]=1: The programmed sign of the pitch is reversed within the cycle.
_ZSD[7]=0: The programmed sign of the pitch is retained within the cycle.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81: Additional information (Page 2-5)

Cycles
2-24 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.7 Tapping with compensating chuck - CYCLE840

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final thread
depth.
With this cycle, tapped holes with compensating chuck can be made as follows:

Without encoder With encoder

6'$& 6'$&
= * = *
* *
*

573 573
5)36',6 5)36',6
5)3 5)3
; ;

'3 5)3'35 '3 5)3'35

6'5 6'5

Programming
CYCLE840 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, SDR, SDAC, ENC, MPIT, PIT,
_AXN, _PTAB, _TECHNO)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-25
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at thread depth: always in effect if >0 programmed
Value range: 0<=DTB
SDR real Direction of rotation for retraction
Values: 0: (automatic reversal of direction of rotation)
3 or 4: (for M3 or M4)
SDAC integer Direction of rotation after end of cycle
Values: 3, 4 or 5: (for M3, M4, or M5)
ENC integer Tapping with/without encoder
Values: 0: with encoder, without dwell time
1: without encoder, program feed rate before cycle
11: without encoder, calculate feed rate during cycle
20: with encoder, with dwell time
MPIT real Thread pitch as thread size
Range of 3 (for M3) ... 48 (for M48)
values:
PIT real Thread pitch as a value
Range of 0.001 ... 2000.000 mm), the sign determines the
values: direction of rotation in the thread:
if _PTAB=0 or 1: in mm
if _PTAB=2: in thread grooves per inch
if _PTAB=3: in inches/rotation
_AXN integer Tool axis
Values: 1: 1. geometrical axis
2: 2. geometrical axis
otherwise 3rd geometrical axis
_PTAB integer Evaluation of thread pitch PIT
Values: 0: corresponds to programmed measuring system inch/metric
1: Pitch in mm
2: pitch in thread grooves per inch
3: pitch in inches/rotation
_TECHNO integer Technological settings
Values: UNITS DIGIT: Exact stop behavior
0: As programmed before cycle call
1: (G601)
2: (G602)
3: (G603)
TENS DIGIT: Feed-forward control
0: As programmed before cycle call
1: with feed-forward control (FFWON)
2: without feed-forward control (FFWOF)

Cycles
2-26 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Example

< < $%

%


 ;  =


Tapping without encoder

In this program, a thread is tapped without encoder at position X35 Y35 in the XY plane; the
tapping axis is the Z axis. The parameters SDR and SDAC for the direction of rotation must
be assigned; parameter ENC is assigned the value 1, the value for the depth is the absolute
value. Pitch parameter PIT can be omitted. A compensating chuck is used in machining.

N10 G90 G0 D2 T2 S500 M3 ;Specification of technology values

N20 G17 X35 Y35 Z60 ;Approach drilling position
N30 G1 F200 ;Setting the path feedrate
N40 CYCLE840 (59, 56, , 15, , 1, 4, ;Cycle call, dwell time 1 s, SDR=4, SDAC=3,
3, 1) ;no safety clearance, parameters MPIT, PIT
;are not programmed, i.e., the pitch
;results from the relationship of
;user-programmed F and S values
N50 M30 ;Program end

Tapping with encoder

In this program, a thread is tapped with encoder at position X35 Y35 in the XY plane. The
drilling axis is the Z axis. The pitch parameter must be defined, automatic reversal of the
direction of rotation is programmed. A compensating chuck is used in machining.

DEF INT SDR=0 ;Definition of parameters with

DEF REAL PIT=3.5 ;Value assignments
N10 G90 G0 D2 T2 S500 M4 ;Specification of technology values
N20 G17 X35 Y35 Z60 ;Approach drilling position
N30 CYCLE840 (59, 56, , 15, , , , , ;Cycle call, without safety clearance, with
, , PIT) ;absolute
;depth specification, SDAC ENC, MPIT omitted
;(e.g., have a value of zero)
N40 M30 ;Program end

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-27
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Sequence
Tapping with compensating chuck without encoder (ENC = 1/11)
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Tapping to final drilling depth with G63.
• Execute dwell time at thread depth (DTB parameter).
• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance with G63.
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0.

Notice
The spindle override must be set to 100%!

Tapping with compensating chuck with encoder (ENC = 0/20)

Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Tapping to final drilling depth with G33.
• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance with G33.
• Execute dwell time at reference plane + safety clearance (DTB parameter) (only when
ENC=20).
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0.

Explanation of the parameters

DTB (dwell time)
The dwell time must be programmed in seconds. It works in parameter ENC depending on
the technological variant you selected.
SDR (direction of rotation for retraction)
The direction of rotation for retraction when tapping is programmed in parameter SDR. When
SDR=0, the spindle direction is reversed automatically.
SDAC (direction of rotation)
Because the cycle can also be called modally, it needs a direction of rotation for execution of
additional tapped holes. This is programmed in parameter SDAC and corresponds to the
direction of rotation programmed before the first call in the higher-level program. If SDR = 0,
the value assigned to SDAC is of no significance in the cycle and can be omitted from the
parameterization.

Note
For information about modal calling of drilling cycles, see Section 2.2.

Cycles
2-28 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

ENC (tapping)
To perform tapping without encoder although an encoder exists, parameter ENC must be set
to x1.
However, if an encoder is not present, and the parameter has a value of x0, it is not taken
into account during the cycle.
• Tapping without encoder, with indication of pitch
You can calculate the correlation between feedrate and speed via the programmed pitch
within the cycle for tapping without encoder (G63 thread). The speed must be
programmed before the cycle is called.
You can specify the pitch either via MPIT (metric thread unit) or via PIT (thread pitch as
value) just as for tapping without encoder.
The feedrate is then calculated in the cycle from the pitch and the speed. After the cycle
has ended, the last programmed feedrate applies again.

Programming:
ENC=11, program the pitch in MPIT or PIT
• Tapping with encoder, with dwell time
As an alternative, you can program a dwell time in the parameter DTB for tapping with
encoder (G33 thread). It applies after tapping and before retraction to the retraction plane
RTP, and is required for machines with unfavorable spindle dynamics.

Programming:
ENC=20, enter the dwell time in parameter DTB
MPIT and PIT (as thread size and as value)
The parameter for the pitch is only relevant if tapping is performed with encoder. The cycle
calculates the feedrate from the spindle speed and the pitch.
The value for the thread pitch can be defined either as the thread size (for metric threads
between M3 and M48 only) or as a value (distance from one thread turn to the next as a
numerical value). The parameter not required in each case is omitted in the call or is
assigned the value zero.
If the two thread pitch parameters have conflicting values, alarm 61001 "Thread pitch wrong"
is generated by the cycle and cycle execution is aborted.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-29
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

AXN (tool axis)

By programming the drilling axis via _AXN, it is possible to omit the switchover from plane
G18 to G17 when the deep-hole tapping cycle is used on turning machines. The identifiers
have the following meanings:

_AXN=1 1. axis of the current plane

_AXN=2 2. axis of the current plane
_AXN=3 3. axis of the current plane
For example, to machine a center hole (in Z) in the G18 plane, you program:
G18
_AXN=1
_PTAB (evaluation of thread pitch PIT)
Parameter _PTAB determines the unit of measurement of the thread pitch.
• 0 = According to programmed system of units inch/metric
• 1 = Pitch in mm
• 2 = Pitch in thread starts per inch
• 3 = Pitch in inches/revolution
This parameter is needed in connection with the option for selecting different thread tables in
the cycles support.

Cycles
2-30 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

_TECHNO (technological settings)

Parameter _TECHNO can be set to select technological characteristics for tapping
operations.
Possible settings are: see CYCLE840 parameter table
Cycles SW 6.4 and higher:
With input field "Technology" "Yes", both the machine manufacturer and the
operator/programmer can customize the technology for tapping.
• Adjustments by the machine tool manufacturer (Cycles SW 6.4 and higher)
– Requirements: Manufacturer password is set, input box "Technology" = "Yes"
– When the input cycle screen form CYCLE840 is opened, the parameters are
preassigned with the value of GUD7 variable _SC_MASK[1]. When the parameters
are changed, the values are written directly to this GUD7 variable.
– This enables the machine manufacturer to customize the default settings to the
characteristics of his machine.
• Adjustments by the operator/programmer (Cycles SW 6.4 and higher)
– Requirements: The manufacturer password is deleted, input field "Technology" =
"Yes"
– The modified data are used to generate CYCLE840. The machine manufacturer
settings will take effect the next time a tapping cycle is called.
Input field "Technology" and the following input fields are not shown if the keyswitch is in
position 0 or 1.

Note
Depending on the setting in machine data NUM_ENCS, the cycle selects whether tapping is
to be performed with or without encoder.
The direction of rotation for the spindle must be programmed with M3 or M4.
In thread blocks with G63, the values of the feedrate override switch and spindle speed
override switch are frozen to 100%.
A longer compensating chuck is usually required for tapping without encoder.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81: Additional information (Page 2-5)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-31
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.8 Boring 1 - CYCLE85

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate velocity to the entered final
drilling depth.
The inward and outward movement is performed at the feedrate assigned to FFR and RFF
respectively.
This cycle can be used for reaming of bore holes.

573

6',6
5)3
;

'3

Programming
CYCLE85 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, FFR, RFF)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at thread depth (chip breaking)
FFR real Feedrate
RFF real Retraction feedrate

Cycles
2-32 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Example of first boring

CYCLE85 is called at position Z70 X50 in the ZX plane. The boring axis is the Y axis. The
value for the final drilling depth in the cycle call is programmed as a relative value; no dwell
time is programmed. The workpiece upper edge is at Y102.

; ; $%

%


 =  <


DEF REAL FFR, RFF, RFP=102, ;Definition of the parameters and

DPR=25,SDIS=2 ;value assignments
N10 G0 FFR=300 RFF=1.5*FFR S500 M4 ;Specification of technology values
N20 G18 T1 D1 Z70 X50 Y105 ;Approach drilling position
N21 M6
N30 CYCLE85 (RFP+3, RFP, SDIS, , DPR, ,-> ;Cycle call, no dwell time
-> FFR, RFF) ;programmed
N40 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Traversing to the final drilling depth with G1 and at the feedrate programmed under the
parameter FFR
• Execution of dwell time at final drilling depth.
• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance with G1, and
the retraction feedrate assigned under parameter RFF.
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-33
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Explanation of the parameters

=
*
*
*

573
5)36',6
5)3
;

'3 5)3'35

DTB (dwell time)

The dwell time to the final drilling depth (chip breaking) is programmed under DTB in
seconds.
FFR (feedrate)
The feedrate value programmed under FFR is active in drilling.
RFF (retraction feedrate)
The feedrate value assigned to RFF is active for retraction from the plane.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)

Cycles
2-34 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.9 Boring 2 - CYCLE86

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate velocity up to the entered
drilling depth.
With Boring 2, oriented spindle stop is activated with the SPOS command once the drilling
depth has been reached. Then, the programmed retraction positions are approached in rapid
traverse and, from there, the retraction plane.

Notice
Cycle CYCLE86 can be used if the spindle to be used for the boring operation is technically
able to go into position-controlled spindle operation.

;

Programming
CYCLE86 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, SDIR, RPA, RPO, RPAP, POSS)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at thread depth (chip breaking)
SDIR integer Direction of rotation

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-35
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Parameter Data type Meaning

Values: 3: (for M3)
4: (for M4)
RPA real Retraction path along the abscissa of the active plane (incremental, enter
with sign)
RPO real Retraction path along the ordinate of the active plane (incremental, enter
with sign)
RPAP real Retraction path along the boring axis (incremental, enter with sign)
POSS real Spindle position for oriented spindle stop in the cycle (in degrees)

Example of second boring

CYCLE86 is called at position X70 Y50 in the XY plane. The drilling axis is the Z axis. The
final drilling depth is programmed as an absolute value; no safety clearance is specified. The
dwell time at the final drilling depth is 2 sec. The top edge of the workpiece is positioned at
Z110. In the cycle, the spindle is to rotate with M3 and to stop at 45 degrees.

< < $%

%


 ;  =


DEF REAL DP, DTB, POSS ;Definition of parameters

N10 DP=77 DTB=2 POSS=45 ;Value assignments
N20 G0 G17 G90 F200 S300 ;Specification of technology values
N30 D1 T3 Z112 ;Approach retraction plane
N40 X70 Y50 ;Approach drilling position
N50 CYCLE86 (112, 110, , DP, , DTB, 3,-> ;Cycle call with absolute drilling depth
-> –1, –1, +1, POSS)
N60 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
2-36 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Traversing to the final drilling depth at G1 and the feedrate programmed before the cycle
call.
• Dwell time at final drilling depth is executed.
• Oriented spindle hold at the spindle position programmed under POSS.
• Traverse retraction path in up to 3 axes at G0.
• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance with G0.
• Retraction to the retraction plane at G0 (initial drilling position in both axes of the plane.

Explanation of the parameters

=
*
*
*
6326

573
5)36',6
5)3
;

'3
5)3'35

DTB (dwell time)

The dwell time to the final drilling depth (chip breaking) is programmed under DTB in
seconds.
SDIR (direction of rotation)
With this parameter, you determine the direction of rotation with which boring is performed in
the cycle. If values other than 3 or 4 (M3/M4) are generated, alarm 61102 "No spindle
direction programmed" is generated and the cycle is not executed.
RPA (retraction path, in abscissa)
Under this parameter, you define a retraction movement in the abscissa, which is executed
after the final drilling depth has been reached and oriented spindle stop has been performed.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-37
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

RPO (retraction path, in ordinate)

With this parameter, you define a retraction movement in the ordinate, which is executed
after the final drilling depth has been reached and oriented spindle stop has been performed.
RPAP (retraction path, in drilling axis)
You use this parameter to define a retraction movement along the drilling axis, which is
executed after the final drilling axis has been reached and oriented spindle stop has been
performed.
POSS (spindle position)
Use POSS to program the spindle position for the oriented spindle stop in degrees, which is
performed after the final drilling depth has been reached.

Note
With the SPOS command, you can perform an oriented spindle stop of the active master
spindle. The angular value is programmed using a transfer parameter.
Turning machine without Y axis
You can now use the cycle CYCLE86 for turning machines without a Y axis. Retraction to
drilling depth is then traversed in two axes only. If a retraction path was programmed for the
3rd axis, it would be ignored.
If you call the cycle without Y axis in the G18 plane, the following alarm appears: 61005 "3rd
geometry axis does not exist", as the Y axis would be the drilling axis in this case.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)

Cycles
2-38 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.10 Boring 3 - CYCLE87

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling
depth.
During boring 3, a spindle stop without orientation M5 is generated after reaching the final
drilling depth, followed by a programmed stop M0. Pressing the NC START key continues
the retraction movement at rapid traverse until the retraction plane is reached.

;

Programming
CYCLE87 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, SDIR)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
SDIR integer Direction of rotation
Values: 3: (for M3)
4: (for M4)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-39
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Example of third boring

CYCLE87 is called at position X70 Y50 in the XY plane. The drilling axis is the Z axis. The
final drilling depth is specified as an absolute value. The safety clearance is 2 mm.

< < $%

%


 ;  =


DEF REAL DP, SDIS ;Definition of parameters

N10 DP=77 SDIS=2 ;Value assignments
N20 G0 G17 G90 F200 S300 ;Specification of technology values
N30 D1 T3 Z113 ;Approach retraction plane
N40 X70 Y50 ;Approach drilling position
N50 CYCLE87 (113, 110, SDIS, DP, , 3) ;Cycle call with programmed
;direction of spindle rotation M3
N60 M30 ;Program end

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Traversing to the final drilling depth at G1 and the feedrate programmed before the cycle
call.
• Spindle stop with M5
• Press NC-START button.
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0.

Cycles
2-40 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Explanation of the parameters

=
*
*
*
00

573
5)36',6
5)3
;

'3 5)3'35

SDIR (direction of rotation)

This parameter determines the direction of rotation with which the drilling operation is carried
out in the cycle.
If values other than 3 or 4 (M3/M4) are generated, alarm 61102 "No spindle direction
programmed" is generated and the cycle is aborted.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-41
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.11 Boring 4 - CYCLE88

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling
depth. During boring pass 4, a dwell time, a spindle stop without orientation M5 and a
programmed stop M0 are generated when the final drilling depth is reached. Pressing the
NC START key traverses the outward movement at rapid traverse until the retraction plane
is reached.

;

Programming
CYCLE88 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, SDIR)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at final drilling depth
SDIR integer Direction of rotation
Values: 3: (for M3)
4: (for M4)

Cycles
2-42 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Example of fourth boring

CYCLE88 is called at position X80 Y90 in the XY plane. The drilling axis is the Z axis. The
safety clearance is programmed at 3 mm. The final drilling depth is specified relative to the
reference plane.
M4 is active in the cycle.

< < $%

%


 ; =



DEF REAL RFP, RTP, DPR, DTB, SDIS ;Definition of parameters

N10 RFP=102 RTP=105 DPR=72 DTB=3 -> ;Value assignments
-> SDIS=3
N20 G17 G90 T1 D1 F100 S450 ;Specification of technology values
N21 M6
N30 G0 X80 Y90 Z105 ;Approach drilling position
N40 CYCLE88 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, , DPR, -> ;Cycle call with programmed
-> DTB, 4) ;direction of spindle rotation M4
N50 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-43
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Traversing to the final drilling depth at G1 and the feedrate programmed before the cycle
call.
• Dwell time at final drilling depth.
• Spindle stop with M5 (_ZSD[5]=1) or
• Spindle and program stop with M5 M0 (_ZSD[5]=0). After program stop, press the NC
START key.
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0.
Explanation of the parameters

=
*
*
*
00

573
5)36',6
5)3
;

'3 5)3'35

DTB (dwell time)

The dwell time to the final drilling depth (chip breaking) is programmed under DTB in
seconds.
SDIR (direction of rotation)
The programmed direction of rotation is active for the distance to be traversed to the final
drilling depth.
If values other than 3 or 4 (M3/M4) are generated, alarm 61102 "No spindle direction
programmed" is generated and the cycle is aborted.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the cycle setting data _ZSD[5], see Requirements for milling cycles.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)
Requirements (Page 3-1)

Cycles
2-44 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.12 Boring 5 - CYCLE89

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling
depth. When the final drilling depth is reached, a dwell time can be programmed.

;

Programming
CYCLE89 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at final drilling depth

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-45
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Example of fifth boring

At X80 Y90 in the XY plane, the drilling cycle CYCLE89 is called with a safety clearance of 5
mm and specification of the final drilling depth as an absolute value. The drilling axis is the Z
axis.

< < $%

%


 ;  =


DEF REAL RFP, RTP, DP, DTB ;Definition of parameters

RFP=102 RTP=107 DP=72 DTB=3 ;Value assignments
N10 G90 G17 F100 S450 M4 ;Specification of technology values
N20 G0 T1 D1 X80 Y90 Z107 ;Approach drilling position
N21 M6
N30 CYCLE89 (RTP, RFP, 5, DP, , DTB) ;Cycle call
N40 M30 ;Program end

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0
• Traversing to the final drilling depth at G1 and the feedrate programmed before the cycle
call.
• Dwell time at final drilling depth is executed.
• Retraction up to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance at G1 and
the same feedrate value.
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0.

Cycles
2-46 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Explanation of the parameters

=
*
*
*

573
5)36',6
5)3
;

'3 5)3'35

DTB (dwell time)

The dwell time to the final drilling depth (chip breaking) is programmed under DTB in
seconds.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-47
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.2 Modal call of drilling cycles

2.2 2.2 Modal call of drilling cycles

Function
In NC programming, subroutines and cycles can be called modally. This feature is of
particular importance for drilling cycles.
You generate a modal subroutine call by programming the keyword MCALL (modal
subroutine call) in front of the subroutine name. This function causes the subroutine to be
called and executed automatically after each block that contains traversing movement.
The function is deactivated by programming MCALL without a following subroutine name or
by modally calling another subroutine.

Note
Nesting of modal calls is not permissible, i.e., subroutines that are called modally cannot
contain any further modal subroutine calls.

Any number of modal drilling cycles can be programmed, the number is not limited to a
certain number of G functions reserved for this purpose.

0&$// 0&$// 0&$//

Programming
Modal call of a subroutine
MCALL
Example with drilling cycle CYCLE81:
MCALL CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR)

Cycles
2-48 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.2 Modal call of drilling cycles

Example of row of holes 5

With this program, you can machine a row of holes from 5 tapped holes that are positioned
parallel to the Z axis of the ZX plane.
The distance between each of the holes is 20 mm. The row of holes starts at Z20 and X30,
the first hole in the row being 20 mm from this point. In this example, the geometry of the row
of holes has been programmed without using a cycle.
First of all, drilling is performed with cycle CYCLE81 and then with CYCLE84 tapping (rigid).
The holes are 80 mm deep. This is the difference between the reference plane and the final
drilling depth.

Note
Explanation of this example
The modal call must be deselected in block N80 because, in the next block, the tool is
traversed to a position where no drilling is to be performed.
It is advisable to store the drilling positions for a machining task of this type in a subroutine,
which is then called at MA1 or MA2.

= =
$ $%

 




%
 ; <



DEF REAL RFP=102, DP=22, -> ;Definition of the parameters with

-> RTP=105, PIT=4.2, SDIS ;value assignments
DEF INT COUNT=1
N10 SDIS=3 ;Value for safety distance
N20 G90 F300 S500 M3 D1 T1 ;Specification of technology values
N30 G18 G0 Y105 Z20 X30 ;Approach start position
N40 MCALL CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, -> ;Modal call of the drilling cycle
-> SDIS, DP)
N50 MA1: G91 Z20 ;Approach next position
;(ZX plane) cycle is executed

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-49
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.2 Modal call of drilling cycles

N60 COUNT=COUNT+1 ;Loop for drilling positions along the row

;of holes
N70 IF COUNT<6 GOTOB MA1
N80 MCALL ;Deselect modal call
N90 G90 Y105 Z20 ;Approach starting position again
N100 COUNT=1 ;Set counter to zero
N110 ... ;Change tool
N120 MCALL CYCLE84 (RTP, -> ;Modal call of tapping cycle
-> RFP, SDIS, DP , , , 3, , ->
-> PIT, , 400)
N130 MA2: G91 Z20 ;Next drilling position
N140 COUNT=COUNT+1 ;Loop for drilling position of the row of
;holes
N150 IF COUNT<6 GOTOB MA2
N160 MCALL ;Deselect modal call
N170 G90 X30 Y105 Z20 ;Approach starting position again
N180 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block.

Cycles
2-50 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.3 Drilling pattern cycles

2.3 2.3 Drilling pattern cycles

2.3.1 Requirements

Function
The hole pattern cycles only describe the geometry of an arrangement of drilling holes in the
plane. The link to a drilling process is established via the modal call of this drilling cycle
before the hole pattern cycle is programmed.

Hole pattern cycles without drilling cycle call

Hole pattern cycles can also be used for other applications without the first drilling cycle first
being called because the hole pattern cycles can be parameterized without reference to the
drilling cycle used.
If there was no modal call of the subroutine prior to calling the hole pattern cycle, error
message 62100 "No drilling cycle active" appears.
You can acknowledge this error message by pressing the error acknowledgment key and
continue the program execution by pressing NC START. The hole pattern cycle will then
approach each of the positions calculated from the input data one after the other without
calling a subroutine at these points.

Behavior when quantity parameter is zero

The number of holes in a hole pattern must be parameterized. If the value of the quantity
parameter is zero when the cycle is called (or if this parameter is omitted from the parameter
list), alarm 61103 "Number of holes is zero" and the cycle is aborted.

Checks in case of limited ranges of input values

In general, plausibility checks for defining parameters are not made in the hole pattern cycles
if this is not declared explicitly for a parameter with a description of the corresponding
reaction.

See also
Modal call of drilling cycles (Page 2-48)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-51
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.3 Drilling pattern cycles

2.3.2 Row of holes - HOLES1

Function
With this cycle, you can make a row of holes, i.e., a number of drill holes in a straight line.
The type of drill hole is determined by the drilling cycle that has already been called modally.

Programming
HOLES1 (SPCA, SPCO, STA1, FDIS, DBH, NUM)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

SPCA real Abscissa of a reference point on the straight line (absolute)
SPCO real Ordinate of this reference point (absolute)
STA1 real Angle to abscissa
Range of –180<STA1<=180 degrees
values:
FDIS real Distance between the first drill hole and the reference point
(enter without sign)
DBH real Distance between the holes (enter without sign)
NUM integer Number of drill holes

Cycles
2-52 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.3 Drilling pattern cycles

Example of row of holes

Use this program to machine a row of holes consisting of 5 tapped holes arranged parallel to
the Z axis of the ZX plane and which have a distance of 20 mm one to another. The starting
point of the row of holes is at Z20 and X30 whereby the first hole has a distance of 10 mm
from this point. The geometry of the row of holes is described by the cycle HOLES1. First of
all, drilling is performed with cycle CYCLE81 and then with CYCLE84 tapping (rigid). The
holes are 80 mm in depth (difference between reference plane and final drilling depth).

= =
$ $%

 




%
 ; <



DEF REAL RFP=102, DP=22, RTP=105 ;Definition of the parameters with

DEF REAL SDIS, FDIS ;value assignments
DEF REAL SPCA=30, SPCO=20, ->
-> STA1=0, DBH=20
DEF INT NUM=5
N10 SDIS=3 FDIS=10 ;Value for safety clearance as well as
;distance from the first drilling to the
;reference point
N20 G90 F30 S500 M3 D1 T1 ;Specification of the technology values for
;the planing section
N30 G18 G0 Z20 Y105 X30 ;Approach start position
N40 MCALL CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, -> ;Modal call of drilling cycle
-> SDIS, DP)
N50 HOLES1 (SPCA, SPCO, STA1, -> ;Call of row of holes cycle, beginning with
-> FDIS, DBH, NUM) ;the first drill hole, only the drill
;positions are approached in the cycle
N60 MCALL ;Deselect modal call
... ;Change tool
N70 G90 G0 Z30 Y75 X105 ;Approach position next to 5th hole
N80 MCALL CYCLE84 (RTP, RFP, -> ;Modal call of
-> SDIS, DP,, 3, , 4.2, , , 400) ;tapping cycle
N90 HOLES1 (SPCA, SPCO, STA1, -> ;Call of row of holes cycle, beginning
-> FDIS, DBH, NUM) ;with the 5th drill hole in the row of holes
N100 MCALL ;Deselect modal call
N110 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-53
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.3 Drilling pattern cycles

Sequence
To avoid unnecessary travel, the cycle calculates whether the row of holes is machined
starting from the first hole or the last hole from the actual position of the plane axes and the
geometry of the row of holes. The drilling positions are then approached one after the other
at rapid traverse.

Explanation of the parameters

<

63&$

+
'%
,6
)'
67$
63&2

SPCA and SPCO (reference point abscissa and ordinate)

One point along the straight line of the row of holes is defined as the reference point for
determining the spacing between the holes. The distance to the first hole FDIS is defined
from this point.
STA1 (angle)
The straight line can be arranged in any position in the plane. It is specified both by the point
defined by SPCA and SPCO and by the angle contained by the straight line and the
abscissa of the workpiece coordinate system that is active when the cycle is called. The
angle is entered under STA1 in degrees.
FDIS and DBH (distance)
The distance of the first hole and the reference point defined under SPCA and SPCO is
programmed with FDIS. The parameter DBH contains the distance between any two holes.
NUM (number)
The NUM parameter is used to define the number of holes.

Cycles
2-54 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.3 Drilling pattern cycles

2.3.3 Row of holes - HOLES2

Function
Use this cycle to machine a circle of holes. The machining plane must be defined before the
cycle is called.
The type of drill hole is determined by the drilling cycle that has already been called modally.

Programming
HOLES2 (CPA, CPO, RAD, STA1, INDA, NUM)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

CPA real Center point of circle of holes, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Center point of circle of holes, ordinate (absolute)
RAD real Radius of circle of holes (enter without sign)
STA1 real Starting angle
Range of –180<STA1<=180 degrees
values:
INDA real Incrementing angle
NUM integer Number of drill holes

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-55
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.3 Drilling pattern cycles

Example of row of holes

The program uses CYCLE82 to produce 4 holes having a depth of 30 mm. The final drilling
depth is specified as a relative value to the reference plane. The circle is defined by the
center point X70 Y60 and the radius 42 mm in the XY plane. The starting angle is 45
degrees. The safety clearance in drilling axis Z is 2 mm.

< <

¡



%
 ;  =

DEF REAL CPA=70,CPO=60,RAD=42,STA1=45 ;Definition of parameters with

DEF INT NUM=4 ;Value assignments
N10 G90 F140 S710 M3 D1 T40 ;Specification of technology values
N20 G17 G0 X50 Y45 Z2 ;Approach start position
N30 MCALL CYCLE82 (2, 0,2, , 30) ;modal call of drilling cycle, without
;dwell time, DP is not programmed
N40 HOLES2 (CPA, CPO, RAD, STA1, , NUM) ;Call of circle of holes, the
;incrementing angle
;is calculated in the cycle, as the
;INDA parameter has been omitted
N50 MCALL ;Deselect modal call
N60 M30 ;Program end

Cycles
2-56 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.3 Drilling pattern cycles

Sequence
In the cycle, the drilling positions are approached one after the other in the plane with G0.

Explanation of the parameters

< &3$

,1'$

67$
5
$'

&32

CPA, CPO, and RAD (center point and radius, abscissa, ordinate)
The position of the circle of holes in the machining plane is defined via center point
(parameters CPA and CPO) and radius (parameter RAD). Only positive values are permitted
for the radius.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-57
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.3 Drilling pattern cycles

STA1 and INDA (starting and incremental angle)

These parameters define the arrangement of the holes on the circle of holes.
Parameter STA1 defines the angle of rotation between the positive direction of the abscissa
in the coordinate system active before the cycle was called and the first hole. Parameter
INDA contains the angle of rotation from one hole to the next.
If the INDA parameter is assigned the value zero, the indexing angle is calculated internally
from the number of holes which are positioned equally in a circle.
NUM (number)
The NUM parameter defines the number of holes.

2.3.4 Dot matrix - CYCLE801

Function
Cycle CYCLE801 can be used to machine a "grid of holes" drilling pattern. The type of drill
hole is determined by the drilling cycle that has already been called modally.

Programming
CYCLE801 (_SPCA, _SPCO, _STA, _DIS1, _DIS2, _NUM1, _NUM2)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

_SPCA real Reference point for grid of holes in the 1st axis, abscissa (absolute)
_SPCO real Reference point for grid of holes in the 2nd axis, ordinate (absolute)
_STA real Angle to abscissa
_DIS1 real Distance between columns (without sign)
_DIS2 real Distance between rows (without sign)
_NUM1 integer Number of columns
_NUM2 integer Number of rows

Cycles
2-58 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.3 Drilling pattern cycles

Example of dot matrix

Use the CYCLE801 cycle to machine a dot matrix consisting of 15 drill holes in 3 rows and 5
columns. The associated drilling program is called modally beforehand.

<



  ;

N10 G90 G17 F900 S4000 M3 T2 D1 ;Specification of technology values

N15 MCALL CYCLE82(10,0,1,-22,0,0) ;Modal call of a drilling cycle
N20 CYCLE801(30,20,0,10,15,5,3) ;Call dot matrix
N25 M30 ;End of program

Sequence
The cycle calculates the sequence of holes such that the empty paths between them are
kept as short as possible. The starting position of the machining operation is defined
according to the last position reached in the plane prior to the cycle call.
In each case, starting positions are one of the four possible corner positions.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 2-59
Drilling cycles and drilling patterns
2.3 Drilling pattern cycles

Explanation of the parameters

<

,6
B'

B',6
B67$

B63&2

B63&$ ;

_SPCA and _SPCO (reference point abscissa and ordinate)

These two parameters determine the first point of the grid of holes. The row and column
distances are specified in relation to this point.
_STA (angle)
The grid of holes can be positioned at any angle in the plane. This angle is programmed in
degrees in _STA and refers to the abscissa of the workpiece coordinate system active as the
cycle is called.
_DIS1 and _DIS2 (column and row distances)
The distances must be entered without sign. To avoid unnecessary empty travel, the dot
matrix is machined line by line or column by column, based on a comparison of distance
measurements.
_NUM1 and _NUM2 (number)
With this parameter, you determine the number of columns or lines.

Cycles
2-60 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
Milling cycles 3
3.1 3.1 General information
The following sections describe how milling cycles are programmed.
This section is intended to guide you in selecting cycles and assigning parameters to them.
In addition to a detailed description of the function of each cycle and the associated
parameters, you will find in each section programming examples that make it easier for you
to work with cycles.

3.2 3.2 Requirements

Programs required in the control system

The milling cycles call the following program internally as a subroutine:
• PITCH.SPF
In addition, you must also have the data block GUD7.DEF and they macro definition file
SMAC.DEF.
Load them into the parts program memory of the control unit before executing the milling
cycles.

Call and return conditions

Milling cycles are programmed independently of the particular axis name. Before you call the
milling cycles, a tool compensation must be activated.
The appropriate values for feedrate, spindle speed and direction of rotation of spindle must
be programmed in the part program if the appropriate parameters are not provided in the
milling cycle.
The center point coordinates for the milling pattern or the pocket to be machined are
programmed in a rectangular coordinate system.
The G functions active prior to the cycle call and the current programmable frame remain
active beyond the cycle.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-1
Milling cycles
3.2 Requirements

Plane definition
Milling cycles generally assume that the current workpiece coordinate system has been
defined by selecting a plane (G17, G18 or G19) and activating a programmable frame (if
necessary). The infeed axis is always the 3rd axis of this coordinate system.

=
$SSOLFDWH

<
WH
*

GLQD
2U

*


*

$E
VFL
VVD
;

References:
/PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals
/PG/, Programming Guide Production Planning

Spindle handling
The spindle commands in the cycles always refer to the active master spindle of the control.
If a cycle is to be used on a machine with several spindles, the spindle with which you are
working must first be defined as the master spindle with the SETMS command.

Machining status message

During the execution of the milling cycles, various messages that refer to the machining
status are displayed on the screen.
These message do not interrupt the program execution and continue to be displayed until
the next message is displayed or the cycle is completed.

Cycles
3-2 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.2 Requirements

Cycle setting data

Some of the parameters and the behavior of milling cycles can be altered using cycle
settings.
The cycle setting data are defined in data block GUD7.DEF. These values are used in part to
establish program compatibility in the event of changes or function expansions in the cycles.
The following cycle setting data are introduced:

_ZSD[x] Value Meaning Cycles affected

_ZSD[1] 0 Depth calculation in the new cycles is carried out between the POCKET1 to POCKET4,
reference plane + safety clearance and depth (_RFP + _SDIS - LONGHOLE,
_DP) CYCLE71, SLOT1,
1 Depth calculation is carried out without including safety distance CYCLE72, SLOT2
_ZSD[2] 0 Dimensioning of rectangular pocket or rectangular spigot from the POCKET3, CYCLE76
center point
1 Dimensioning of rectangular pocket or rectangular spigot from a
corner
_ZSD[9] 0 In the case of dimensioning of the rectangular pocket via a corner POCKET3
point (i.e. _ZSD[2]=1), _STA refers to this reference point
1 In the case of dimensioning of the rectangular pocket via a corner
point
(i.e. _ZSD[2]=1), _STA refers to the pocket center point
_ZSD[10] 0 The programmed feedrate FFR acts in/on the thread CYCLE90
1 The programmed feedrate FFR is converted to the center-point
path of the tool

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-3
Milling cycles
3.3 Thread milling - CYCLE90

3.3 3.3 Thread milling - CYCLE90

Function
By using the cycle CYCLE90, you can produce internal or external threads. The path when
milling threads is based on a helix interpolation. All three geometry axes of the current plane,
which you will define before calling the cycle, are involved in this motion.
The programmed feedrate F acts according to the the axis grouping defined in the FGROUP
instruction before the call.

Programming
CYCLE90 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DIATH, KDIAM, PIT, FFR, CDIR,
TYPTH, CPA, CPO)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DIATH real Nominal diameter, outer diameter of the thread
KDIAM real Core diameter, internal diameter of the thread
PIT real Pitch
Range of values: 0.001 ... 2000.000 mm
FFR real Feedrate for thread milling (enter without sign)

Cycles
3-4 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.3 Thread milling - CYCLE90

Parameter Data type Meaning

CDIR integer Direction of rotation for thread milling
Values: 2: (for thread milling at G2)
3: (for thread milling at G3)
TYPTH integer Thread type
Values: 0: Internal thread
1: External thread, diameter programming via DIATH
2: External thread, diameter programming via KDIAM (SW 6.4
and higher)
CPA real Center point of circle, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Center point of circle, ordinate (absolute)

Example of internal thread

By using this program, you can mill an internal thread at point X60 Y50 of the G17 plane.

< <

$%
$



%
 ;  =

DEF REAL RTP=48, RFP=40, SDIS=5, -> ;Definition of variables with

-> DPR=40, DIATH=60, KDIAM=50 ;Value assignments
DEF REAL PIT=2, FFR=500, CPA=60,CPO=50
DEF INT CDIR=2, TYPTH=0
N10 G90 G0 G17 X0 Y0 Z80 S200 M3 ;Approach start position
N20 T5 D1 ;Specification of technology values
N30 CYCLE90 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DPR, -> ;Cycle call
-> DIATH, KDIAM, PIT, FFR, CDIR, ->
-> TYPTH, CPA, CPO)
N40 G0 G90 Z100 ;Approach position after cycle
N50 M02 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-5
Milling cycles
3.3 Thread milling - CYCLE90

Sequence for external thread

Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position is any position from which the starting position at the outside diameter
of the thread at the height of the retraction plane can be reached without collision.
This start position for thread milling with G2 lies between the positive abscissa and the
positive ordinate in the current level (i.e., in the 1st quadrant of the coordinate system). For
thread milling with G3, the start position lies between the positive abscissa and the negative
ordinate (i.e., in the 4th quadrant of the coordinate system).

Position of starting point with G2 ... and ... with G3

The distance from the thread diameter depends on the size of the thread and the tool radius
used.

=
<

&3$

2
&3
;

3RVLWLRQRIWKH
3RVLWLRQRIWKH VWDUWLQJSRLQW
VWDUWLQJSRLQWZKHQ ZKHQPLOOLQJ
PLOOLQJWKUHDGVZLWK* WKUHDGVZLWK*

Cycles
3-6 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.3 Thread milling - CYCLE90

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

• Positioning to the starting point with G0 at the level of the retraction plane in the tool axis
of the current plane.
• Infeed to the reference plane brought shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with
G0.
• Travel-in movement to the thread diameter on a circular path against the direction G2/G3
programmed under CDIR.
• Thread milling on a helical path with G2/G3 and the feedrate value FFR.
• Travel-out movement on a circular path with counterrotational operation G2/G3 and the
reduced feedrate FFR.
• Retraction to the retraction plane in the tool axis with G0.

Sequence for internal thread

Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position is any position from which the center point of the thread at the height of
the retraction plane can be reached without collision.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Positioning to the center point of the thread with G0 at the level of the retraction plane in
the tool axis of the current plane.
• Infeed to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance with G0.
• Approach a travel-in circle calculated within the cycle with G1 and the reduced feedrate
FFR.
• Travel-in movement to the thread diameter on a circular path corresponding to the
direction G2/G3 programmed under CDIR.
• Thread milling on a helical path with G2/G3 and the feedrate value FFR.
• Travel-out movement on a circular path with the same direction of rotation and the
reduced feedrate FFR.
• Retraction to the center point of the thread with G0.
• Retraction to the retraction plane in the tool axis with G0.

Thread sequence from bottom to top

For technological reasons, it can also be reasonable to machine a thread from bottom to top.
In this case, the retraction plane RTP will be behind the thread depth DP.
This machining is possible, but the depth specifications must be programmed as absolute
values and the retraction plane must be approached before calling the cycle or a position
after the retraction plane must be approached.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-7
Milling cycles
3.3 Thread milling - CYCLE90

Example of thread from bottom to top

A thread beginning at Z-20 to Z0 with pitch 3 is to be milled. The retraction plane is at Z8.

N10 G17 X100 Y100 S300 M3 T1 D1 F1000

N20 Z8
N30 CYCLE90 (8, -20, 0, 0, 0, 46, 40, 3, 800, 3, 0,
50, 50)
N40 M2

Explanation of the parameters

= =

573 573
5)36',6 5)36',6
5)3 5)3
'35
'35

'3

; ;
< <
&3$ &3$

&',5 &',5


7+
7+

,$
,$

&32

&32
'
'

; ;

DIATH, KDIAM, and PIT (nominal diameter, core diameter, and thread pitch)
These parameters are used to determine the thread data nominal diameter, core diameter,
and pitch. The parameter DIATH is the external, and KDIAM is the internal diameter of the
thread. The travel-in / travel-out movements are created internally in the cycle, based on
these parameters.
FFR (feedrate)
The value of the parameter FFR is specified as the current feedrate value for thread milling.
It is effective when thread milling on a helical path.
This value will be reduced in the cycle for the travel-in / travel-out movements. The retraction
is performed outside the helix path using G0.
CDIR (direction of rotation)
This parameter is used to specify the value for the machining direction of the thread.
If the parameter has an impermissible value, the message "Wrong milling direction, G3 will
be generated".
In this case, the cycle is continued and G3 is automatically generated.

Cycles
3-8 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.3 Thread milling - CYCLE90

TYPTH (thread type)

The parameter TYPTH is used to define whether you want to machine an external or an
internal thread. With SW 6.4 and higher, the thread diameter for the external thread can be
programmed via the nominal diameter DIATH (TYPTH=1) or as usual in many cases via the
core diameter KDIAM (TYPTH=2). In this case, the DIATH parameter is irrelevant.
CPA and CPO (center point)
These parameters are used to define the center point of the drill hole or of the spigot on
which the thread will be produced.
Overshooting in the direction of the thread length
For thread milling, the travel-in and travel-out movements occur along all three axes
concerned. This means that the travel-out movement includes a further step in the vertical
axis, beyond the programmed thread depth.
The overshoot is calculated as follows:

S „:55',))
˂] „
 ',$7+

Where:

Δz Overshoot, internal
p Pitch
WR Tool radius
DIATH External diameter of the thread
RDIFF Radius difference for travel-out circle

For internal threads, RDIFF = DIATH/2 - WR.

For external threads, RDIFF = DIATH/2 + WR.
Function extension with SW 6.3 and higher
The feedrate is converted to the tool cutting edge. For the inside thread, the travel-in and
travel-out movement now takes a more technologically favorable semicircular path, whose
radius is calculated internally by the cycle to match the tool. This results in the overshoot
being calculated within the cycle, using the formula below:
• For tool diameters <2/3 nominal diameter
S :5',$7+
˂] „
 ',$7+

• For tool diameters ≥ 2/3 nominal diameter

S„.',$0
˂]
',$7+
Where:

Δz Overshoot, internal
p Pitch
WR Tool radius
DIATH External diameter of the thread
KDIAM Core diameter of the thread

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-9
Milling cycles
3.3 Thread milling - CYCLE90

Note
The cutter radius is calculated internally in the cycle. Therefore, a tool compensation must be
programmed before calling the cycle. Otherwise, the alarm 61000 "No tool compensation
active" appears and the cycle is aborted.
If the tool radius=0 or negative, the cycle is also aborted and this alarm is issued.
With internal threads, the tool radius is monitored and alarm 61105 "Cutter radius too large"
is output, and the cycle is aborted.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)

Cycles
3-10 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.4 Long holes located on a circle - LONGHOLE

3.4 3.4 Long holes located on a circle - LONGHOLE

Function
Use this cycle to machine long holes located on a circle. The longitudinal axis of the long
holes is aligned radially.
In contrast to the slot, the width of the long hole is determined by the tool diameter.
Internally in the cycle, an optimum traversing path of the tool is determined, ruling out
unnecessary idle passes. If several depth infeeds are required to machine an slot, the infeed
is carried out alternately at the end points. The path to be traversed along the longitudinal
axis of the long hole will change its direction after each infeed. The cycle will search for the
shortest path when changing to the next long hole.

Notice
The cycle requires a milling cutter with an "end tooth cutting across center" (DIN844).

Note
A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is
aborted and alarm 61000 "No tool compensation active" is output.
If mutual contour violations of the slots result from incorrect values of the parameters that
determine the arrangement and the size of the slots, the cycle will not start the machining.
The cycle is aborted and the error message 61104 "Contour violation of slots/long holes" is
output.
During the cycle, the workpiece coordinate system is offset and rotated. The values in the
workpiece coordinate system are shown on the actual value display such that the
longitudinal axis of the long hole being machined is positioned on the first axis of the current
machining plane.
After the cycle has been completed, the workpiece coordinate system is in the same position
again as it was before the cycle was called.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-11
Milling cycles
3.4 Long holes located on a circle - LONGHOLE

Programming
LONGHOLE (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, NUM, LENG, CPA, CPO, RAD, STA1,
INDA, FFD, FFP1, MID)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Long hole depth (absolute)
DPR real Long hole depth relative to the reference plane
(enter without sign)
NUM integer Number of long holes
LENG real Length of long hole (enter without sign)
CPA real Center point of circle, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Center point of circle, ordinate (absolute)
RAD real Radius of the circle (enter without sign)
STA1 real Starting angle
INDA real Incrementing angle
FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
MID real Maximum infeed depth for an infeed (enter without sign)

Cycles
3-12 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.4 Long holes located on a circle - LONGHOLE

Example of long hole machining

With this program, you can machine 4 long holes with a length of 30 mm and a relative depth
of 23 mm (difference between the reference plane and the long hole base), which are
positioned on a circle with the center point Z45 Y40 and a radius of 20 mm in the Y plane
(G19). The starting angle is 45 degrees, the incremental angle is 90 degrees. The maximum
infeed depth is 6 mm, the safety clearance 1 mm.

= =
$ $%
¡

¡






% <  ;


N10 G19 G90 S600 M3 ;Specification of technology values

T10 D1
M6
N20 G0 Y50 Z25 X5 ;Approach starting position
N30 LONGHOLE (5, 0, 1, , 23, 4, 30, -> ;Cycle call
-> 40, 45, 20, 45, 90, 100 ,320, 6)
N40 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-13
Milling cycles
3.4 Long holes located on a circle - LONGHOLE

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position is any position from which each of the long holes can be approached
without collision.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

• Using G0, the starting position for the cycle is approached. In both axes of the current
plane, the closest end point of the first long hole to be machined is approached at the
level of the retraction plane in the tool plane and then lowered to the reference plane
shifted by the amount of the safety clearance.
• Each long hole is milled in a reciprocating motion. The machining in the plane is
performed using G1 and the feedrate programmed under FFP1. The infeed to the next
machining depth calculated using G1 internally in the cycle and using feedrate is
performed at each reversal point until the final depth is reached.
• Retraction to the retraction plane using G0 and approach to the next long hole on the
shortest path.
• After the last long hole has been machined, the tool is moved with G0 to the position in
the machining plane, which was reached last and which is specified in the diagram below,
and the cycle is ended.

Cycles
3-14 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.4 Long holes located on a circle - LONGHOLE

Explanation of the parameters

<
&3$

,1'$

/(
1
* 67$

5
$'

&32
;

DP and DPR (long hole depth)

The depth of the long hole can be specified either absolute (DP) or relative (DPR) to the
reference plane.
With relative specification, the cycle will calculate the resulting depth automatically using the
positions of reference and retraction planes.
NUM (number)
Use the parameter NUM to specify the number of long holes.
LENG (long hole length)
The length of the long hole is programmed under LENG.
If it is detected in the cycle that this length is smaller than the milling diameter, the cycle is
aborted with alarm 61105 "Milling radius is too large".
MID (infeed depth)
Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed depth.
The depth infeed is performed by the cycle in equally sized infeed steps.
Using MID and the total depth, the cycle automatically calculates this infeed which lies
between 0.5 x maximum infeed depth and the maximum infeed depth. The minimum
possible number of infeed steps is used as the basis. MID=0 means that infeed is carried out
in one cut up to the long hole depth.
The depth infeed starts from the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance
(depending on _ZSD[1]).
FFD and FFP1 (feedrate for depth and surface)
The feedrate FFP1 is active for all movements in the plane traversed at feedrate. FFD acts
for infeeds vertically to this plane.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-15
Milling cycles
3.4 Long holes located on a circle - LONGHOLE

CPA, CPO and RAD (center point and radius)

You define the position of the circle in the machining plane by the center point (CPA, CPO)
and the radius (RAD). Only positive values are permitted for the radius.
STA1 and INDA (starting and incremental angle)
The arrangement of the long holes on the circle is defined by these parameters.
If INDA=0, the indexing angle is calculated from the number of long holes, so that they are
equally distributed around the circle.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the cycle setting data _ZSD[1], see Requirements for milling cycles.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)
Requirements (Page 3-1)

Cycles
3-16 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle - SLOT1

3.5 3.5 Slots on a circle - SLOT1

Function
The cycle SLOT1 is a combined roughing-finishing cycle.
Use this cycle to machine slots arranged on a circle. The longitudinal axis of the slots is
aligned radially. In contrast to the long hole, a value is defined for the slot width.

Notice
The cycle requires a milling cutter with an "end tooth cutting across center" (DIN844).

Note
A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is
aborted and alarm 61000 "No tool compensation active" is output.
If incorrect values are assigned to the parameters that determine the arrangement and size
of the slots and thus cause mutual contour violation of the slots, the cycle is not started. The
cycle is aborted and the error message 61104 "Contour violation of slots/long holes" is
output.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-17
Milling cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle - SLOT1

&RQWRXUYLRODWLRQ

Programming
SLOT1 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, NUM, LENG, WID, CPA, CPO, RAD, STA1,
INDA, FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2, SSF, _FALD,
_STA2)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Slot depth (absolute)
DPR real Slot depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
NUM integer Number of slots
LENG real Slot length (enter without sign)
WID real Slot width (enter without sign)
CPA real Center point of circle, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Center point of circle, ordinate (absolute)
RAD real Radius of the circle (enter without sign)
STA1 real Starting angle
INDA real Incrementing angle
FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
MID real Maximum infeed depth for an infeed (enter without sign)

Cycles
3-18 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle - SLOT1

Parameter Data type Meaning

CDIR
integer Mill direction for machining the slot
Values: 0: Down-cut milling (corresponds to direction of spindle
rotation)
1: Down-cut milling
2: with G2 (independent of direction of spindle rotation
3: with G3
FAL real Finishing allowance at the slot edge (enter without sign)
VARI integer Machining type (enter without sign)
Values ONES DIGIT:
0: Complete machining
1: Roughing
2: Finishing
TENS DIGIT:
0: Perpendicular to G0
1: Perpendicular to G1
3: Oscillation with G1
MIDF real Maximum infeed depth for finishing
FFP2 real Feedrate for finishing
SSF real Speed when finishing
_FALD real Finishing allowance at the slot base (enter without sign)
_STA2 real Maximum insertion angle for oscillation movement

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-19
Milling cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle - SLOT1

Example of slot milling

This program realizes the same arrangement of 4 slots located on a circle as the program for
long hole machining (see Programming long holes located on a circle - LONGHOLE).
The slots have the following dimensions:

Length 30 mm
Width 15 mm
Depth 23 mm
Safety clearance 1 mm
Finishing allowance 0.5 mm
Milling direction G2
Maximum infeed in depth 10 mm

The slots must be machined completely with an oscillating insertion motion.

= =
$ $%
¡

¡






% <  ;


N10 G19 G90 S600 M3 ;Specification of technology values

N15 T10 D1
N17 M6
N20 G0 Y20 Z50 X5 ;Approach start position
N30 SLOT1 (5, 0, 1, -23, , 4, 30, 15, -> ;Cycle call, parameters VARI, MIDF,
->40, 45, 20, 45, 90, 100, 320, 10, -> ;FFP2 and SSF omitted
->2, 0.5, 30, 10, 400, 1200, 0.6, 5)
N40 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
3-20 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle - SLOT1

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position from which each of the slots can be approached
without collision.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of the position at the beginning of the cycle indicated in the figure with G0.
• Complete machining of a slot is carried out in the following steps:
– Approach of reference plane brought forward by safety clearance at G0
– Infeed to next machining depth as programmed under VARI and feedrate FFD.
– Pocket milling of the slot up to the finishing allowance at the slot base and slot edge
with feedrate value FFP1. Then finishing with feedrate value FFP2 and spindle speed
SSF along the contour according to the machining direction programmed under CDIR.
– The vertical depth infeed with G0/G1 always takes place at the same position in the
machining plane as long as the slot is reached by the end depth.
– With oscillating machining the starting point is selected such that the end point always
reaches the same position in the machining plane.
• Retract tool to the retraction plane and move to the next slot with G0.
• When machining of the last slot is complete, the tool is traversed to the retraction plane
with G0, and the cycle is completed.

Explanation of the parameters

<
&3$

,1'$
/(
1

67$
*
:,'

5
$'

&32

DP and DPR (slot depth)

The slot depth can be specified either absolute (DP) or relative (DPR) to the reference plane.
With relative specification, the cycle will calculate the resulting depth automatically using the
positions of reference and retraction planes.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-21
Milling cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle - SLOT1

NUM (number)
Use the parameter NUM to specify the number of slots.
LENG and WID (slot length and slot width)
Use the parameters LENG and WID to define the form of a slot in the plane. The milling
cutter diameter must be smaller than the slot width. Otherwise, alarm 61105 "Cutter radius
too large" will be activated and the cycle aborted.
The milling cutter diameter must not be smaller than one half the slot width or else residual
material will remain in the center of the slot. However, this is not checked.
CPA, CPO and RAD (center point and radius)
The position of the hole circle in the machining plane is defined by the center point
(parameters CPA and CPO) and the radius (RAD). Only positive values are permitted for the
radius.
STA1 and INDA (starting and incremental angle)
The arrangement of the slot on the circle is defined by these parameters.
STA1 defines the angle between the positive direction of the abscissa of the workpiece
coordinate system active before the cycle was called and the first slot. Parameter INDA
contains the angle from one slot to the next.
If INDA=0, the incrementing angle is calculated from the number of slots so that they are
arranged equally around the circle.
FFD and FFP1 (feedrate for depth and surface)
Feedrate FFD is active for vertical infeed to the machining plane with G1 and for insertion
with oscillating motion.
The feedrate FFP1 is active for all movements in the plane traversed at feedrate when
roughing.
MID (infeed depth)
Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed depth. The depth infeed is performed by
the cycle in equally sized infeed steps.
Using MID and the total depth, the cycle automatically calculates this infeed which lies
between 0.5 x maximum infeed depth and the maximum infeed depth. The minimum
possible number of infeed steps is used as the basis. MID=0 means that the cut to slot depth
is made with one feed.
The depth infeed starts from the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance
(depending on _ZSD[1]).
CDIR (milling direction)
You define the slot machining direction in this parameter.
The direction of milling can be programmed as follows using the CDIR parameter:
• Directly with "2 for G2" and "3 for G3" or
• Alternatively, "down-cut" or "up-cut"
Down-cut and up-cut are determined internally in the cycle via the direction of rotation of the
spindle activated prior to calling the cycle.

Down-cut Up-cut
M3 → G3 M3 → G2
M4 → G2 M4 → G3

Cycles
3-22 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle - SLOT1

FAL (finishing allowance at slot edge)

Use this parameter to program a finishing allowance at the slot edge. FAL does not influence
the depth infeed. If the value of FAL is greater than allowed for the specified width and the
milling cutter used, FAL is automatically reduced to the maximum possible value. In the case
of roughing, milling is performed with a reciprocating movement and depth infeed at both end
points of the slot.
VARI, MIDF, FFP2 and SSF (machining type, infeed depth, feedrate and speed)

Note
The description of these parameters is also valid for the cycles SLOT2, POCKET1 and
POCKET2.

Use the parameter VARI to define the machining type.

Possible settings:
UNITS DIGIT
• 0 = complete machining in two sections
– Solid machining of the slot (SLOT2, SLOT2) or pocket (POCKET1, POCKET2) up to
the finishing allowance takes place at the spindle speed programmed before the cycle
call and the feedrate FFP1. Depth infeed is defined with MID.
– Solid machining of the remaining finishing allowance is carried out at the spindle
speed defined via SSF and the feedrate FFP2. With the parameter MIDF, another
depth infeed can be programmed than for roughing. However, this is only effective for
finishing on the edge. If MIDF=0, the infeed is performed right to the final depth.
If FFP2 is not programmed, feedrate FFP1 is active. This also applies analogously if
SSF is not specified, i.e. the speed programmed prior to the cycle call will apply.
• 1 = roughing
The slot (SLOT1, SLOT2) or pocket (POCKET1, POCKET2) is solid machined up to the
final finishing allowance at the speed programmed before the cycle call and feedrate
FFP1. The depth infeed is programmed via MID.
• 2 = finishing
The cycle requires that the slot (SLOT1, SLOT2) or pocket (POCKET1, POCKET2) have
already been machined to a remaining final finishing allowance, so it is only necessary to
machine the final finishing allowance. If FFP2 and SSF are not programmed, the feedrate
FFP1 or the speed programmed before the cycle call is active. For finishing at the edge, it
is possible to program a value for the depth infeed in parameter MIDF. In machining
mode VARI=30, the edge finishing cut is performed at the last roughing depth.
TENS POINT (infeed)
• 0 = vertical with G0
• 1 = vertical with G1
• 3 = oscillation with G1
If a different value is programmed for the parameter VARI, the cycle is aborted after output of
alarm 61102 "Machining type defined incorrectly".

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-23
Milling cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle - SLOT1

Milling cutter diameter = slot width (WID)

• With complete machining, finishing is only performed on the base.
• In machining mode VARI=32, positioning is paraxial in Z with G1 followed by finish-cutting
(infeed possible via MIDF).
_FALD (finishing allowance at slot edge)
When roughing, a separate finishing allowance is taken into account at the base.
_STA2 (insertion angle)
Parameter _STA2 defines the maximum insertion angle for the reciprocating movement.
• Vertical insertion (VARI = 0X, VARI = 1X)
The vertical depth infeed always takes place at the same position in the machining plane
as long as the slot is reached by the end depth.
• Insertion oscillation on center axis of slot (VARI =3X)
means that the milling center point on a straight line oscillating back and forth is inserted
at an angle until it has reached the nearest current depth. The maximum insertion angle
is programmed under _STA2, and the length of the oscillation path is calculated from
LENG-WID. The oscillating depth infeed ends at the same point as with vertical depth
infeed motions; the starting point in the plane is calculated accordingly. The roughing
operation begins in the plane once the current depth is reached. The feedrate is
programmed under FFD.

Note
During the cycle, the workpiece coordinate system is offset and rotated. The values in the
workpiece coordinate system displayed on the actual value display are such that the
longitudinal axis of the slot that has just been machined corresponds to the first axis of
the current machining plane.
After the cycle has been completed, the workpiece coordinate system is in the same
position again as it was before the cycle was called.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, and SDIS, see Drilling, centering –
CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the cycle setting data _ZSD[1], see Requirements for milling cycles.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)
Requirements (Page 3-1)

Cycles
3-24 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.6 Circumferential slot - SLOT2

3.6 3.6 Circumferential slot - SLOT2

Function
The cycle SLOT2 is a combined roughing-finishing cycle.
Use this cycle to machine circumferential slots arranged on a circle.

Notice
The cycle requires a milling cutter with an "end tooth cutting across center" (DIN844).

Programming
SLOT2 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, NUM, AFSL, WID, CPA, CPO, RAD, STA1,
INDA, FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2, SSF, _FFCP)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-25
Milling cycles
3.6 Circumferential slot - SLOT2

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Slot depth (absolute)
DPR real Slot depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
NUM integer Number of slots
AFSL real Angle for the slot length (enter without sign)
WID real Circumferential slot width (enter without sign)
CPA real Center point of circle, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Center point of circle, ordinate (absolute)
RAD real Radius of the circle (enter without sign)
STA1 real Starting angle
INDA real Incrementing angle
FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
MID real Maximum infeed depth for one infeed (enter without sign)
CDIR integer Milling direction for machining the circumferential slot
Values: 2: (for G2)
3: (for G3)
FAL real Finishing allowance at the slot edge (enter without sign)
VARI integer Machining type
Values: ONES DIGIT:
0: Complete machining
1: Roughing
2: Finishing
TENS DIGIT (Cycles SW 6.3 and higher)
0: Positioning from slot to slot on straight line with G0
1: Positioning from slot to slot on circular path with feedrate
MIDF real Maximum infeed depth for finishing
FFP2 real Feedrate for finishing
SSF real Speed when finishing
_FFCP real Feedrate for intermediate positioning on a circular path, in mm/min

Cycles
3-26 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.6 Circumferential slot - SLOT2

Example of slots 2
Use this program to machine 3 circumferential slots arranged at a circle with center point
X60 Y60 and radius 42 mm in the XY plane. The circumferential slots have the following
dimensions:
Width 15 mm, angle for slot length 70 degrees, depth 23 mm. The initial angle is 0 degrees,
the incremental angle is 120 degrees. The slot contours are machined to a final machining
allowance of 0.5 mm, the safety clearance in infeed axis Z is 2 mm, the maximum depth
infeed is 6 mm. The slots are to be completely machined. Speed and feedrate are to be the
same when finishing. The infeed when finishing is to be performed to slot depth.

< <

$%

$
 ¡

¡




%
 ; =


DEF REAL FFD=100 ;Definition of variables with value

;assignment
N10 G17 G90 S600 M3 ;Specification of technology values
N15 T10 D1
N17 M6
N20 G0 X60 Y60 Z5 ;Approach starting position
N30 SLOT2 (2, 0, 2, -23, , 3, 70, -> ;Cycle call
-> 15, 60, 60, 42, , 120, FFD, -> ;parameters VAR, MIDF, FFP2 and SSF
-> FFD+200, 6, 2, 0.5) ;have been omitted
N40 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-27
Milling cycles
3.6 Circumferential slot - SLOT2

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position from which each of the slots can be approached
without collision.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• With G0, the position indicated in the first figure is approached at the beginning of the
cycle.
• The circumferential slot is machined in the same steps as an elongated hole.
• After finishing a circumferential slot, the tool is withdrawn to the retraction plane and the
transition to the next slot is made, either on a straight line with G0 or on a circular path at
the feedrate programmed in _FFCP.
• After the last slot has been machined, the tool at the final position in the machining plane
specified in the second figure is moved with G0 to the retraction plane, and the cycle is
ended.

Explanation of the parameters

<
&3$

,1'$ $)6/

67$
&32

:,'

NUM (number)
Use the parameter NUM to specify the number of slots.
AFSL and WID (angle and circumferential slot width)
Use the parameters AFSL and WID to define the form of a slot in the plane. The cycle
checks whether the slot width is violated with the active tool. Otherwise, alarm 61105 "Cutter
radius too large" will be activated and the cycle aborted.
CPA, CPO and RAD (center point and radius)
You define the position of the circle in the machining plane by the center point (CPA, CPO)
and the radius (RAD). Only positive values are permitted for the radius.

Cycles
3-28 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.6 Circumferential slot - SLOT2

STA1 and INDA (starting and incremental angle)

The arrangement of the circumferential slots on the circle is defined by these parameters.
STA1 defines the angle between the positive direction of the abscissa of the workpiece
coordinate system active before the cycle was called and the first circumferential slot.
The INDA parameter contains the angle from one circumferential slot to the next.
If INDA=0, the incremental angle is calculated from the number of circumferential slots so
that they are arranged equally around the circle.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, and SDIS, see Drilling, centering –
CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the parameters DP, DPR, FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL, VARI, MIDF,
FFP2, and SSF, see Slots located on a circle - SLOT1.
For an explanation of the cycle setting data _ZSD[1], see Requirements for milling cycles.

New machining types for Cycles SW 6.3 and higher

Finishing only edge (VARI = x3)
• There is a new "Finish edge" selection This is the only machining type where the
diameter of the cutter may be less than half the slot width. No check is made of whether it
is sufficiently large to execute the final machining allowance FAL.
• A number of depth infeeds are possible. These are programmed as usual by parameter
MID. Slot 1 is circumnavigated once at each depth.
• To approach and return from the contour, the cycle generates a smooth approach to the
segment of the circular path.

**
*

* **

*

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-29
Milling cycles
3.6 Circumferential slot - SLOT2

Intermediate positioning on circular path (VARI = 1x)

• Particularly when used on turning machines, it can happen that there will be a spigot in
the middle of the circle, on which the slots lie, which does not allow direct positioning from
one slot to the next with G0.
• The circular path is taken to be the circle, on which the slots lie (determined by
parameters CPA, CPO and RAD). Positioning takes place at the same level as
intermediate positioning on a straight line with G0. The positioning feedrate for the
circular path is programmed under the parameter in mm/min.

Additional notes
A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is
aborted and alarm 61000 "No tool compensation active" is output.

&RQWRXUYLRODWLRQ

If incorrect values are assigned to the parameters that determine the arrangement and size
of the slots and thus cause mutual contour violation of the slots, the cycle is not started.
The cycle is aborted and the error message 61104 "Contour violation of slots/elongated
holes" is output.
During the cycle, the workpiece coordinate system is offset and rotated. The actual value
display in the workpiece coordinate system is always shown such that the circumferential
slot currently being machined starts on the 1st axis of the current processing level and the
zero point of the workpiece coordinate system is in the center of the circle.
After the cycle has been completed, the workpiece coordinate system is in the same position
again as it was before the cycle was called.

Cycles
3-30 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.6 Circumferential slot - SLOT2

Special case: slot width = milling cutter diameter

6ORW


,QIHHG


,QIHHG

• The machining case of slot width = milling cutter diameter is permitted for roughing and
finishing. This machining case occurs when slot width WID – 2 * finishing allowance FAL
= milling cutter diameter.
• The traversing strategy is then as for the LONGHOLE cycle, i.e., depth infeed occurs
alternately at the reversal points, see figure.

Note
An annular slot (complete circle) can be machined when NUM = 1 and AFSL = 369 are
programmed.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)
Requirements (Page 3-1)
Slots on a circle - SLOT1 (Page 3-17)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-31
Milling cycles
3.7 Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1

3.7 3.7 Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1

Function
The cycle is a combined roughing-finishing cycle.
With this cycle, you can machine rectangular pockets in any position in the machining plane.

Notice
The cycle requires a milling cutter with an "end tooth cutting across center" (DIN844).

Note
The pocket milling cycle POCKET3 can be performed with any tool.

Programming
POCKET1 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, LENG, WID, CRAD, CPA, CPD, STA1,
FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2, SSF)

Cycles
3-32 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.7 Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Pocket depth (absolute)
DPR real Pocket depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
LENG real Pocket length (enter without sign)
WID real Pocket width (enter without sign)
CRAD real Corner radius (enter without sign)
CPA real Pocket center point, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Pocket center point, ordinate (absolute)
STA1 real Angle between longitudinal axis and abscissa
Range of 0<=STA1<180 degrees
values:
FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
MID real Maximum infeed depth for one infeed (enter without sign)
CDIR integer Mill direction for machining the pocket
Values: 2: (for G2)
3: (for G3)
FAL real Finishing allowance at the pocket edge (enter without sign)
VARI integer Machining type
Values: 0: Complete machining
1: Roughing
2: Finishing
MIDF real Maximum infeed depth for finishing
FFP2 real Feedrate for finishing
SSF real Speed when finishing

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-33
Milling cycles
3.7 Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1

Example of pocket milling

With this program, you can make a pocket with a length of 60 mm, a width of 40 mm, a
corner radius of 8 mm and a depth of 17.5 mm (difference between reference plane and
pocket base) in the XY plane (G17). The pocket has an angle of 0 degrees to the X axis. The
final machining allowance of the pocket edges is 0.75 mm, the safety distance in the Z axis,
which is added to the reference plane, is 0.5 mm. The center point of the pocket lies at X60
and Y40, the maximum depth infeed is 4 mm.
Merely a rough machining operation is to be carried out.

< <

$ $%



 ; =


DEF REAL LENG, WID, DPR, CRAD ;Definition of variables

DEF INT VARI
N10 LENG=60 WID=40 DPR=17.5 CRAD=8 ;Value assignments
N20 VARI=1
N30 G90 S600 M4 ;Specification of technology values
N35 T20 D2
N37 M6
N40 G17 G0 X60 Y40 Z5 ;Approach start position
N50 POCKET1 (5, 0, 0.5, , DPR, -> ;Cycle call
-> LENG, WID, CRAD, 60, 40, 0, -> ;Parameters MIDF, FFP2, and SSF are
-> 120, 300, 4, 2, 0.75, VARI) ;omitted
N60 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
3-34 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.7 Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
Starting position is any position from which the pocket center point can be approached at the
height of the retraction plane without collision.

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

<

*

*

• With G0, the pocket center point is approached at the retraction level, and then, from this
position, with G0, too, the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance is
approached. Complete machining of the pocket is performed in the following stages:
– Infeed to the next machining depth with G1 and the feedrate FFD.
– Pocket milling of the pocket to the finishing allowance with feedrate FFP1 and the
spindle speed in effect before the cycle call.
• After roughing is completed:
– Infeed to the machining depth defined by MIDF
– Finishing along the contour with feedrate FFP2 and speed SSF.
– The machining direction is carried out according to the direction defined under CDIR.
• When machining of the pocket is completed, the tool is traversed to the pocket center
point on the retraction plane and the cycle is terminated.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-35
Milling cycles
3.7 Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1

Explanation of the parameters

<

&3$

67$
&5$'
:
*
1

,'
/(

&32
;

DP and DPR (pocket depth)

The pocket depth can be defined as either absolute (DP) or relative (DPR) to the reference
plane.
If it is entered as a relative value, the cycle automatically calculates the correct depth on the
basis of the positions of the reference and retraction planes.
LENG, WID and CRAD (length, width and radius)
The shape of a pocket in the plane is determined with parameters LENG, WID and CRAD.
If you cannot traverse the programmed corner radius with the active tool since its radius is
larger, then the corner radius of the machine pocket corresponds to the tool radius. If the
milling tool radius is larger than half of the length or width of the pocket, then the cycle will be
aborted and alarm 61105 "Cutter radius too large" is output.
CPA, CPO (center point)
With parameters CPA and CPO, you define the center point of the pocket in the abscissa
and ordinate.
STA1 (angle)
STA1 defines the angle between the positive abscissa and the longitudinal axis of the
pocket.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, and SDIS, see Drilling, centering –
CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the parameters FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2, and
SSF, see Slots located on a circle - SLOT1.
For an explanation of the cycle setting data _ZSD[1], see Requirements for milling cycles.

Cycles
3-36 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.7 Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1

Additional notes
A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is
aborted and alarm 61000 "No tool compensation active" is output.
Internally in the cycle, a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which influences
the actual value display. The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket
center point.
At the end of the cycle, the original coordinate system is active again.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)
Requirements (Page 3-1)
Circumferential slot - SLOT2 (Page 3-25)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-37
Milling cycles
3.8 Milling circular pockets - POCKET2

3.8 3.8 Milling circular pockets - POCKET2

Function
The cycle is a combined roughing-finishing cycle.
With this cycle, you can machine circular pockets in the machining plane.

Notice
The cycle requires a milling cutter with an "end tooth cutting across center" (DIN844).

Note
The pocket milling cycle POCKET4 can be performed with any tool.

Programming
POCKET2 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, PRAD, CPA, CPO, FFD, FFP1, MID,
CDIR, FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2, SSF)

Cycles
3-38 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.8 Milling circular pockets - POCKET2

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Pocket depth (absolute)
DPR real Pocket depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
PRAD real Pocket radius (enter without sign)
CPA real Pocket center point, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Pocket center point, ordinate (absolute)
FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
MID real Maximum infeed depth for one infeed (enter without sign)
CDIR integer Mill direction for machining the pocket
Values: 2: (for G2)
3: (for G3)
FAL real Finishing allowance at the pocket edge (enter without sign)
VARI integer Machining type
Values: 0: Complete machining
1: Roughing
2: Finishing
MIDF real Maximum infeed depth for finishing
FFP2 real Feedrate for finishing
SSF real Speed when finishing

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-39
Milling cycles
3.8 Milling circular pockets - POCKET2

Example of circular pocket milling

With this program, you can make a circular pocket in the YZ plane (G19). The center point is
determined by Y50 Z50. The infeed axis for the depth infeed is the X axis, the pocket depth
is entered as an absolute value. Neither finishing dimension nor safety clearance is
specified.

= =

$ $%



%
< ;



DEF REAL RTP=3, RFP=0, DP=-20,-> ;Definition of variables with

-> PRAD=25, FFD=100, FFP1, MID=6 ;Value assignments
N10 FFP1=FFD*2
N20 G19 G90 G0 S650 M3 ;Specification of technology values
N25 T10 D1
N27 M6
N30 Y50 Z50 ;Approach start position
N40 POCKET2 (RTP, RFP, , DP, , PRAD, -> ;Cycle call
-> 50, 50, FFD, FFP1, MID, 3, ) ;Parameters FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2, ;SSF
;are omitted
N50 M30 ;Program end
DEF REAL RTP=3, RFP=0, DP=-20,-> ;Definition of variables with
-> PRAD=25, FFD=100, FFP1, MID=6 ;Value assignments
N10 FFP1=FFD*2

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
3-40 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.8 Milling circular pockets - POCKET2

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
Starting position is any position from which the pocket center point can be approached at the
height of the retraction plane without collision.

Note
A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is
aborted and alarm 61000 "No tool compensation active" is output.
The depth infeed is always made in the pocket center point. It can be useful to drill there
beforehand.
Internally in the cycle, a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which influences
the actual value display. The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket
center point.

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

• With G0, the pocket center point is approached at the retraction level, and then, from this
position, with G0, too, the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance is
approached. Complete machining of the pocket is performed in the following stages:
– Infeed to position of pocket center point in the next machining depth with feed rate
FFD.
– Pocket milling of the pocket to the finishing allowance with feedrate FFP1 and the
spindle speed in effect before the cycle call.
• After roughing is completed:
– Infeed to the next machining depth defined by MIDF
– Finishing along the contour with feedrate FFP2 and speed SSF.
– The machining direction is carried out according to the direction defined under CDIR.
• When machining is completed, the tool is traversed to the pocket center point in the
retraction plane and the cycle is terminated.

Note
At the end of the cycle, the original coordinate system is active again.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-41
Milling cycles
3.8 Milling circular pockets - POCKET2

Explanation of the parameters

<

&3$

* *
35
$'

&32
;

PRAD (pocket radius)

The form of the circular pocket is determined solely by its radius.
If this is smaller than the tool radius of the active tool, then the cycle is aborted and alarm
61105 "Cutter radius too large" is output.
CPA, CPO (pocket center point)
The center point of the circular pocket in the abscissa and ordinate is defined with
parameters CPA and CPO.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, and SDIS, see Drilling, centering –
CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the parameters DP and DPR, see Milling rectangular pockets -
POCKET1
For an explanation of the parameters FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2, and
SSF, see Slots located on a circle - SLOT1.
For an explanation of the cycle setting data _ZSD[1], see Requirements for milling cycles.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)
Slots on a circle - SLOT1 (Page 3-17)
Requirements (Page 3-1)
Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1 (Page 3-32)

Cycles
3-42 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.9 Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3

3.9 3.9 Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3

Function
The cycle can be used for roughing and finishing.
For finishing, a face cutter is required.
The depth infeed will always start at the pocket center point and be performed vertically from
there; thus it is practical to predrill at this position.

New functions compared to POCKET1:

• The milling direction can be specified via a G command (G2/G3) or as up-cut or down-cut
milling from the spindle direction.
• For solid machining, the maximum infeed width in the plane can be programmed.
• Finishing allowance also at the base of the pocket.
• Three different immersion strategies:
– vertically to the pocket center
– along a helical path around the pocket center
– Oscillation on the center axis of the pocket
• Short paths during approach in the plane when finishing.
• Consideration of a blank contour in the plane and a blank dimension at the base
(optimum machining of preformed pockets possible).

Programming
POCKET3 (_RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _LENG, _WID, _CRAD, _PA, _PO, _STA,
_MID, _FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, _FFD, _CDIR, _VARI, _MIDA, _AP1, _AP2,
_AD, _RAD1, _DP1)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-43
Milling cycles
3.9 Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety clearance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Pocket depth (absolute)
_LENG real Pocket length, for dimensioning from the corner with sign
_WID real Pocket width, for dimensioning from the corner with sign
_CRAD real Pocket corner radius (enter without sign)
_PA real Pocket reference point, abscissa (absolute)
_PO real Pocket reference point, ordinate (absolute)
_STA real Angle between the pocket longitudinal axis and the first axis of the plane
(abscissa, enter without sign);
Range of values: 0° ≤ _STA < 180°
_MID real Maximum infeed depth (enter without sign)
_FAL real Finishing allowance at the pocket edge (enter without sign)
_FALD real Final machining allowance at base (enter without sign)
_FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
_CDIR integer Milling direction: (enter without sign)
Values: 0: Down-cut milling (corresponds to direction of spindle
rotation)
1: Down-cut milling
2: with G2 (independent of spindle direction)
3: With G3
_VARI integer Machining type: (enter without sign)
Values: ONES DIGIT:
1: Roughing
2: Finishing
TENS DIGIT:
0: Perpendicular to pocket center with G0
1: Perpendicular to pocket center with G1
2: On helical path
3: Oscillation on pocket longitudinal axis
The other parameters can be selected as options. They define the insertion strategy and overlapping
for solid machining:
_MIDA real Maximum infeed width as a value in solid machining in the plane
_AP1 real Blank dimension of pocket length
_AP2 real Blank dimension of pocket width
_AD real Blank pocket depth dimension from reference plane
_RAD1 real Radius of the helical path on insertion (relative to the tool center point
path) or maximum insertion angle for reciprocating motion
_DP1 real Insertion depth per 360° revolution on insertion along helical path

Cycles
3-44 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.9 Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3

Example of pocket milling

With this program, you can make a pocket with a length of 60 mm, a width of 40 mm, a
corner radius of 8 mm and a depth of 17.5 mm in the XY plane (G17). The pocket has an
angle of 0 degrees to the X axis. The final machining allowance of the pocket edges is 0.75
mm, 0.2 mm at the base, the safety clearance in the Z axis, which is added to the reference
plane, is 0.5 mm. The center point of the pocket lies at X60 and Y40, the maximum depth
infeed is 4 mm.
The machining direction results from the direction of rotation of the spindle in the case of
down-cut milling.
Merely a rough machining operation is to be carried out.

< <

$ $%



 ; =


N10 G90 S600 M4 ;Specification of technology values

N15 T10 D1
N17 M6
N20 G17 G0 X60 Y40 Z5 ;Approach start position
N25 _ZSD[2]=0 ;Dimensioning the pocket via the center
;point
N30 POCKET3 (5, 0, 0.5, -17.5, 60, -> ;Cycle call
-> 40, 8, 60, 40, 0, 4, 0.75, 0.2, ->
-> 1000, 750, 0, 11, 5)
N40 M30 ;Program end
N10 G90 S600 M4 ;Specification of technology values
N15 T10 D1

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-45
Milling cycles
3.9 Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
Starting position is any position from which the pocket center point can be approached at the
height of the retraction plane without collision.

<

*

*

Note
A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is
aborted and alarm 61000 "No tool compensation active" is output.
Internally in the cycle, a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which influences
the actual value display. The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket
center point.
At the end of the cycle, the original coordinate system is active again.

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions when roughing (VARI = X1):
With G0, the pocket center point is approached at the retraction level, and then, from this
position, with G0, too, the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance is
approached. The machining of the pocket is then carried out according to the selected
insertion strategy, taking into account the programmed blank dimensions.
Immersion strategies:
• Immersion perpendicular to pocket center (VARI = 0X, VARI = 1X)
means that the current infeed depth calculated within the cycle (≤ maximum infeed depth
programmed under _MID) is carried out in a block with G0 or G1.

Cycles
3-46 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.9 Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3

• Immersion on helical path (VARI = 2X)

means that the milling center point traverses the helical path specified by the radius
_RAD1 and the depth per revolution _DP1. In this case, the feedrate programmed under
_FFD is in effect. The direction of rotation of this helical path corresponds to the direction
of rotation with which the pocket will be machined.
The insertion depth programmed under _DP1 is taken into account as the maximum
depth and is always calculated as an integer number of revolutions of the helical path.
If the current depth required for an infeed (this can be several revolutions on the helical
path) is reached, a full circle is still executed to eliminate the inclined path of insertion.
Pocket solid machining then starts in this plane and continues until it reaches the final
machining allowance.
The starting point of the described helical path is at the longitudinal axis of the pocket in
"plus direction" and is approached with G1.
• Immersion oscillating on center axis of pocket (VARI = 3X)
means that the milling center point on a straight line oscillating back and forth is inserted
at an angle until it has reached the nearest current depth. The maximum immersion angle
is programmed under _RAD1, and the length of the oscillation travel is calculated in the
cycle. If the current depth is reached, the travel is executed once more without depth
infeed in order to eliminate the inclined insertion path. In this case, the feedrate
programmed under _FFD is in effect.

Taking into account the blank dimensions

<

B$3SRFNHWOHQJWKEODQNGLPHQVLRQ

;
B$3EODQNGLPHQVLRQ
3RFNHWZLGWK

During solid machining of the pockets, it is possible to take into account blank dimensions
(e.g. when machining precast parts).
The blank dimensions for length and width (_AP1 and _AP2) are programmed without sign
and are placed by the cycle symmetrically around the pocket center point via calculation.
You will define the part of the pocket which is no longer to be machined by solid machining.
The blank dimension for the depth (_AD) is also programmed without sign and taken into
account by the reference plane in the direction of the pocket depth.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-47
Milling cycles
3.9 Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3

The depth infeed when taking into account blank dimensions is carried out according to the
programmed type (helical path, reciprocating, vertically). If the cycle detects that there is
space enough in the pocket center because of the given blank contour and the radius of the
active tool, the infeed is carried out vertically to the pocket center point as long as it is
possible in order not to traverse extensive insertion paths in the open.
Solid machining of the pocket is carried out starting from the top downwards.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions when finishing (VARI = X2):
Finishing is performed in the order from the edge until the finishing allowance on the base is
reached, and then the base is finished. If one of the finishing allowances is equal to zero, this
part of the finishing process is skipped.
• Finishing on the edge
While finishing on the edge, the tool will traverse around the pocket contour only once.
For finishing on the edge, the path includes one quadrant reaching the corner radius. The
radius of this path is normally 2 mm or, if "less space" is provided, equals to the
difference between the corner radius and the mill radius.
If the final machining allowance on the edge is larger than 2 mm, the approach radius is
increased accordingly.
The depth infeed is performed with G0 in the open towards the pocket center, and the
starting point of the approach path is also reached with G0.
• Finishing on the base
During finishing on the base, the machine performs G0 towards the pocket center until
reaching a distance equal to pocket depth + finishing allowance + safety clearance. From
there, the tool always moves vertically downward at the feedrate for the depth infeed
(because a tool that can cut over the face is used for finishing on the base).
The base surface of the pocket is machined once.

Cycles
3-48 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.9 Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3

Explanation of the parameters

Pocket dimensioned from the center point Pocket dimensioned from the corner

< <

B3$

B67$

*
B&5$'

(1
B/
* *

B:
*
B:
(1

,'
,'
B/

B67$
* *

B32

B32
; B3$ ;

_LENG, _WID and _CRAD (pocket length, pocket width and corner radius)
Use the parameters _LENG, _WID and _CRAD to define the form of a pocket in the plane.
The pocket can be dimensioned from the center or from a corner point. When dimensioning
from a corner point, use _LENG and _WID with sign.
If you cannot traverse the programmed corner radius with the active tool since its radius is
larger, then the corner radius of the machine pocket corresponds to the tool radius.
If the milling tool radius is larger than half of the length or width of the pocket, then the cycle
will be aborted and alarm 61105 "Cutter radius too large" is output.
_PA, _PO (reference point)
With the parameters _PA and _PO, you define the reference point of the pocket in the
machining plane.
This is either the pocket center point or a corner point. The value of this parameter depends
on cycle setting data bit _ZSD[2]:
• 0 means pocket center point
• 1 means corner point.
When dimensioning the pocket from a corner, the length and width parameters (_LENG,
_WID) must be entered with sign, thus uniquely defining the position of the pocket.
_STA (angle)
_STA indicates the angle between the 1st axis of the plane (abscissa) and the longitudinal
axis of the pocket.
The rotation around _STA is always carried out at the reference point. (Note setting
_ZSD[2]).

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-49
Milling cycles
3.9 Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3

_MID (infeed depth)

Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed depth.
The depth infeed is performed by the cycle in equally sized infeed steps.
by using _MID and the entire depth, the cycle calculates this infeed automatically. The
minimum possible number of infeed steps is used as the basis.
_MID=0 means that infeed is carried out in one cut up to the pocket depth.
_FAL (finishing allowance at edge)
The finishing allowance only affects the machining of the pocket in the plane on the edge.
When the finishing allowance ≥ tool diameter, the complete solid machining of the pocket is
not guaranteed. The message "Caution: finishing allowance ≥ tool diameter" is displayed.
However, the cycle will continue.
_FALD (finishing allowance at the base)
When roughing, a separate finishing allowance is taken into account at the base.
_FFD and _FFP1 (feedrate for depth and surface)
The feedrate _FFD is effective when inserting into the material.
The feedrate _FFP1 is active for all movements in the plane which are traversed at feedrate
during machining.
_CDIR (milling direction)
Use this parameter to specify the machining direction for the pocket.
The direction of milling can be programmed as follows using the _CDIR parameter:
• Directly with "2 for G2" and "3 for G3" or
• Alternatively, "down-cut" or "up-cut"
Down-cut and up-cut are determined internally in the cycle via the direction of rotation of the
spindle activated prior to calling the cycle.

Down-cut Up-cut
M3 → G3 M3 → G2
M4 → G2 M4 → G3
_VARI (machining type)
Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type.
For possible values, see parameter overview.
If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after output
of alarm 61002 "Machining type defined incorrectly".
_MIDA (max. infeed width)
Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed width when solid machining in a plane.
Analogously to the known calculation method for the infeed depth (equal distribution of the
total depth with the maximum possible value), the width is distributed equally, maximally with
the value programmed under _MIDA.

Cycles
3-50 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.9 Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3

If this parameter is not programmed or has value 0, the cycle will internally use 80% of the
milling tool diameter as the maximum infeed width.
The following parameters must be taken into account when the width infeed calculated from
the edge machining is recalculated when reaching the full pocket in depth. Otherwise, the
calculated width infeed is retained for the entire cycle.
AP1, _AP2, _AD (blank dimension)
With the parameters _AP1, _AP2 and _AD, you define the blank dimension (incremental) of
the pocket in the plane and depth.
_RAD1 (radius)
Use the parameter _RAD1 to define the radius of the helical path (referred to the tool center
point path) or the max. insertion angle for the reciprocating motion.
_DP1 (immersion depth)
Use the parameter _DP1 to define the infeed depth when inserting to the helical path.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, and SDIS, see Drilling, centering –
CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the DP parameter, see Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1
For an explanation of the cycle setting data _ZSD[1] and _ZSD[2], see Requirements for
milling cycles.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)
Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1 (Page 3-32)
Requirements (Page 3-1)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-51
Milling cycles
3.10 Milling a circular pocket - POCKET4

3.10 3.10 Milling a circular pocket - POCKET4

Function
Use this cycle to machine circular pockets in the machining plane.
For finishing, a face cutter is required.
The depth infeed will always start at the pocket center point and be performed vertically from
there; thus it is practical to predrill at this position.

New functions compared to POCKET2:

• The milling direction can be specified via a G command (G2/G3) or as up-cut or down-cut
milling from the spindle direction.
• For solid machining, the maximum infeed width in the plane can be programmed.
• Finishing allowance also at the base of the pocket.
• Two different insertion strategies:
– vertically to the pocket center
– along a helical path around the pocket center
• Short paths during approach in the plane when finishing.
• Consideration of a blank contour in the plane and a blank dimension at the base
(optimum machining of preformed pockets possible).
• _MIDA is recalculated during edge machining.

Programming
POCKET4 (_RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _PRAD, _PA, _PO, _MID, _FAL,
_FALD, _FFP1, _FFD, _CDIR, _VARI, _MIDA, _AP1, _AD, _RAD1, _DP1)

Cycles
3-52 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.10 Milling a circular pocket - POCKET4

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety clearance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Pocket depth (absolute)
_PRAD real Pocket radius
_PA real Pocket center point, abscissa (absolute)
_PO real Pocket center point, ordinate (absolute)
_MID real Maximum infeed depth (enter without sign)
_FAL real Finishing allowance at the pocket edge (enter without sign)
_FALD real Final machining allowance at base (enter without sign)
_FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
_CDIR integer Milling direction: (enter without sign)
Values: 0: Down-cut milling (corresponds to direction of spindle
rotation)
1: Down-cut milling
2: with G2 (independent of spindle direction)
3: With G3
_VARI integer Machining type: (enter without sign)
Values: THOUSANDS DIGIT:
1: Roughing
2: Finishing
THOUSANDS DIGIT:
0: Perpendicular to pocket center with G0
1: Perpendicular to pocket center with G1
2: On helical path:
The other parameters can be selected as options. They define the insertion strategy and overlapping
for solid machining:
_MIDA real Maximum infeed width as a value in solid machining in the plane
_AP1 real Pocket radius blank dimension
_AD real Blank pocket depth dimension from reference plane
_RAD1 real Radius of the helical path during insertion (referred to the tool center
point path)
_DP1 real Insertion depth per 360° revolution on insertion along helical path

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-53
Milling cycles
3.10 Milling a circular pocket - POCKET4

Example of circular pocket milling

With this program, you can make a circular pocket in the YZ plane (G19). The center point is
determined by Y50 Z50. The infeed axis for the depth infeed is the X axis. Neither finishing
dimension nor safety clearance is specified. The pocket is machined with down-cut milling.
Infeed is performed along a helical path.

= =

$ $%



%
< ;



N10 G19 G90 G0 S650 M3 ;Specification of technology values

N15 T20 D1
N17 M6
N20 Y50 Z50 ;Approach start position
N30 Pocket4(3, 0, 0, -20, 25, 50, -> ;Cycle call
-> 50, 6, 0, 0, 200, 100, 1, 21, 0, ->
-> 0, 0, 2, 3)
N40 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
3-54 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.10 Milling a circular pocket - POCKET4

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
Starting position is any position from which the pocket center point can be approached at the
height of the retraction plane without collision.

Note
A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is
aborted and alarm 61000 "No tool compensation active" is output.
Internally in the cycle, a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which influences
the actual value display. The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket
center point.
At the end of the cycle, the original coordinate system is active again.

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions when roughing (VARI = X1):
With G0, the pocket center point is approached at the retraction level, and then, from this
position, with G0, too, the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance is
approached. The machining of the pocket is then carried out according to the selected
insertion strategy, taking into account the programmed blank dimensions.
Taking into account the blank dimensions
During solid machining of the pockets, it is possible to take into account blank dimensions
(e.g. when machining precast parts).
With circular pockets, the blank dimension _AP1 is also a circle (with a smaller radius than
the pocket radius).

Note
Insertion strategies:
See description of POCKET3.
For further information about taking into account the blank dimensions, see POCKET3, as
well!

Sequence of motions for finishing (VARI = X2):

Finishing is performed in the order from the edge until the finishing allowance on the base is
reached, and then the base is finished. If one of the finishing allowances is equal to zero, this
part of the finishing process is skipped.
• Finishing on the edge:
While finishing on the edge, the tool will traverse around the pocket contour only once.
For finishing on the edge, the path includes one quadrant reaching the pocket radius. The
radius of this path is 2 mm as the maximum or, if "less space" is provided, equals to the
difference between the pocket radius and the mill radius.
The depth infeed is performed with G0 in the open towards the pocket center, and the
starting point of the approach path is also reached with G0.
• Finishing on the base:
During finishing on the base, the machine performs G0 towards the pocket center until
reaching a distance equal to pocket depth + finishing allowance + safety clearance. From
there, the tool always moves vertically downward at the feedrate for the depth infeed
(because a tool that can cut over the face is used for finishing on the base).
The base surface of the pocket is machined once.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-55
Milling cycles
3.10 Milling a circular pocket - POCKET4

Explanation of the parameters

<

B3$

* *
B3
5
$'

B32
;

_PRAD (pocket radius)

The form of the circular pocket is determined solely by its radius.
If this is smaller than the tool radius of the active tool, then the cycle is aborted and alarm
61105 "Cutter radius too large" is output.
_PA, _PO (pocket center point)
Use the parameters _PA and _PO to define the pocket center point. Circular pockets are
always dimensioned across the center.
_VARI (machining type)
Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type.
For possible values, see parameter overview.
If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after output
of alarm 61002 "Machining type defined incorrectly".
Edge-only roughing with POCKET4
With POCKET4 (circular pocket), it is possible to machine the edge only during roughing.
To this end, the blank dimension in depth (parameter _AD) must be defined such that it is at
least as large as the pocket depth (DP) minus the finishing allowance depth (_FALD).

Cycles
3-56 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.10 Milling a circular pocket - POCKET4

Example:
Requirement: Depth calculation without including safety clearance (_ZSD[1]=1)

_RTP=0 ;Reference plane

_SDIS=2 ;Safety clearance
_DP=-21 ;Pocket depth
_FALD=1.2 ;Depth allowance
→_AD ≥ 19.75 ;Blank dimension for depth must be greater than or equal to
;the incremental pocket depth
;minus depth allowance, i.e., 21-1.25 = 19.75

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, and SDIS, see Drilling, centering –
CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the DP parameter, see Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1
For an explanation of the parameters MID, FAL, FALD, FFP1, FFD, _CDIR, _MIDA, _AP1,
_AD, _RAD1, and _DP1, see Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3.
For an explanation of the cycle setting data _ZSD[1], see Requirements for milling cycles.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)
Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1 (Page 3-32)
Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3 (Page 3-43)
Requirements (Page 3-1)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-57
Milling cycles
3.11 Face milling - CYCLE71

3.11 3.11 Face milling - CYCLE71

Function
Use CYCLE71 to face mill any rectangular surface. The cycle differentiates between
roughing (machining the surface in several steps until reaching the final machining
allowance) and finishing (end milling the surface in one step). The maximum infeed in width
and depth can be specified.
The cycle operates without cutter radius compensation. The depth infeed is carried out in the
open.

Programming
CYCLE71 (_RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _PA, _PO, _LENG, _WID, _STA,_MID,
_MIDA, _FDP, _FALD, _FFP1, _VARI, _FDP1)

Cycles
3-58 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.11 Face milling - CYCLE71

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety clearance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Depth (absolute)
_PA real Starting point, abscissa (absolute)
_PO real Starting point, ordinate (absolute)
_LENG real Length of the rectangle in the 1st axis, incrementally.
The corner from which dimensioning is carried out results from the sign.
_WID real Length of the rectangle in the 2nd axis, incrementally.
The corner from which dimensioning is carried out results from the sign.
_STA real Angle between the longitudinal axis of the rectangle and the first axis of
the plane (abscissa, enter without sign);
Range of values: 0° ≤ _STA < 180°
_MID real Maximum infeed depth (enter without sign)
_MIDA real Maximum infeed width value for machining in the plane (enter without
sign)
_FDP real Retraction travel in cutting direction (incremental, enter without sign)
_FALD real Final machining allowance in depth (incremental, enter without sign). In
finishing mode, _FALD refers to the remaining material on the surface.
_FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
_VARI integer Machining type: (enter without sign)
Values: THOUSANDS DIGIT:
1: Roughing
2: Finishing
THOUSANDS DIGIT:
1: parallel to the abscissa, in one direction
2: parallel to the ordinate, in one direction
3: parallel to the abscissa, with alternating direction
4: parallel to the ordinate, with alternating direction
_FDP1 real Overrun travel in direction of plane infeed (incremental, enter without
sign)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-59
Milling cycles
3.11 Face milling - CYCLE71

Example of face milling a surface

Parameters for the cycle call:

Parameter Meaning Value

_RTP Retraction plane 10 mm
_RFP Reference plane 0
_SDIS Safety clearance 2 mm
_DP Depth -11 mm
_FAL Finishing allowance in plane No finishing allowance
_FALD Finishing allowance in depth No finishing allowance
_PA Starting point of the rectangle X = 100 mm
_PO Starting point of the rectangle Y = 100 mm
_LENG Rectangle dimensions X = +60 mm
_WID Rectangle dimensions Y = +40 mm
_STA Angle of rotation in the plane 10 degrees
_MID Maximum infeed depth 6 mm
_MIDA Maximum infeed width 10 mm
_FDP Retraction at the end of the milling path 5 mm
_FFP1 Feedrate in the plane 4000 mm/min
_VARI Machining type Roughing parallel to the X axis with
alternating direction
_FDP1 Overrun on last cut as determined by the 2 mm
cutting edge geometry

$TC_DP1[1,1] = 120 ;Tool type

$TC_DP6[1.1] =10 ;Tool radius
N100 T1
N102 M06
N110 G17 G0 G90 G54 G94 F2000 X0 Y0 Z20 ;Approach start position
;
CYCLE71( 10, 0, 2,-11, 100, 100, -> ;Cycle call
-> 60, 40, 10, 6, 10, 5, 0, 4000, 31, 2)
N125 G0 G90 X0 Y0
N130 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
3-60 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.11 Face milling - CYCLE71

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
Starting position is any position from which the infeed point can be approached at the height
of the retraction plane without collision.

Note
A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is
aborted and alarm 61000 "No tool compensation active" is output.

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

• G0 is applied to approach the infeed point at the current position level. The reference
plane, brought forward by the safety distance, is then also approached with G0 to this
position. then, also with G0, feeding to the machining plane. G0 is possible because the
infeed takes place in the open.
There are several roughing strategies (paraxial in one direction or back and forth).
• Sequence of motions for roughing (VARI = X1):
According to the programmed values _DP, _MID and _FALD, face milling can be carried
out in several planes. Machining is carried out from the top downwards, i.e. one plane
each is removed and then the next depth infeed is carried out in the open (parameters
_FDP).
The traversing paths for solid machining in the plane depend on the values of the
parameters _LENG, _WID, _MIDA, _FDP, _FDP1 and the cutter radius of the active tool.
The first path to be milled is always traversed such that the infeed depth exactly
corresponds to _MIDA so that no width infeed larger than the maximum possible width
infeed results. The tool center point thus does not always travel exactly on the edge (only
if _MIDA = cutter radius).
The dimension by which the tool travels outside of the edge is always milling cutter
diameter - _MIDA, even if only 1 cut is made on the surface, i.e., surface width +
overshoot is less than _MIDA.
The other paths for width infeed are calculated internally so as to produce a uniform path
width (<=_MIDA).
• Sequence of motions for finishing (VARI = X2):
When finishing, the surface is milled in the plane once. This means that the finishing
allowance when roughing has to be selected also such that the residual depth can be
removed with the finishing tool in one step.
After each surface milling pass in the plane, the tool will retract. The retraction travel is
programmed under the parameter _FDP.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-61
Milling cycles
3.11 Face milling - CYCLE71

<

B)'3

B)'3

;
0LOOLQJPRYHPHQWZKHQILQLVKLQJLQDOWHUQDWH
GLUHFWLRQ PDFKLQLQJW\SH

• Machining in one direction stops at the final machining allowance + safety distance and
the next starting point is approached in rapid traverse.
Roughing in one direction stops when the calculated infeed depth + safety distance is
reached. The depth infeed is performed at the same point as in roughing.
After finishing has been completed, the tool retracts from the last position reached to the
retraction plane _RTP.

Explanation of the parameters

< B/(1* B)'3

B0,'$
B:,'

B32
B3$
B)'3

,QIHHGSRLQW
;
5RXJKLQJZLWKB0,'$ODUJHUWKDQPLOOLQJUDGLXV
PDFKLQLQJW\SH

_DP (depth)
The depth can be specified as an absolute value (_DP) to the reference plane.

Cycles
3-62 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.11 Face milling - CYCLE71

_PA, _PO (starting point)

With the parameters _PA and _PO, you define the starting point of the surface in the
machining plane.
_LENG, _WID (length)
Use the parameters _LENG and _WID to define the length and width of a rectangle in the
plane. The position of the rectangle referred to _PA and _PO results from the sign.
_MIDA (max. infeed width)
Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed width when machining in a plane.
Analogously to the known calculation method for the infeed depth (equal distribution of the
total depth with the maximum possible value), the width is distributed equally, maximally with
the value programmed under _MIDA.
If this parameter is not programmed or has value 0, the cycle will internally use 80% of the
milling tool diameter as the maximum infeed width.
_FDP (retraction travel)
Use this parameter to define the dimension for the retraction travel in the plane. This
parameter must be programmed with a value greater than zero.
_FDP1 (overrun travel)

&XWWHUGLDPHWHUIURPWRROWDEOH

B)'3

$UHD

Use this parameter to specify an overrun travel in the direction of the plane infeed (_MIDA).
Thus, it is possible to compensate the difference between the current cutter radius and the
tool nose radius (e.g. cutter radius or cutting tips arranged at an angle). The last cutter
center point path thus always results as _LENG (or _WID) + _FDP1 - tool radius (from the
compensation table).
_FALD (finishing allowance)
When roughing, a finishing allowance in the depth is taken into account which is
programmed under this parameter.
When finishing, the residual material that was programmed as the finishing allowance during
roughing and that is still present must be indicated so that the lift-off and subsequent infeed
to the starting point of the next cut can be executed without collisions.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-63
Milling cycles
3.11 Face milling - CYCLE71

_VARI (machining type)

Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type.
Possible settings:
Units digit:
• 1 = roughing to finishing allowance
• 2 = finishing
Tens digit:
The milling cutter travels:
• 1 = parallel to the abscissa, in one direction
• 2 = parallel to the ordinate, in one direction
• 3 = parallel to the abscissa, with alternating direction
• 4 = parallel to the ordinate, with alternating direction

< <
B/(1* B/(1*
B:,'
B:,'

; ;
< B/(1* < B/(1*
B:,'
B:,'

; ;

3RVVLEOHVROLGPDFKLQLQJVWUDWHJLHVIRUIDFHPLOOLQJ

If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after output
of alarm 61002 "Machining type defined incorrectly".

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, and SDIS, see Drilling, centering –
CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the parameters _STA, _MID, and _FFP1, see Milling rectangular
pockets - POCKET3.
For an explanation of the cycle setting data _ZSD[1], see Requirements for milling cycles.

Cycles
3-64 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.12 Path milling - CYCLE72

3.12 3.12 Path milling - CYCLE72

Function
With CYCLE72, you mill along any user-defined contour. The cycle operates with or without
cutter radius compensation.
The contour does not need to be closed; internal or external machining is defined by the
position of the cutter radius compensation (central, left or right of contour).
The contour must be programmed in the direction in which it is to be milled and must be
located in one plane.
In addition, it must also consist of at least 2 contour blocks (starting and finishing point)
because the contour subroutine is called directly within the cycle.

Notice
A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is
aborted and alarm 61000 "No tool compensation active" is output.

<

&RQWRXUVWDUWLQJSRLQW

Functions of the cycle:

• Selection of roughing (one-time circumnavigation parallel to the contour while taking into
account a finishing allowance at several depths, if necessary, up to the finishing
allowance) and smoothing (one-time circumnavigation of the final contour at several
depths, if necessary).
• Soft approach and return from the contour, either tangentially or radially (quadrant or
semicircle).
• Depth infeeds can be programmed.
• Intermediary motions can be carried out in rapid traverse or with feedrate.

Programming
CYCLE72 (_KNAME, _RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _MID, _FAL, _FALD, _FFP1,
_FFD, _VARI, _RL, _AS1, _LP1, _FF3, _AS2, _LP2)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-65
Milling cycles
3.12 Path milling - CYCLE72

Parameter
Parameter Data Meaning
type
_KNAME string Name of contour subroutine
_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety clearance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Depth (absolute)
_MID real Maximum infeed depth (incremental, enter without sign)
_FAL real Finishing allowance at the edge contour (enter without sign)
_FALD real Finishing allowance at the base (incremental, enter without sign)
_FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed (enter without sign)
_VARI integer Machining type: (enter without sign)
Values: ONES DIGIT: 1: Roughing; 2: Finishing
TENS DIGIT:
0: Intermediate paths with G0
1: Intermediate paths with G1
HUNDREDS DIGIT:
0: Retraction at contour end to _RTP
1: Retraction at contour end to _RFP + _SDIS
2: Retraction at contour end by _SDIS
3: No retraction at contour end
_RL integer Traveling around the contour either centrally, to the right or to the left (with
G40, G41 or G42; enter without sign)
Values: 40: G40 (approach and return only in straight line)
41: G41
42: G42
_AS1 integer Specification of the approach direction/approach path: (enter without sign)
Values: ONES DIGIT:
1: Straight line tangential; 2: Quadrant; 3: Semicircle
TENS DIGIT:
0: Approach contour in the plane
1: Approach contour on a three-dimensional path
_LP1 real Length of the approach travel (with straight-line) or radius of the approach
arc (with circle) (enter without sign)
The other parameters can be selected as options.
_FF3 real Retraction feedrate and feedrate for intermediate positions in the plane (in
the open)
_AS2 integer Specification of the return direction/retraction path: (enter without sign)
Values: ONES DIGIT:
1: Straight line tangential; 2: Quadrant; 3: Semicircle
TENS DIGIT:
0: Return from contour in the plane
1: Return from contour on a three-dimensional path
_LP2 real Length of the retraction travel (with straight-line) or radius of the retraction
arc (with circle) (enter without sign)

Cycles
3-66 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.12 Path milling - CYCLE72

Example 1 Milling around a closed contour externally

This program is used to mill a contour as shown in the figure.

< &RQWRXUVWDUWLQJSRLQW
3URJUDPPHG
FRQWRXUGLUHFWLRQ


)LQDOFRQWRXU
)LQDOFRQWRXUILQDO
PDFKLQLQJDOORZDQFH

;

Parameters for the cycle call

Parameter Meaning Value

_RTP Retraction plane 250 mm
_RFP Reference plane 200
_SDIS Safety clearance 3 mm
_DP Depth 175 mm
_MID Maximum depth infeed 10 mm
_FAL Finishing allowance in plane 1 mm
_FALD Finishing allowance in depth 1,5 mm
_FFP1 Feedrate in the plane 800 mm/min
_FFD Feedrate depth infeed 400 mm/min
_VARI Machining type Roughing up to finishing allowance; intermediate
paths with G1, for intermediate paths retraction in
Z to _RFP + _SDIS

Parameters for approach:

Parameter Meaning Value

_RL G41 - left of the contour, i.e. 41
external machining
_LP1 Approach and return in a 20 mm radius
quadrant in the plane
_FF3 Retraction feedrate 1,000 mm/min

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-67
Milling cycles
3.12 Path milling - CYCLE72

N10 T20 D1 ;T20: Milling cutter with radius 7

N15 M6 ;Changing tool T20,
N20 S500 M3 F3000 ;Program feedrate and spindle speed
N25 G17 G0 G90 X100 Y200 Z250 G94 ;Approach start position
N30 CYCLE72 ("MYCONTOUR", 250, 200, -> ;Cycle call
-> 3, 175, 10,1, 1.5, 800, 400, 111, ->
-> 41, 2, 20, 1000, 2, 20)
N90 X100 Y200
N95 M02 ;Program end

%_N_MYCONTUR_SPF ;Subroutine for contour milling (e.g.)

;$PATH=/_N_SPF_DIR
N100 G1 G90 X150 Y160 ;Starting point of contour
N110 X230 CHF=10
N120 Y80 CHF=10
N130 X125
N140 Y135
N150 G2 X150 Y160 CR=25
N160 M17

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Example 2 Milling around a closed contour externally

With this program, the same contour is milled as in example 1. The difference is that the
contour programming is now in the calling program.

$TC_DP1[20,1]=120 $TC_DP6[20,1]=7
N10 T20 D1 ;T20: Milling cutter with radius 7
N15 M6 ;Changing tool T20,
N20 S500 M3 F3000 ;Program feedrate and spindle speed
N25 G17 G0 G90 G94 X100 Y200 Z250 -> ;Approach start position,
-> CYCLE72 ("START:END", 250, 200, -> ;cycle call
-> 3, 175, 10,1, 1.5, 800, 400, 11, ->
-> 41, 2, 20, 1000, 2, 20)
N30 G0 X100 Y200
N35 GOTOF END
START:
N100 G1 G90 X150 Y160
N110 X230 CHF=10
N120 Y80 CHF=10
N130 X125
N140 Y135
N150 G2 X150 Y160 CR=25
END:
N160 M02

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
3-68 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.12 Path milling - CYCLE72

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
Starting position is any position from which the contour starting point can be approached at
the height of the retraction plane without collision.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions when roughing (VARI = XX1):
The depth infeeds are distributed equally with the maximum possible value of the specified
parameters.
• Travel to the starting point for the first roughing with G0/G1 (and _FF3). This point is
calculated within the control system and depends on;
– the contour starting point (first point in the subroutine),
– the direction of the contour at the starting point,
– the approach mode and its parameters and
– the tool radius.
The cutter radius compensation is activated in this block.
• Depth infeed to first or next machining depth plus programmed safety distance
(parameter _SDIS) with G0/G1. The first machining depth results from
– the total depth,
– the finishing allowance and
– the maximum possible depth infeed.
• Approach the contour vertically with feedrate for depth infeed _FFD and then in the plane
with the feedrate _FFP1 programmed for surface milling or 3D with the feedrate
programmed under _FFD corresponding to the programming for soft approach.
• Milling along the contour with G40/G41/G42.
• Soft retraction from the contour with G1, still with the feedrate for surface machining by a
lift-off amount calculated within the cycle.
• Retraction with G0 /G1 (and feedrate for intermediate paths _FF3), depending on the
programming.
• Retraction to the depth infeed point with G0/G1 (and _FF3).
• This sequence is repeated on the next machining plane up to finishing allowance in the
depth.
A completion of roughing, the tool stands above the point (calculated internally in the control
system) of retraction from the contour at the height of the retraction plane.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions when finishing (VARI = XX2):
• When finishing, the milling is carried out with the relevant infeed in depth along the
contour until the final dimension _DP is reached.
• The appropriate path is calculated internally in the control system.
• At the end of the cycle, the tool is positioned at the contour retraction point at the height
of the retraction level.
Contour programming
When programming the contour, please observe the following:
• No programmable frame (TRANS, ROT, SCALE, MIRROR) may be selected in the
subroutine before the first programmed position.
• The first block of the contour subroutine is a straight line block containing G90 and G0
and defines the contour start.
• The cutter radius compensation is selected / deselected by the higher-level cycle;
therefore, no G40, G41, G42 is programmed in the contour subroutine.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-69
Milling cycles
3.12 Path milling - CYCLE72

Explanation of the parameters

=

5HIHUHQFHSODQHB5)3

)LQDOPDFKLQLQJDOORZDQFH
GHSWKB)$/'
)LQLVKLQJGLPHQVLRQ
GHSWKB'3
;

_KNAME (name)
The contour to be milled is programmed completely in a subroutine. _KNAME defines the
name of the contour subroutine.
The milling contour can also be a section of the calling routine or of any other program. The
section is identified by start or end labels or by block numbers. Program name and
labels/block number are indicated with ":".
Example:

Name Meaning
_KNAME="KONTUR_1" The milling contour is the complete program
Kontur_1.
_KNAME="ANFANG:ENDE" The milling contour is defined as a section in the
calling program, which starts from the block
containing label ANFANG (START) to the block
containing label ENDE (END).
_KNAME= The milling contour is defined in blocks N130 to
"/_N_SPF_DIR/_N_KONTUR_1_SPF:N130:N210" N210 in the program KONTOUR_1. The program
name must be written out completely with the
path and extension. See call description in the
reference: /PGA/ Programming Guide Production
Planning

Notice
If the section is defined with block numbers, then you must note that with _KNAME, the block
numbers for the section must also be adjusted after a program change with a subsequent
"renumbering" operation.

Cycles
3-70 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.12 Path milling - CYCLE72

_VARI (machining type)

Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type. For possible values, see
"Parameters for CYCLE72".
If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after output
of alarm 61002 "Machining type defined incorrectly".
_RL (travel around the contour)
With the parameter _RL, you will program traveling around the contour centrally, to the right
or to the left with G40, G41 or G42. For possible values, see "Parameters for CYCLE72".
_AS1, _AS2 (Approach direction/path, return direction/path)
%\SDVVLQJWKHFRQWRXURQWKHULJKWRUOHIWVLGH


_AS1/_AS2 &RQWRXU
DSSURDFKHGUHWXUQHG
IURPDORQJDVWUDLJKWOLQH

&RQWRXUDSSURDFKHG
UHWXUQHGIURPDORQJD
TXDUWHUFLUFOH

_AS1/_AS2

&RQWRXUDSSURDFKHG
UHWXUQHGIURPDORQJD
VHPLFLUFOH

_AS1/_AS2

%\SDVVLQJWKHFRQWRXUFHQWUDOO\
_AS1/_AS2
&RQWRXU
DSSURDFKHGUHWXUQHG
IURPDORQJDVWUDLJKWOLQH

Use the parameter _AS1 to program the specification of the approach path and _AS2 to
program that of the retraction path. For possible values, see "Parameters for CYCLE72". If
_AS2 is not programmed, then the behavior of the retraction path is analogously to that of
the approach path. Smooth approach of the contour along a spatial path (helix or straight
line) should only be programmed if the tool is not yet in mesh or is suitable for this type of
approach.

Note
In the case of central (G40) approach and retraction, only possible along a straight line.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-71
Milling cycles
3.12 Path milling - CYCLE72

_LP1, _LP2 (length, radius)

Use parameter _LP1 to program the approach travel or approach radius (distance from the
tool external edge to the contour starting point), and _LP2 to program the retraction travel or
retraction radius (distance from the tool external edge to the contour end point).
Parameters _LP1, _LP2 must be set to >0. When the value is 0, error 61116 "Approach or
return path = 0" is displayed.

Note
When using G40, the approach or retraction travel is the distance from the tool center point
to the starting or end point of the contour.

_FF3 (retraction feedrate)

Use parameter _FF3 to define a retraction feedrate for intermediate positions in the plane (in
the open) if the intermediate motions are to be carried out with feedrate (G01). If no feedrate
value is programmed, the intermediate motions with G01 are carried out at surface feedrate.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, and SDIS, see Drilling, centering –
CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the parameters _MID, _FAL, _FALD, and _FFP1, see Milling
rectangular pockets - POCKET3.
For an explanation of the parameter _DP, see Face milling - CYCLE71
For an explanation of the cycle setting data _ZSD[1], see Requirements for milling cycles.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)
Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3 (Page 3-43)
Face milling - CYCLE71 (Page 3-58)
Requirements (Page 3-1)

Cycles
3-72 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.13 Rectangular spigot milling - CYCLE76

3.13 3.13 Rectangular spigot milling - CYCLE76

Function
Use this cycle to machine rectangular spigots in the machining plane. For finishing, a face
cutter is required. The depth infeed is always carried out in the position upstream of the
semicircle style approach to the contour.

Programming
CYCLE76 (_RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _DPR, _LENG, _WID, _CRAD, _PA, _PO,
_STA, _MID, _FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, _FFD, _CDIR, _VARI, _AP1, _AP2)

Parameter
The following input parameters are always required:

Parameter Data type Meaning

_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety clearance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Depth (absolute)
_DPR real Depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
_LENG real Spigot length, for dimensioning from corner with sign
_WID real Spigot width, for dimensioning from corner with sign
_CRAD real Spigot corner radius (enter without sign)
_PA real Reference point of spigot, abscissa (absolute)
_PO real Reference point of spigot, ordinate (absolute)
_STA real Angle between longitudinal axis and 1st axis of plane
_MID real Maximum depth infeed (incremental; enter without sign)
_FAL real Final machining allowance at the margin contour (incremental)
_FALD real Finishing allowance at the base (incremental, enter without sign)
_FFP1 real Feedrate on contour

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-73
Milling cycles
3.13 Rectangular spigot milling - CYCLE76

Parameter Data type Meaning

_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
_CDIR integer Milling direction: (enter without sign)
Values: 0: Down-cut milling
1: Down-cut milling
2: with G2 (independent of direction of spindle rotation)
3: With G3
_VARI integer Machining type:
Values: 1: Roughing to finishing allowance
2: Finishing
_AP1 real Length of blank spigot
_AP2 real Width of blank spigot

Example of spigot milling

With this program, you can make a spigot with a length of 60 mm, a width of 40 mm, and a
corner radius of 15 mm in the XY plane (G17). The spigot has an angle of 10 degrees in
relation to the X axis and is programmed from a corner point P1. When corners are used for
dimensioning, the length and width of the spigot must be specified with a sign to define the
spigot position uniquely. The spigot is premachined with an allowance of 80 mm in length
and 50 mm in width.

< <

$ $%
3

5 ¡


%
 ; =


N10 G90 G0 G17 X100 Y100 T20 D1 S3000 ;Specification of technology values
M3
N11 M6
N20 _ZSD[2]=1 ;Dimensioning of spigot with reference to
;corners
N30 CYCLE76 (10, 0, 2, -17.5, , -60, -> ;Cycle call
-> -40, 15, 80, 60, 10, 11, , , 900, ->
-> 800, 0, 1, 80, 50)
N40 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
3-74 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.13 Rectangular spigot milling - CYCLE76

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
Within the cycle, a position located on the first axis in the plane in the positive direction of
this axis is calculated as the starting point. It depends on the blank dimension of the spigot
and the tool radius, and must be approachable without collisions.

$SSURDFKWRDQGUHWUDFWLRQIURPWKHFRQWRXUDORQJ
DVHPLFLUFOHZLWKWKHVSLQGOHURWDWLQJFORFNZLVH
DQGV\QFKURQRXVPLOOLQJ

<

$SSURDFKWRFRQWRXU

;

5HWUDFWLRQIURPFRQWRXU

Notice
A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is
canceled and alarm 61009 "Active tool number=0" is issued.
Internally in the cycle, a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which influences
the actual value display. The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket
center point.
At the end of the cycle, the original coordinate system is active again.

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions when roughing (_VARI = 1):
• Approach/retraction from contour:
The retraction plane (_RTP) is approached at rapid traverse rate to be able to position
then at this height to the starting point in the machining plane.
The tool is feed to the safety clearance (_SDIS) at rapid traverse with subsequent
traversing to the machining depth at feedrate.
To approach the spigot contour, the tool will travel along a semicircle path.
The milling direction can be determined either as up-cut milling or down-cut milling with
reference to the spindle direction.
If the spigot is bypassed once, the contour is left along a semi-circle in the plane, and the
tool is fed to the next machining depth.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-75
Milling cycles
3.13 Rectangular spigot milling - CYCLE76

The contour is then reapproached along a semicircle and the spigot is circumnavigated
once. This process is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached. Then, the
retraction plane (_RTP) is approached at rapid traverse rate.
• Depth infeed:
– Feeding to the safety clearance
– Insertion to machining depth
The first machining depth is calculated from:
– the total depth,
– the finishing allowance and
– the maximum possible depth infeed.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions when smoothing (_VARI = 2)
Depending on the programmed parameters _FAL and _FALD, smoothing is carried out on
the peripheral contour, on the base, or both. The approach strategy corresponds to the
motions in the plane as with roughing.

Explanation of the parameters

< 6SLJRWGLPHQVLRQHGIURPFHQWHUSRLQW < 6SLJRWGLPHQVLRQHGIURPFRUQHU

B3$

B67$ *
(1

B&5$'
B/
B:
*

B:
(1

,'

,'

B67$
B/

B32

B32

; B3$ ;

_LENG, _WID and _CRAD (spigot length, spigot width, and corner radius)
Use the parameters _LENG, _WID, and _CRAD to define the form of a spigot in the plane.
The spigot can be dimensioned from the center or from a corner point. When dimensioning
from a corner point, use _LENG and _WID with sign.
The length value (_LENG) always refers to the first axis (zero degrees for plane angle).

Cycles
3-76 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.13 Rectangular spigot milling - CYCLE76

_PA, _PO (reference point)

With the parameters _PA and _PO, you define the reference point of the spigot in the
machining plane.
This is either the spigot center point or a corner point. The value of this parameter depends
on cycle setting data bit _ZSD[2]:
• 0 means spigot center point
• 1 means corner point.
When the spigot is dimensioned from a corner, the length and width parameters (_LENG,
_WID) must be entered with sign so that a unique position for the spigot is defined.
_STA (angle)
_STA specifies the angle between the 1st axis of the plane (abscissa) and the longitudinal
axis of the spigot.
The rotation around _STA is always carried out at the reference point. (Note setting
_ZSD[2]).
_CDIR (milling direction)
Use this parameter to specify the machining direction for the spigot. With the parameter
_CDIR, the milling direction can be programmed directly as "2 for G2" and "3 for G3" or
alternatively as "down-cut" or "up-cut". Down-cut and up-cut milling are determined internally
in the cycle via the direction of rotation of the spindle activated prior to calling the cycle.

Down-cut Up-cut
M3 → G3 M3 → G2
M4 → G2 M4 → G3
_VARI (machining type)
Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type.
Possible settings:
• 1 = roughing
• 2 = finishing

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-77
Milling cycles
3.13 Rectangular spigot milling - CYCLE76

_AP1, _AP2 (blank dimensions)

<

B$3

B$3

When machining the spigot, it is possible to take into account blank dimensions (e.g. when
machining precast parts). The basic sizes for the length and width (_AP1 and _AP2) are
programmed without sign and their symmetrical positions around the spigot center are
computed in the cycle. The internally calculated radius of the approach semicircle depends
on this dimension.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, _DP, and _DPR , see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the parameters _MID, _FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, and _FFD, see Milling
rectangular pockets - POCKET3.
For an explanation of the cycle setting data _ZSD[2], see Requirements for milling cycles.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)
Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3 (Page 3-43)
Requirements (Page 3-1)

Cycles
3-78 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.14 Circular spigot milling - CYCLE77

3.14 3.14 Circular spigot milling - CYCLE77

Function
Use this cycle to machine circular spigots in the machining plane. For finishing, a face cutter
is required. The depth infeed is always carried out in the position upstream of the semicircle
style approach to the contour.

Programming
CYCLE77 (_RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _DPR, _PRAD, _PA, _PO, _MID, _FAL,
_FALD, _FFP1, _FFD, _CDIR, _VARI, _AP1)

Parameter
The following input parameters are always required:

Parameter Data type Meaning

_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety clearance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Depth (absolute)
_DPR real Depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
_PRAD real Spigot diameter (enter without sign)
_PA real Center point of spigot, abscissa (absolute)
_PO real Center point of spigot, ordinate (absolute)
_MID real Maximum depth infeed (incremental; enter without sign)
_FAL real Final machining allowance on edge contour (incremental)
_FALD real Finishing allowance at the base (incremental, enter without sign)
_FFP1 real Feedrate on contour
_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed (or spatial infeed)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-79
Milling cycles
3.14 Circular spigot milling - CYCLE77

Parameter Data type Meaning

_CDIR
integer Milling direction: (enter without sign)
Values: 0: Down-cut milling
1: Down-cut milling
2: with G2 (independent of direction of spindle rotation)
3: With G3
_VARI integer Machining type
Values: 1: Roughing to finishing allowance
2: Smoothing (allowance X/Y/Z=0)
_AP1 real Diameter of blank spigot

Example of circular spigot milling

Machining a spigot from a blank with a diameter of 55 mm and a maximum infeed of 10 mm
per cut; specification of a final machining allowance for subsequent finishing of the spigot
surface. The whole machining is performed with reverse rotation.

< <

$ $%
š
š


 % ; =


N10 G90 G17 G0 S1800 M3 D1 T1 ;Specification of technology values

N11 M6
N20 CYCLE77 (10, 0, 3, -20, ,50, 60, -> ;Roughing cycle call
-> 70, 10, 0.5, 0, 900, 800, 1, 1, 55)
N30 D1 T2 M6 ;Change tool
N40 S2400 M3 ;Specification of technology values
N50 CYCLE77 (10, 0, 3, -20, , 50, 60, -> ;Finishing cycle call
-> 70, 10, 0, 0, 800, 800, 1, 2, 55)
N60 M30 ;Program end

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a block

Cycles
3-80 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.14 Circular spigot milling - CYCLE77

Sequence
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position is calculated within the cycle exactly as in CYCLE76 (see Section 3.13,
Milling a rectangular spigot - CYCLE76).

$SSURDFKWRDQGUHWUDFWLRQIURPWKHFRQWRXUDORQJ
DVHPLFLUFOHZLWKWKHVSLQGOHURWDWLQJFORFNZLVHDQG
V\QFKURQRXVPLOOLQJ

<

$SSURDFKWRFRQWRXU

;

5HWUDFWLRQIURPFRQWRXU

Notice
A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is
canceled and alarm 61009 "Active tool number=0" is issued.
Internally in the cycle, a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which influences
the actual value display. The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket
center point.
At the end of the cycle, the original coordinate system is active again.

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions when roughing (_VARI = 1):
• Approach/retraction from contour:
The retraction plane (_RTP) is approached at rapid traverse rate to be able to position
then at this height to the starting point in the machining plane.
The tool is feed to the safety clearance (_SDIS) at rapid traverse with subsequent
traversing to the machining depth at feedrate. To approach the spigot contour, the tool is
approached along a semicircle path, taking into account the programmed blank spigot.
The milling direction can be determined either as up-cut milling or down-cut milling with
reference to the spindle direction.
If the spigot is bypassed once, the contour is left along a semi-circle in the plane, and the
tool is fed to the next machining depth.
The contour is then reapproached along a semicircle and the spigot is circumnavigated
once. This process is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.
Then, the retraction plane (_RTP) is approached at rapid traverse rate.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-81
Milling cycles
3.14 Circular spigot milling - CYCLE77

• Depth infeed:
– Feeding to the safety clearance
– Insertion to machining depth
The first machining depth is calculated from:
– the total depth,
– the finishing allowance and
– the maximum possible depth infeed.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions when smoothing (_VARI = 2):
Depending on the programmed parameters _FAL and _FALD, smoothing is carried out on
the peripheral contour, on the base, or both. The approach strategy corresponds to the
motions in the plane as with roughing.

Explanation of the parameters

PRAD (diameter of spigot)
Enter the diameter without sign.
_PA, _PO (spigot center point)
Use the parameters _PA and _PO to define the reference point of the spigot.
Circular spigots are always measured from the center.
_CDIR (milling direction)
Use this parameter to specify the machining direction for the spigot.
With the parameter _CDIR, the milling direction can be programmed directly as "2 for G2"
and "3 for G3" or alternatively as "down-cut" or "up-cut". Down-cut and up-cut milling are
determined internally in the cycle via the direction of rotation of the spindle activated prior to
calling the cycle.

Down-cut Up-cut
M3 → G3 M3 → G2
M4 → G2 M4 → G3

_VARI (machining type)

Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type.
Possible settings:
• 1 = roughing
• 2 = finishing

Cycles
3-82 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.14 Circular spigot milling - CYCLE77

_AP1 (diameter of blank spigot)

Use this parameter to define the blank dimension of the spigot (without sign). The internally
calculated radius of the approach semicircle depends on this dimension.

Note
For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, _DP, and _DPR , see Drilling,
centering – CYCLE81.
For an explanation of the parameters _MID, _FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, and _FFD, see Milling
rectangular pockets - POCKET3.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)
Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3 (Page 3-43)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-83
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

3.15 3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

3.15.1 General information

Note
Pocket milling with islands is an option that requires SW6 in both the NCK and HMI
Advanced.

Function
Cycles CYCLE73, CYCLE74 and CYCLE75 enable you to machine pockets with islands.
The contours of the pocket and islands are defined in DIN code in the same program as the
pocket machining operation or as a subroutine.
Cycles CYCLE74 and CYCLE75 transfer the pocket edge contour or island contours to
CYCLE73, which is the actual pocket milling cycle.
CYCLE73 uses a geometry processor to generate and execute one or more machining
programs. To ensure correct program processing, it is important to program cycle calls in the
proper sequence.
• CYCLE74( ) ;transfer of edge contour
• CYCLE75( ) ;transfer of island contour 1
• CYCLE75( ) ;transfer of island contour 2
• ...
• CYCLE73( ) ;machining of pocket
Requirement
To use the pocket milling cycle with islands, you need specific machine data settings.
References:
For current information, see:
• "siemensd.txt" file in the supplied software (standard cycles)

Cycles
3-84 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

3.15.2 Transfer pocket edge contour - CYCLE74

Function
Cycle CYCLE74 transfers the pocket edge contour to pocket milling cycle CYCLE73. This is
achieved by creating a temporary internal file in the standard cycles directory and storing the
transferred parameter values in it.
If a file of this type already exists, it is deleted and set up again.
For this reason, a program sequence for milling pockets with islands must always begin with
a call for CYCLE74.

Programming
CYCLE74 (_KNAME, _LSANF, _LSEND)

Example
See CYCLE75.

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

_KNAME string Name of contour subroutine of pocket edge contour
_LSANF string Block number/label identifying start of contour definition
_LSEND string Block number/label identifying end of contour definition

Explanation of the parameters

The edge contour can be programmed either in a separate program or in the main program
that calls the routine. Transfer to the cycle takes place via the _KNAME parameter, the name
of the program, and _LSANF, LSEND, identification of the program section from...to by block
numbers or labels, whereby not all of these need to be programmed.
The following options are available for contour programming:
• Contour is in its own program, in this case, only _KNAME must be programmed; e.g.
CYCLE74 ("EDGE","","")
• Contour is in the calling program, in this case, only _LSANF and _LSEND must be
programmed; e.g. CYCLE74 ("","N10","N160")
• The edge contour is a section of a program, but not of the program calling the cycle, in
this case, all three parameters must be programmed. e.g.
CYCLE74("EDGE","LABEL_START","LABEL_END")
The program name can be described by its path name and program type.
Example:
_KNAME="/N_WKS_DIR/_N_EXAMPLE3_WPD/_N_EDGE_MPF"

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-85
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

3.15.3 Transfer island contour - CYCLE75

Function

Note
Pocket milling with islands is an option that requires SW6 in both the NCK and HMI
Advanced.

Cycle CYCLE75 transfers the island contours to pocket milling cycle CYCLE73. The cycle is
called once per island contour. It does not need to be called if no island contours are
programmed.
The transferred parameter values are written to the temporary file opened by CYCLE74.

Programming
CYCLE75 (_KNAME, _LSANF, _LSEND)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

_KNAME string Name of contour subroutine of island contour
_LSANF string Block number/label identifying start of contour definition
_LSEND string Block number/label identifying end of contour definition

Contour programming
Pocket edge and island contours must always be closed, i.e., the start and end points are
identical.
The starting point, i.e., the first point in every contour, must always be programmed with G0.
All other contour elements are programmed via G1 to G3.
When programming the contour, the last contour element must not contain a radius or
champfer.
The tool may not be located at a starting position of the programmed contour element before
CYCLE73 is invoked.
The necessary programs must always be stored in one directory only (workpiece or parts
program). It is permissible to use the global subroutine memory for pocket edge or island
contours.
Workpiece-related geometric dimensional data may be programmed in either metric or
imperial dimensions. Switching between these units of measurement within individual
contour programs causes errors in the machining program.

Cycles
3-86 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

When G90/G91 are programmed alternately in contour programs, care must be taken to
program the correct dimensional command at the start of the program in the sequence of
contour programs to be executed.
Only the geometries in the plane are taken into account when calculating the machining
program for the pocket.
If other axes or functions (T.., D.., S.. M.. etc.) are programmed in the contour sections, they
are skipped during contour preparation within the cycle.
All technical machine-specific program commands (e.g., tool call, speed, M command) must
be programmed before the cycle commences. Feedrates must be set as parameters in
CYCLE73.
The tool radius must be greater than zero.
It is not possible to repeat island contours by offsets implemented by suitable control
commands (e.g., zero offset, frames, etc.). Every island to be repeated always has to be
programmed again with the offsets calculated in the coordinates.

Example of contour programming for pocket milling

< <


$ $$



5





5

 5

 $ ; =
  
$OOUDGLLRQWKHFRUQHUV5

%_N_SAMPLE1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_MPF_DIR
; Example_1: Pocket with islands
;
$TC_DP1[5,1]=120 $TC_DP3[5,1]=111 $TC_DP6[5,1]=6 ;Tool offset cutter T5 D1
$TC_DP1[2,2]=120 $TC_DP3[2,2]=130 $TC_DP6[2,2]=5
N100 G17 G40 G90 ;Initial conditions G code
N110 T5 D1 ;Load milling tool
N120 M6
N130 S500 M3 F2000 M8
GOTOF _MACHINE
;
N510 _EDGE:G0 G64 X25 Y30 F2000 ;Define edge contour

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-87
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

N520 G1 X118 RND=5

N530 Y96 RND=5
N540 X40 RND=5
N545 X20 Y75 RND=5
N550 Y35
N560 _ENDEDGE:G3 X25 Y30 CR=5
;
N570 _ISLAND1:G0 X34 Y58 ;Define bottom island
N580 G1 X64
N590 _ENDISLAND1:G2 X34 Y58 CR=15
;
N600 _ISLAND2:G0 X79 Y73 ;Define top island
N610 G1 X99
N620 _ENDISLAND2:G3 X79 Y73 CR=10
;
_MACHINE:
;Programming of contours
SAMPLE_CONT:
CYCLE74 (“Example1“,“_EDGE“,“_ENDEDGE“) ;Transfer edge contour
CYCLE75 (“Example1“,“_ISLAND1“,“_ENDISLAND1“) ;Transfer island contour 1
CYCLE75 (“Example1“,“_ISLAND2“,“_ENDISLAND2“) ;Transfer island contour 2
ENDLABEL:
M30

Explanation of the parameters

The number and meaning of parameters are the same as for CYCLE74.

See also
Transfer pocket edge contour - CYCLE74 (Page 3-85)

Cycles
3-88 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

3.15.4 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73

3.15.4.1 General information

Function

Note
Pocket milling with islands is an option that requires SW6 in both the NCK and HMI
Advanced.

CYCLE73 is a machining cycle used for machining any contour axes with or without islands.
It supports complete machining of this type of pocket and offers the following machining
operations:
• Predrilling
• Solid machine pocket
• Machine residual material
• Finish edge
• Finish base
Pocket and island contours are freely programmed in DIN code supported, for example, by
the geometry processor.
The cycle is executed once for each operation according to the programmed machining type
(_VARI). In other words, in applications requiring roughing and finishing, or an additional
rough-cut residual material operation, CYCLE73 must be called a second time.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-89
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Solid machine pocket

When a pocket is solid machined, it is machined with the active tool down to the
programmed final machining allowances. The insertion strategy for milling can be selected.
The cutting operation is segmented in the pocket depth direction (tool axis) in accordance
with the specified values.
Machine residual material
The cycle allows material to be removed with a smaller milling tool. The traversing motions
defined by the residual material of the last milling operation and the current tool radius are
output in the generated program. The residual material technology can be programmed
repeatedly with a succession of decreasing tool radii.
There is no check to determine whether residual material remains in the pocket.
Edge/base finishing
Another function of the cycle is to finish the pocket base or circumnavigate the pocket and
individual islands in a finish operation.
Predrilling
Depending on the milling tool used, it may be necessary to drill before solid machining the
workpiece. The cycle automatically calculates the predrilling positions as a function of the
solid machining operation to be performed subsequently. The drilling cycle called modally
beforehand is executed at each of these positions. Predrilling can be executed in a number
of technological machining operations (e.g., 1. centering, 2. drilling).

Programming
CYCLE73 (_VARI, _BNAME, _PNAME, _TN, _RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _DPR,
_MID, _MIDA, _FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, _FFD, _CDIR, _PA, _PO, _RAD, _DP1,
_DN)

Cycles
3-90 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

_VARI integer Machining type: (enter without sign)
Values: ONES DIGIT (machining selection):
1: Roughing (solid machining) from solid material
2: Roughing of residual material
3: Finishing of edge
4: Finishing of base
5: Predrilling
TENS DIGIT (insertion strategy selection):
1: Perpendicular to G1
2: On helical path
3: Oscillation
HUNDREDS DIGIT (lift-off mode selection):
0: on retraction plane (_RTP)
1: by amount of safety clearance (_SDIS) over reference plane
(_RFP)
THOUSANDS DIGIT (starting point selection):
1: automatic
2: manual
_BNAME string Name for program of drill positions
_PNAME string Name for pocket milling machining program
_TN string Name of solid machining tool
_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety clearance (additive to reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Pocket depth (absolute)
_DPR real Pocket depth (incremental)
_MID real Maximum infeed depth for one infeed (enter without sign)
_MIDA real Maximum infeed width in the plane (enter without sign)
_FAL real Final machining allowance in the plane (enter without sign)
_FALD real Final machining allowance on base (enter without sign)
_FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
_CDIR integer Mill direction for machining the pocket: (enter without sign)
Values: 0: Down-cut milling (corresponds to direction of spindle
rotation)
1: Down-cut milling
2: with G2 (independent of spindle direction)
3: With G3
_PA real Start point in first axis (only with manual selection of start point)
_PO real Start point in second axis (only with manual selection of start point)
_RAD real Radius of center point path for insertion along helical path or
max. insertion angle for oscillating insertion
_DP1 real Insertion depth per 360° revolution on insertion along helical path
_DN integer Tool offset number of the solid machining tool (D number)
(SW 6.3 and higher)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-91
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

3.15.4.2 Examples

Example 1
The machining task consists of milling a pocket with 2 islands from solid material, followed
by finishing in the plane X,Y.

< <


$ $$



5





5

 5

 $ ; =
  
$OOUDGLLRQWKHFRUQHUV5

%_N_SAMPLE1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI1_WPD
;Example_1: Pocket with islands
;Solid machine and finish
$TC_DP1[5,1]=120 $TC_DP3[5,1]=111 $TC_DP6[5,1]=4 ;Tool offset cutter T5 D1
$TC_DP1[2,1]=120 $TC_DP3[2,1]=130 $TC_DP6[2,1]=5 ;Tool offset cutter T2 D1
N100 G17 G40 G90 ;Initial conditions G code
N110 T5 D1 ;Load milling tool
N120 M6
N130 M3 F2000 S500 M8
N140 GOTOF _MACHINE
;
N510 _EDGE:G0 G64 X25 Y30 ;Define edge contour
N520 G1 X118 RND=5
N530 Y96 RND=5
N540 X40 RND=5
N545 X20 Y75 RND=5
N550 Y35
N560 _ENDEDGE:G3 X25 Y30 CR=5
;
N570 _ISLAND1:G0 X34 Y58 ;Define bottom island
N580 G1 X64
N590 _ENDISLAND1:G2 X34 Y58 CR=15
;

Cycles
3-92 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

N600 _ISLAND2:G0 X79 Y73 ;Define top island

N610 G1 X99
N620 _ENDISLAND2:G3 X79 Y73 CR=10

;
;Programming of contours
_MACHINE:
GOTOF ENDLABEL
SAMPLE1_CONT:
CYCLE74(,"_EDGE","_ENDEDGE")
CYCLE75(,"_ISLAND1","_ENDISLAND1")
CYCLE75(,"_ISLAND2","_ENDISLAND2")
ENDLABEL:
;
; Programming of pocket milling
REPEAT EXAMPLE1_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1021,"EXAMPLE1_DRILL","EXAMPLE1_MILL1","5",10,0,1,-
17.5,0,0,2,0.5,0,9000,3000,0,0,0,4,3)
;
; Milling cutter for finishing
T2 D1 M6
S3000 M3
;
; Programming of pocket finishing
REPEAT EXAMPLE1_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1023,"EXAMPLE1_DRILL","EXAMPLE1_MILL3","5",10,0,1,-
17.5,0,0,2,0,0,9000,3000,0,0,0,4,2)
M30

Machining result:

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-93
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Example 2
Machining task:
Before the pocket is milled, the workpiece must be predrilled to ensure optimum insertion of
the milling tool.
• Predrilling
• Solid machine pocket with islands, cutter radius 12 mm
• Solid machine residual material, cutter radius 6 mm
• Finish pocket, cutter radius 5 mm
Machining outline:

<

3RFNHWGHSWKPP

,16$ ,16$

,16$






ෘ 

,16$ 






5


   ;
 
 

Machining program:

%_N_SAMPLE2_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
; Example_2: Pocket with islands
; Predrilling, solid machining, solid machining of residual material, finishing
;
;Drill 20 mm, boring
$TC_DP1[2,1]=220 $TC_DP3[2,1]=111 $TC_DP6[2,1]=10 ;Drill
;Milling tool 24 mm, solid machining
$TC_DP1[3,1]=120 $TC_DP3[3,1]=150 $TC_DP6[3,1]=12 ;Milling tool, roughing
;Milling tool 10 mm, finishing
$TC_DP1[5,1]=120 $TC_DP3[5,1]=150 $TC_DP6[5,1]=5 ;Milling cutter for finishing
;Milling tool 12 mm, residual material
$TC_DP1[6,1]=120 $TC_DP3[6,1]=150 $TC_DP6[6,1]=6 ;Milling tool, residual material
;machining
;
TRANS X10 Y10
G0 G17 G500 G40 G90
;

Cycles
3-94 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

;Define contours
GOTOF ENDLABEL
ACCEPTANCE4_CONT:
CYCLE74("EDGEA01", , )
CYCLE75("ISL11A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL1A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL2A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL3A01",,)
ENDLABEL:
;
; Programming of predrilling
T2 M6
D1 M3 F2222 S3000
MCALL CYCLE81 (10,0,1,-12,)
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_MACH ACCEPTANCE4_MACH_END
MCALL
;
; Programming of solid machining
T3 M6
D1 M3 F3000 S4000
GOTOF ACCEPTANCE4_MACH_END
ACCEPTANCE4_MACH:
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1015,"ACCEPTANCE4_DRILL","ACCEPTANCE4_MILL1","3",10,0,1,-
12,0,0,2,0.5,0,2000,400,0,,,,)
ACCEPTANCE4_MACH_END:
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1011,"ACCEPTANCE4_DRILL","ACCEPTANCE4_MILL1","3",10,0,1,-
12,0,0,2,0.5,0,2000,400,0,,,,)
;
; Programming of solid machining of residual
material
T6 M6
D1 M3 S4000
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1012,"","ACCEPTANCE4_3_MILL2","3",10,0,1,-12,0,0,2,0.5,0,1500,800,0,,,,)
;
; Programming of edge finishing
T5 M6
D1 M3 S500
G0 Z120
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1013,"ACCEPTANCE4_DRILL","ACCEPTANCE4_MILL3","6",10,0,1,-
12,0,0,2,0,0,3000,700,0,,,,)
M30

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-95
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Edge contour programming example 2:

%_N_EDGEA01_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
;Ste 17.05.99
;Edge contour programming example 2

N5 G0 G90 X260 Y0
N7 G3 X260 Y120 CR=60
N8 G1 X170 RND=15
N9 G2 X70 Y120 CR=50
N10 G1 X0 RND=15
N11 Y0 RND=15
N35 X70 RND=15
N40 G2 X170 Y0 CR=50
N45 G1 X260 Y0
N50 M30

Island contours programming example 2:

%_N_ISL1A01_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
;Ste 18.06.99
;Island contour sample program 2

N5 G90 G0 X30 Y15

N10 G91 G3 X0 Y30 CR=15
N12 X0 Y-30 CR=15
N15 M30

%_N_ISL11A01_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
;Ste 18.06.99
;Island contour sample program 2

N5 G90 G0 X30 Y70

N10 G91 G3 X0 Y30 CR=15
N12 X0 Y-30 CR=15
N15 M30

%_N_ISL2A01_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
;Ste 18.06.99
;Island contour sample program 2

N5 G90 G0 X200 Y40

N10 G3 X220 Y40 CR=10
N15 G1 Y85
N20 G3 X200 Y85 CR=10
N25 G1 Y40
N30 M30

Cycles
3-96 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

%_N_ISL3A01_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
;Ste 18.06.99
;Island contour sample program 2

N5 G0 G90 X265 Y50

N10 G1 G91 X20
N15 Y25
N20 G3 X-20 I-10
N25 G1 Y-25
N30 M30

Machining result:
→ See explanations of technology using example 2

Example 3
Machining task:
Show the program sequence of a machining task, illustrated by two different pockets with
islands. The machining process is tool-oriented, i.e., each time a new tool becomes
available, all machining tasks requiring this particular tool are completely performed on both
pockets before the next tool is used.
• Predrilling
• Solid machine pocket with islands
• Solid machine residual material

%_N_SAMPLE3_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI3_WPD
; Sample3
; 07.04.2000

; Tool offset data

$TC_DP1[2,1]=220 $TC_DP3[2,1]=330 $TC_DP6[2,1]=10
$TC_DP1[3,1]=120 $TC_DP3[3,1]=210 $TC_DP6[3,1]=12
$TC_DP1[6,1]=120 $TC_DP3[6,1]=199 $TC_DP6[6,1]=6

;Workpiece zero
; G54
$P_UIFR[1,X,TR]=620
$P_UIFR[1,Y,TR]=50
$P_UIFR[1,Z,TR]=-320
; G55
$P_UIFR[2,X,TR]=550
$P_UIFR[2,Y,TR]=200
$P_UIFR[2,Z,TR]=-320
;
N10 G0 G17 G54 G40 G90
N20 T2

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-97
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

M6
D1 M3 F2000 S500
N30 G0 Z20
;Machining contours pocket 1
GOTOF ENDLABEL
POCKET1_CONT:
CYCLE74("EDGE"," "," ")
CYCLE75("ISLAND1"," "," ")
CYCLE75("ISLAND2"," "," ")
ENDLABEL:
;Machining contours pocket 2
GOTOF ENDLABEL
SAMPLE2_CONT:
CYCLE74("EDGEA01", , )
CYCLE75("ISL11A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL1A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL2A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL3A01",,)
ENDLABEL:
;Drill
T2 M6
D1 M3 F6000 S4000
MCALL CYCLE81 (10,0,1,-8,)
REPEAT POCKET1_MACH POCKET1_MACH_END
MCALL

G55
MCALL CYCLE81 (10,0,1,-8,)
REPEAT SAMPLE2_MACH SAMPLE2_MACH_END
MCALL
;Solid machining pocket 1
T3 M6
G54 D1 M3 S3300
GOTOF POCKET1_MACH_END
POCKET1_MACH:
REPEAT POCKET1_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1015,"POCKET1_DRILL","POCKET1_MILL1","3",10,0,1,
-8,0,0,2,0,0,2000,400,0,0,0,1,4)
POCKET1_MACH_END:
REPEAT POCKET1_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1011,"POCKET1_DRILL","POCKET1_MILL1","3",10,0,1,
-8,0,0,2,0,0,2000,400,0,0,0,1,4)

;Solid machining pocket 2

G55
GOTOF SAMPLE2_MACH_END

SAMPLE2_MACH:
REPEAT SAMPLE2_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1015,"SAMPLE2_DRILL","SAMPLE2_MILL1","3",10,0,1,
-8,0,0,2,0,0,2000,400,0,0,0,1,4)
SAMPLE2_MACH_END:
REPEAT SAMPLE2_CONT ENDLABEL

Cycles
3-98 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

CYCLE73(1011,"SAMPLE2_DRILL","SAMPLE2_MILL1","3",10,0,1,
-8,0,0,2,0,0,2000,400,0,0,0,1,4)

;Solid machining residual material pocket 1 and pocket 2

T6 M6
D1 G54 M3 S222
REPEAT POCKET1_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1012,"","POCKET1_3_MILL2","3",10,0,1,-8,0,,2,,,2500,800,0,,,,)

G55
REPEAT SAMPLE2_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1012,"","SAMPLE2_3_MILL2","3",10,0,1,-8,0,,2,,,2500,800,0,,,,)
G0 Z100
M30

;Edge and island contours

;Pocket 2 corresponds to programming example 2
Pocket 1:
%_N_Edge_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI3_WPD
;29.03.99
N1 G0 X0 Y0 G90
N3 G1 X200 Y0
N5 X200 Y100
N10 X0 Y100
N20 X0 Y0
M30

%_N_ISLAND1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI3_WPD
;29.03.99
N100 G0 X130 Y30 Z50 G90
N110 G1 X150 Y30
N120 X150 Y60
N130 X130 Y60
N200 X130 Y30
M30

%_N_ISLAND2_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI3_WPD
;29.03.99
N12 G0 X60 Y20
N13 G1 X90 Y20
N14 X90 Y50
N30 X60 Y50
N40 X60 Y20
M30

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-99
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Machining result:

3.15.4.3 Description of technology in Example 2

Predrilling sequence

In the first machining section of the predrilling operation, a REPEAT command must be used
after a modal call of the drilling cycle to call a sequence of machining steps with the contents

Cycles
3-100 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

of CYCLE73 and the contour repetition. The drilling cycle must be deselected modally before
the next tool change. Other drilling technologies can be programmed subsequently.
The next program section contains CYCLE73, which contains all necessary parameters and
programs for solid machining and drilling.
Parameter _VARI is the only one to define all solid machining parameters and, therefore,
must always be programmed.
The cycle now generates the solid machining and drilling position programs for the pocket. It
then calls the drilling position program and executes it.
If the operation involves several different pockets, it will be necessary to call the associated
contours again in this section. This block can be omitted if there is only one pocket.
This entire machining section must be marked by a skip command to the following "Solid
machine pocket" section.

Note
The programming can be reviewed in Examples 2 and 3.

Sequence for roughing, solid machining (_VARI=XXX1)

All parameters must be written to the CYCLE73 command again.

The program performs the following machining steps:
• Approach a manually calculated or automatically generated start point located on the
return plane level. G0 is then used to traverse the axis to a reference plane shifted by the
amount of the safety clearance.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-101
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

• Infeed to the current machining depth according to the selected insertion strategy (_VARI)
with feed value _FFD.
• Mill pocket with islands down to final machining allowance with feedrate _FFP1. The
machining direction corresponds to the setting in _CDIR.
• Lift off in accordance with selected retraction mode and return to start point for next plane
infeed.
• When the pocket has been machined, the tool is retracted either to the retraction plane or
by the safety clearance via the reference plane, depending on the selected lift-off mode.
The tool position in the plane is above the pocket surface, as determined by the
generated program.

Sequence for finishing (_VARI = XXX3)

• The pocket and island contours are each circumnavigated once during the edge finishing
operation. Vertical insertion with G1 (_VARI) must be programmed as the insertion
strategy. Approach and retraction at the start and edge points of the finishing operation
respectively are executed along a tangential circle segment.
• To finish the base, the tool is inserted to pocket depth + final machining allowance +
safety clearance with G0. From this position, the tool is fed in vertically at the feedrate for
depth infeed. The base surface of the pocket is machined once.
• Lift-off and retraction as for solid machining.
• Parameters _FAL, _FALD and _VARI=XXX4 must be assigned for simultaneous finishing
in the plane and on the base.

Cycles
3-102 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Explanation of the parameters

_VARI (machining type)
You can define the type of machining with parameter _VARI. Possible settings are:
• Ones digit:: (selection of machining)
– 1 = Roughing (solid machining) from solid material
– 2 = Roughing residual material
– 3 = Finishing edge
– 4 = Finishing base
– 5 = Predrilling
When "Roughing from solid material" is specified, the machining program solid-machines
the pocket completely down to the final machining allowance.
If it is not possible to machine areas of the edge surfaces with the selected cutter
diameter, then setting "2" can be selected in order to machine them with a smaller milling
tool afterwards. To do this, cycle CYCLE73 must be called again.
• Tens digit: (selection of insertion strategy)
– 1 = Vertically with G1
– 2 = Along a helical path
– 3 = Oscillating
Insert vertically (_VARI = XX1X)
means that the current infeed depth calculated internally is executed in one block.
Inset along helical path (_VARI = XX2X)
means that the cutter center traverses along the helical path determined by the radius
_RAD and the depth per revolution _DP1. The feedrate is also programmed under _FFD.
The direction of rotation of this helical path corresponds to the direction of rotation with
which the pocket will be machined.
The insertion depth programmed under _DP1 is taken into account as the maximum
depth and is always calculated as an integer number of revolutions of the helical path.
If the current depth required for an infeed (this can be several revolutions on the helical
path) is reached, a full circle is still executed to eliminate the inclined path of insertion.
Pocket solid machining then starts in this plane and continues until it reaches the final
machining allowance.
Insert with oscillation (_VARI = XX3X)
means that the mill center point oscillates along an oblique linear path until it has reached
the next current depth. The maximum insertion angle is programmed under _RAD, the
position of the oscillation path is calculated within the cycle. If the current depth is
reached, the travel is executed once more without depth infeed in order to eliminate the
inclined insertion path. The feedrate is programmed under _FFD.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-103
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

• Hundreds place: (selection of lift-off mode)

– 0 = To retraction plane (_RTP)
– 1 = By amount of safety clearance (_SDIS) over reference plane (_RFP)
• Thousands place: (selection of starting point)
– 1 = Automatic starting point
– 2 = Manual starting point
When the starting point is selected automatically, the cycle internally calculates the
starting point for machining itself.
If the pocket has to be split as a result of the island position and the cutter diameter used,
several start points are calculated automatically.

<

6WDUWSRLQW

6WDUWSRLQW
5HVLGXDOPDWHULDO

Notice
Manually specified start positions must not be too close to the island surface. Manually
specified start positions are not internally monitored.
With manual start point selection, parameters _PA and _PO must also be programmed.
However, these can only define one start point.
If the pocket has to be split, the required start points are calculated automatically.

_BNAME (name for drilling position program)

_PNAME (name for pocket milling program)
The pocket milling cycle generates programs with traversing blocks required to predrill or mill
the workpiece. These programs are stored in the same directory as the calling program in
the parts program memory, i.e., in the "Parts programs" directory (MPF.DIR), if the cycle is
called from there, or in the relevant workpiece directory. The programs are always main
programs (type MPF).
The names of these programs are defined by parameters _BNAME and _PNAME.
A drilling program name is only required when _VARI=XXX5.

Cycles
3-104 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Example:
• No drilling program name:
CYCLE73(1011,““,ACCEPTANCE4_MILL,...)
_TN (name of solid machining tool), _DN (D-number of solid machining tool)
This parameter must be assigned to the solid machining tool. Depending on whether the tool
management function is active or not, the parameter must be set to a tool name or tool
number.
Example:
• With tool management - MILLINGCUTTER3 D8
CYCLE73(1015,"PART1_DRILL","PART1_MILL","MILLINGCUTTER3",...,8)
• Without tool management - T3 D8
CYCLE73(1015,"PART1_DRILL","PART1_MILL","3",...,8)
The _TN parameter has a maximum length of 16 characters. If a D-number is not
programmed, D1 is automatically used. For a flat D-number, T does not have to be
programmed.
Example:
• Flat D number - D39
CYCLE73(1015,"PART1_DRILL","PART1_MILL","",...,39)
When the residual material machining operation is used more than once, the tool from the
last residual material removal process must be used.
_RFP and _RTP (reference plane and retraction plane)
Normally, reference plane (RFP) and return plane (RTP) have different values. The cycle
assumes that the retraction plane precedes the reference plane. This means that the
distance from the retraction plane to the final drilling depth is larger than the distance from
the reference plane to the final drilling depth.
_SDIS (safety clearance)
The safety clearance (SDIS) acts with reference to the reference plane. This is brought
forward by the safety clearance.
The direction, in which the safety clearance is active, is automatically determined by the
cycle.
_DP (absolute pocket depth) and _DPR (incremental pocket depth)
The pocket depth can be specified as either an absolute value (_DP) or an incremental value
(_DPR) in relation to the reference plane. If the incremental option is selected, the cycle
automatically calculates the depth on the basis of the reference and retraction plane
positions.
_MID (maximum infeed depth)
Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed depth. The depth infeed is performed by
the cycle in equally sized infeed steps.
The cycle calculates this infeed automatically on the basis of _MID and the total depth.
The minimum possible number of infeed steps is used as the basis. _MID=0 means that one
cut is made up to the pocket depth.
_MIDA (max. infeed width in the plane)
Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed width when solid machining in a plane.
This value is never exceeded.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-105
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

If this parameter is not programmed, or if its value is 0, the cycle uses 80% of the cutter
radius as the maximum infeed width.
If an infeed width of more than 80% of the cutter diameter is programmed, the cycle is
aborted after output of alarm 61982 "Infeed width in plane too large".
_FAL (final machining allowance in the plane)
The finishing allowance only affects the machining of the pocket in the plane on the edge.
If the final machining allowance ≥ tool diameter, the pocket will not necessarily be machined
completely.
_FALD (finishing allowance at the base)
A separate final machining allowance on the base is taken into account in roughing
operations.
_FFD and _FFP1 (feedrate for depth infeed and surface machining)
The feedrate _FFD is effective when inserting into the material.
The feedrate FFP1 is active for all movements in the plane which are traversed at feedrate
when roughing.
_CDIR (milling direction)

<

*
*
*

*

Use this parameter to specify the machining direction for the pocket.
Using the parameter _CDIR, the milling direction can be programmed as follows:
• can be programmed directly with "2 for G2" and "3 for G3" or,
• alternatively, "Synchronous milling" or "Conventional milling".
Synchronized operation or reverse rotation are determined internally in the cycle via the
direction of rotation of the spindle activated prior to calling the cycle.

Down-cut Up-cut
M3 → G3 M3 → G2
M4 → G2 M4 → G3

Cycles
3-106 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

_PA, _PO (starting point of first and second axes)

When the start point is selected manually, the start point must be programmed in these
parameters such that it can be approached without risk of collision. Please note that only one
start point can be programmed (see description of parameter _VARI).
_RAD (center-point path or insertion angle)
Parameter _RAD defines the radius of the helical path (with reference to tool center-point
path) or the maximum insertion angle for oscillation.
_DP1 (insertion depth for helical path)
Use the parameter _DP1 to define the infeed depth when inserting to the helical path.

Name of pocket machining (NAME)

Pockets are generally machined in several technological machining steps. However, the
contours defining the pocket geometries are defined only once.
To ensure that contours can be automatically assigned to the appropriate machining step in
the program, the contour definition is marked with labels and this program section is later
repeated with the REPEAT instruction.
When programs are written using the cycles support function, a name for the pocket
machining program is entered in the relevant screen forms. The name length is restricted to
8 characters.
In programming example 2, this is, for example, "ACCEPTANCE4".
The T number contains the solid-machining milling tool for all machining technologies. When
residual material is machined more than once, the tool used previously must always be
entered in the T number.

Explanation of the cycle structure

Cycle CYCLE73 is used to solve very complex problems associated with solid machining of
pockets with islands, which require a high level of computing capacity in the control. For best
timing, the calculation is carried out in the HMI.
The calculation is started from the cycle. Its result contains programs with traversing blocks
for drilling or milling operations, which are stored in the file system of the control. These are
then called by the cycle and executed.
This structure means that it is only necessary to perform the calculation the first time a
program is executed with the CYCLE73 call. From the second program run onwards, the
generated traversing program is available for immediate call by the cycle.
Recalculation is performed when:
• A finished contour has been modified;
• A transfer parameter of the cycle has changed;
• A tool with different tool offset data has been activated prior to the cycle call;
• Different technologies are involved, such as solid machining and residual material, whose
machining programs are generated in different ways.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-107
Milling cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Program storage in the file system

If the contours for CYCLE73 are programmed outside the main program that makes the call,
the following applies for the search in the file system of the control:
• If the calling program is stored in a workpiece directory, then the programs containing the
edge or island contours must be stored in the same workpiece directory.
• If the invoked program is located in the "Parts program" directory (MPF.DIR), the
programs are also searched for there.
The programs generated by the cycle are also stored in the same directory as the program
containing the cycle call, i.e., in the same workpiece directory or in MPF.DIR or SPF.DIR.

Note
Simulation
In the pocket milling simulation, the generated programs are saved to the NCU file system.
Therefore, only the "NC Active Data" setting is practical, since tool offset data are included in
the program calculation.

Note
For HMI-Advanced OEM users
The "Pocket milling with islands" package occupies Task 27 in the HMI for communication
between the cycle and the HMI.
For this purpose, a file is created in the \ADD_On directory when the package is installed:
• REGIE.INI
As a result, this task is not available to other OEM applications.

Cycles
3-108 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16 3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16.1 General information

Function
The cycle is used to swivel on any type of surface so that it can be machined and/or
measured. By calling the appropriate NC functions, the cycle converts the active workpiece
zeroes and tool offsets to refer to the inclined surface, taking account of the kinematic chain
on the machine, and positions the rotary axes (optional).
Swiveling can be implemented either axially, as a projection angle or as a solid angle.
Before the rotary axes are positioned, the linear axes can be retracted if desired.
Swiveling also includes the "Setting tool" function (see Section 3.16.4).

Swiveling is not an option and is available for NC SW 6.3 (CCU SW 6.3).

The functions below are available in the basic version
• 3/2 axes inclined machining and
• Toolholder with orientation capability
.
References:
Description of Functions 840D/840Di/810D:
• /W1/ "Tool Offset"
• /R2/ "Rotary Axes"
• /K2/ "System Frames"

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-109
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Swiveling supports the following machine kinematics

1. Swivel-mounted toolholder (swivel head) → Type T
2. Swivel-mounted workpiece holder (swivel table) → Type P
3. Mixed kinematics from 1 and 2 → Type M

Requirements before calling the swivel cycle

A tool (tool cutting edge D>0) and the zero offset (ZO), with which the workpiece was
scratched or measured, must be programmed before the swivel cycle is first called in the
main program. This zero offset is converted to the appropriate machining plane in the swivel
cycle. The ZO value remains unchanged. Translational and rotational components are saved
in the system frames (swivel frames) below (see HMI → Parameters, Active ZO):
• Tool reference (TOOLFRAME)
• Toolholder (PARTFRAME)
• Workpiece reference (WPFRAME)
The current machining plane (G17, G18, G19) is taken into account by the swivel cycle.
Swiveling on a machining or auxiliary surface always involves three steps:
• Offset of reference point prior to rotation (corresponds to TRANS or ATRANS)
• Rotation (corresponds to AROT or AROTS)
• Offset of zero point after rotation (corresponds to ATRANS)
The offsets or rotations are not machine-specific, but refer to the X, Y, Z coordinate system
of the workpiece.
No programmable frames are used in the swivel cycle. The frames programmed by the user
are taken into account in additive swiveling.
Swiveling to a new swivel plane clears the programmable frames (TRANS).
After a program reset or if there is a power failure, the last swivel plane remains active, with
the option to set it using machine data. Any type of machining operation can be performed
on the swivel plane, e.g., through calling standard or measuring cycles.

Cycles
3-110 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16.2 Programming via screen form

3.16.2.1 General information

Calling swiveling – CYCLE800

Entry to programs/milling area
Soft key
!! 6ZLYHO
⇒
is displayed if swivel data record is set up (MD 18088: MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER >0).

Input screen form CYCLE800 on standard interface

5HIHUHQFHSRLQW
EHIRUHURWDWLRQ

5RWDWLRQ

=HURSRLQWDIWHU
URWDWLRQ

3.16.2.2 Parameters of input screen form

Name of swivel data record _TC

The existing swivel data records (see CYCLE800 startup) can be selected (toggled).
Each swivel data record has a name. If there is only one swivel data record, a name does
not have to be declared.
"0" → Swivel data record deselection.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-111
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Retraction _FR (prior to swiveling rotary axes)

• Do not retract
• Retract axis Z1)
• Retract axis Z, XY1)
• Maximum retraction in tool direction (with Cycles SW 6.5 and higher)1) 2))
• Incremental retraction in tool direction (with Cycles SW 6.5 and higher)1) 2))
The incremental value for the traversing path in the tool direction must be entered in the
edit box.
The retraction variants and positions can be activated and set up in the CYCLE800 startup
menu.
Note the machine manufacturer’s instructions.

Note
1) The retraction positions are traversed absolutely. If another sequence or incremental
positioning is desired, this can be modified during installation and set up in the TOOLCARR
user cycle.
2) See Note 2) when programming using parameters, Section 3.1.6.3.

When programming with standard cycles, high settings for the retraction plane and large
swivel angles (through 90 degrees with multiface machining), it is possible that the traversing
area of the machine may be too small (software end position error), since the order of
approach is always the machining plane (for G17 X, Y) first, followed by the infeed axis (Z).
The retraction plane can be reduced to optimize this behavior.

Swivel, direction _DIR

• Swivel yes
Rotary axes are positioned or the operator can turn the manual rotary axes.
• Swivel no (calculation only)
If rotary axes are not to be traversed after activating the swivel cycle, the "Swivel no"
selection applies.
Application: Auxiliary swivel levels according to workpiece drawing
• Direction minus/plus
Direction reference of traversing direction of rotary axis 1 or 2 of the active swivel data
record (machine kinematics). The NC calculates two possible solutions of the rotation /
offset programmed in CYCLE800 using the angle traversing range of the rotary axes of
the machine kinematics. Usually, only one of these solutions is technologically suitable.
The solutions differ by 180 degrees in each case. Selecting the "minus" or "plus" direction
determines which of the two possible solutions is to be applied.

Cycles
3-112 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

– "Minus" → Lower rotary axis value

– "Plus" → Higher rotary axis value
Which of the rotary axes (1 or 2) the two possible solutions are to refer to is specified in
the CYCLE800 startup menu.
Note the machine manufacturer’s instructions.
Example:
• Machine kinematics with swivel head and swivel table, swivel head with rotary axis 1 (B)
rotates around machine axis Y.
• Angle traversing range of rotary axis B from -90 to +90 degrees.
• Swivel table with rotary axis 2 (C) rotates around machine axis Z.
• Angle traversing range of rotary axis C from 0 to 360 degrees (modulo 360).
• Machine manufacturers specify the direction reference to rotary axis 1 (B) in the Swivel
start-up.
• A rotation around X (WCS) of 10 degrees is programmed in the swivel cycle.
The figures below show the machine in the basic kinematics setting (B=0 C=0).

"Minus" direction "Plus" direction

Rotary axis B moves to -10 degrees in the Rotary axis B moves to +10 degrees in the
negative direction (blue arrow). positive direction (red arrow).
Rotary axis C moves to 90 degrees (rotation Rotary axis C moves to 270 degrees
around X !)
The "Minus" or "Plus" direction settings enable a workpiece to be machined with swiveled
planes. The two solutions calculated by the NC differ by 180 degrees (see rotary axis C).

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-113
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Swivel plane _ST

• New
Previous swivel frames and programmed frames are deleted and a new swivel frame is
formed according to the values specified in the input screen.
Every main program must begin with a swivel cycle with the new swivel plane, in order to
ensure that a swivel frame from another program is not active.
• Additive
The swivel frame is added to the swivel frame from the last swivel cycle.
If several swivel cycles are programmed in a program and programmable frames are also
active between them (e.g., AROT ATRANS), these are taken into account in the swivel
frame.
If the currently active ZO contains rotations, e.g., due to previous workpiece gauging, they
will be taken into account in the swivel cycle.
Help screens
The following help displays relate to machining plane G17 (tool axis Z).

Reference points before rotation X0, Y0, Z0

Swivel mode _MODE

This parameter defines the swivel mode for the axis.
• Axial
• Projection angle1)2)
• Solid angle1)
Swivel mode always refers to the coordinate system of the workpiece and does not,
therefore, depend on the machine.

Note
For 1: Swiveling as projection or solid angle
Only available if selected by the machine manufacturer in the CYCLE800 startup menu.

Cycles
3-114 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Axial
• With the axial swiveling option, the tool is rotated about
the individual axes of the coordinate system in
succession, with each rotation starting from the
previous rotation. The axis sequence can be freely
selected.

Projection angle
• When swiveling using the projection angle, the angle
value of the swiveled surface is projected onto the first
two axes of the right-angle coordinate system. The
user can select the axis rotation sequence.2)
The third rotation starts from the previous rotation.
The active plane and the tool orientation must be taken
into consideration when the projection angle is applied:
– For G17 projection angle XY, 3rd rotation around Z
– For G18 projection angle ZX, 3rd rotation around Y
– For G19 projection angle YZ, 3rd rotation around X

Note
For 2): Swiveling as projection angle
• When projection angles around XY and YX are programmed, the new X-axis of the
swiveled coordinate system lies in the old ZX plane.
• When projection angles around XZ and ZX are programmed, the new Z-axis of the
swiveled coordinate system lies in the old Y-Z plane.
• When projection angles around YZ and ZY are programmed, the new Y-axis of the
swiveled coordinate system lies in the old X-Y plane.

Solid angle
• With the solid angle swiveling option, the tool is first
rotated about the Z axis and then about the Y axis. The
second rotation starts from the first.

The positive direction of each rotation for the different swivel options is shown in the help
displays.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-115
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Rotation about A, B, C
• Rotations (axial, projection angle)

• Rotation (solid angle)

Zero point after rotation X1, Y1, Z1

Correct tool
The Correct display field can be deactivated using the CYCLE800 startup menu.
• Yes:
When swiveling onto a machining plane, the linear axes can be corrected to prevent the
risk of collision.
Requirements:
1. TRAORI option is required.
2. The machine manufacturer has adapted the TOOLCARR.SPF user cycle
appropriately.
• No:
Linear axes are not corrected during swiveling.

Cycles
3-116 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16.2.3 Operator and programmer instructions

• In an NC program with swiveled machining planes (CYCLE800), rotary axes are
exclusively positioned using CYCLE800 (TOOLCARR.SPF). The only exception is when
changing to a 5-axis transformation.
• Note on calling the 5-axis transformation (TRAORI)
If a program activating the 5-axis transformation (TRAORI) is to be executed on the
swiveled machining plane, the system frames for the swivel head/swivel table must be
deactivated before TRAORI is called (see example). The workpiece reference
(WPFRAME) is retained.
Example (machine with swivel table)

N1 G54
N2 T="MILL_10mm"
N3 M6
N4 CYCLE800(1,"",0,57,0,40,0,-45,0,0,0,0,0,-1) ;Swivel cycle
N5 CYCLE71(50,24,2,0,0,0,80,60,0,4,10,5,0,2000,31,5) ;Face milling
N6 TCARR=0 ;Swivel data record
;deselection
N7 PAROTOF
N8 TOROTOF ;(only with
;machine kinematic types
;"T" and "M")
N9 TRAORI
N10 G54 ;Recalculation of
;zero offset
N11 EXTCALL "ROLL" ;5-axis machining program
;with direction vectors
;(A3, B3, C3)
N12 M2
.
.
.

If the 5-axis transformation with the CYCLE832 "high speed settings" cycle has been
activated, blocks N6 to N10 are not required.
• If the rotary axes of machine kinematics are defined as manual axes (CYCLE800 startup
menu), the swivel angle to be set is displayed in cancel alarm 62180/62181.
After rotation to the swivel angle, the NC program is continued with NC Start.
• It is possible to traverse the axes in the active swivel plane in JOG mode, if the WCS key
is active on the machine control panel. This ensures that the geometry axes are traversed
and not the machine axes.
• The swivel data record can be deselected and the swivel frame
(WPFRAME, PARTFRAME, TOOLFRAME) can be deleted by programming
CYCLE800().
• In CYCLE800, parameters can also be transferred as input values (e.g., result variable of
measuring cycles _OVR[19]).
• If rotary axis values are entered in the active ZO (basic rotation of the workpiece), they
will be taken into account when swiveling.
During swiveling to the basic machine setter setting of the machine kinematics
(...,0,0,0,...) [rotation=0], CYCLE800 arranges the WCS accordingly. This results in
rotations in the $P_WPFRAME swivel frame (workpiece reference).

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-117
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16.2.4 Examples of input screen form

Example 1 Making the basic swivel plane setting

%_N_SWIVEL_0_SPF
;$PATH=/_N_WCS_DIR/_N_HAA_SWIVEL_WPD
G54
CYCLE800(1,"",0,57,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,-1)
M2

Example 2 Face milling and milling a circular pocket on a machining plane swiveled through 15
degrees

6FUDWFKLQJSRLQW* 

6ZLYHOHGJH GHJU

 


=

<
;

%_N_SWIVEL_CIRCULARPOCKET_SPF
;$PATH=/_N_WCS_DIR/_N_HAA_SWIVEL_WPD
N12 T="MILL_26mm"
N14 M6
N16 G57
N18 CYCLE800(1,"",0,57,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,1)
N20 M3 S5000
N22 CYCLE71(50,2,2,0,0,0,80,60,0,4,15,5,0,2000,31,5) ;Face milling
N24 CYCLE800(1,"",0,57,0,25,0,-15,0,0,0,0,0,-1)

Cycles
3-118 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

N26 CYCLE71(50,12,2,0,0,0,80,60,0,4,10,5,0,2000,31,5) ;Face milling

N28 CYCLE800(1,"",1,57,0,0,0,0,0,0,40,30,0,1)

N30 T=“MILL_10mm“
N32 M6
N34 M3 S5000
N36 POCKET4(50,0,1,-15,20,0,0,4,0.5,0.5,1000,1000,0,11,,,,,) ;Circular pocket
N38 POCKET4(50,0,1,-15,20,0,0,4,0,0,1000,1000,0,12,,,,,)
N40 M2

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-119
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16.3 Programming using parameters

Programming
CYCLE800(_FR, _TC, _ST, _MODE, _X0, _Y0, _Z0, _A, _B, _C, _X1, _Y1,
_Z1, _DIR, _FR _I)
Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

_FR integer Retract
Values: 0: No retraction
1: Retract Z axis (default)1)
2: Retract Z, X, Y axis1)
4: Maximum retraction in tool direction2)
5: Incremental retraction in tool direction2)
_TC String[20] Name of swivel data record
"0" Deselection of data record
_ST integer Swivel plane
Values: ONES DIGIT:
0: New
1: Additive
TENS DIGIT2):
0x: Do not correct tool tip
1x: Correct tool tip
Prerequisite: Correction must be set up by the machine
manufacturer (see manufacturing cycle
TOOLCARRIER.SPF)
HUNDREDS DIGIT:
1xx: Setting tool
TEN THOUSANDS DIGIT
1xxxx: Swivel "no", "minus" direction
2xxxx: Swivel "no", "plus" direction
_MODE integer Swivel mode
Evaluation of angle:
Decimal parameter mode, binary coding.
        %LW

5RWDWLRQDURXQGVWD[LV
5RWDWLRQDURXQGQGD[LV $QJOHRIURWDWLRQ
5RWDWLRQDURXQGUGD[LV
5RWDWLRQDURXQGVWD[LV
5RWDWLRQDURXQGQGD[LV $QJOHRIURWDWLRQ
5RWDWLRQDURXQGUGD[LV
5RWDWLRQDURXQGVWD[LV
5RWDWLRQDURXQGQGD[LV $QJOHRIURWDWLRQ
5RWDWLRQDURXQGUGD[LV
$[LVE\D[LVVZLYHODQJOH $%& 
6ROLGDQJOH $% 
3URMHFWLRQDQJOH $%& 

Note: Bits 0 to 5 (irrelevant for solid angle)

Coding example: → Axis-by-axis rotation zyx
Binary: 00011011 Decimal: 27

Cycles
3-120 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Parameter Data type Meaning

_X0, _Y0, _Z0 real Reference point prior to rotation
_A real 1. Axis angle (axial, projection angle swivel modes)
2. Angle of rotation about the Z axis in XY plane (solid angle swivel
mode)
_B real 1. Axis angle (axial, projection angle swivel modes)
2. Angle of rotation in space about the Y axis (swivel mode 'solid
angle')
_C real Axis angle (axial, projection angle swivel modes)
_X1, _Y1, _Z1 real Zero point after rotation
_DIR integer Direction
If the NC calculates two solutions when the swivel cycle is called,
the operator can select a preferred direction. The machine
manufacturer specifies the axis, to which the preferred direction
refers.
Values -1: (minus): Lower rotary axis value (default)
: +1: (plus): Higher rotary axis value
0: No traversing of rotary axes (calculation only), see also
parameter _ST TEN THOUSANDS DIGIT
_FR_I real Value of incremental retraction in tool direction
Note on 1):
• If declared in swiveling startup.
• Can be adjusted in the TOOLCARR user cycle.
• Note the machine manufacturer’s instructions
Note on 2):
Retraction in tool direction (with Cycles SW 6.5 and higher)
With Cycles SW 6.5 and higher, existing retraction modes are expanded, as described
below:
• Maximum retraction in tool direction"
The tool axis is retracted to the software end position prior to swiveling.
• "Incremental retraction in tool direction"
The tool axis is retracted by the amount of the incremental input value (_FR_I).
Maximum and incremental retraction in tool direction always occurs in the positive tool
direction (away from workpiece).
Retraction in tool direction is always executed prior to swiveling the rotary axes with the
current tool orientation (rotation).
If the swivel plane is undefined at the start of a program, the axis should first be traversed to
a safe position or be safely prepositioned using retraction Z.
Maximum and incremental retraction in tool direction is particularly suitable for machines with
swivel heads. In the case of a machine with a swivel head and an active swivel frame
(rotations in workpiece reference are not 0), several machine axes can be traversed when
traversing in the tool direction.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-121
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Example:
In the case of a machine with a swivel head, the head (and the WCS) in the G17 plane is
swiveled 90 degrees around the X axis. When traversing the Z axis in the program,
therefore, the Y axis traverses. When retracting in tool direction, the Y machine axis
traverses to the positive software end position.

Retraction mode options (can be set in CYCLE800 installation and setup menu)
Do no retract prior to swiveling Retract: no
Retract prior to swiveling Retract: Z
Retract machining axes prior to swiveling Retract: Z,XY
Maximum retraction in tool direction Retract: Tool max.
(with Cycles SW 6.5 and higher)
Incremental retraction in tool direction Retract: Tool inc., e.g., 100.00
(with Cycles SW 6.5 and higher)

3.16.4 Setting of tools - CYCLE800

Function
After swiveling, the tool orientation is always vertical on the machining plane.
When milling with radial cutters, it can make technological sense to set the tool at an angle
to the normal surface vector.
In the swivel cycle, the setting angle is generated by an axis rotation (max. +/- 90 degrees)
to the active swivel plane. When setting, the swivel plane is always “additive”. With "Setting
tool", only rotations are displayed on the swivel cycle input screen form. The user can select
the rotation sequence.

7RROOHQJWK

7&3
5

Cycles
3-122 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

The TCP (Tool Center Point) must be entered as the tool length of the radial cutter.
If a program with several swivel cycles is to be milled with a set tool, the "new" swivel plane
must always be set in the subsequent swivel call.
It is also possible to set tools on machines without the TRAORI option (see LEAD advance
angle and TILD sideways angle functions).

Screen form
Entry to programs/milling area
Soft key
!! 6HWWLQJRI
⇒ WRRO

The "Setting tool" input screen form corresponds to the CYCLE800 input screen form, which
has been shut down.
On the input screen form, the following applies:

Name _TC: Current swivel data record

Retraction _FR: As for CYCLE800
Swivel plane _ST: Additive (display only)
Swivel mode _MODE: Axially (display only)
Rotation around: Rotation around maximum of 2 axes in the WCS XY, YA,
XZ
Correct tool: As for CYCLE800 (for display option, see CYCLE800
startup)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-123
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Setting tool help displays

Setting tool: 1. Rotation Setting tool: 2. Rotation

3.16.5 Setting up workpieces with swiveled machining planes

3.16.5.1 General information

Swiveling in JOG mode

The “Swiveling in JOG" function is used to set up workpieces with swiveled (oblique)
machining planes or any clamped workpieces and represents the prerequisite for further
setup operations (scratching/measuring edge/corner).
Swiveling in JOG mode is supported by its own input screen form.
Once the input values are applied and the NC is started, the rotary axes (swivel axes) are
positioned (rotated with manual rotary axes) and a swivel frame is calculated for this plane.
The following functions can be carried out with "Swiveling in JOG":
• Compensation of basic rotation of the workpiece on machines with swivel tables.
• New swiveling or additive swiveling to any plane if permitted by the machine kinematics.
• Swiveled plane can be set to the new zero plane.
The zero plane corresponds to the tool plane (G17, G18, G19) including the active zero
offset (G500, G54, etc.). Rotations of the active ZO and offsets of the rotary axes are taken
into account when swiveling in JOG. The "Swiveling in JOG" function writes only rotations
either in the workpiece reference ($_WPFRAME) or to the active ZO.

Cycles
3-124 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Operators/machine setters must be aware of the machine position that the unswiveled plane,
the basic setting of the machine kinematics (kinematic chain) or the tool orientation occupies
in this basic setting. The machine manufacturer has defined the basic machine kinematics
setting when setting up the "Swiveling" or "5-axis transformation (TRAORI)" function.
Note the machine manufacturer’s instructions (machine manual)
The operator/machine setter can scratch a workpiece or use a probe to measure a
workpiece on any swiveled plane. In this case, the determined values of the zero offset refer
to the unswiveled plane or the basic setting of the machine kinematics. The
operators/machine setter can also specify the plane to be defined as the new zero plane. In
this case, the determined values of the zero offset refer to the new basic setting (machine
setter).

3.16.5.2 Parameters of input screen form

Screen form
• In JOG mode, the horizontal soft key 8 is the entry soft key for "Swiveling in JOG".

• Horizontal soft key 3 is the entry soft key for "Measuring in JOG".

• The input screen form for the "Swiveling in JOG" function corresponds to a shortened
version of the CYCLE800 Swiveling input screen form.
• The "Retraction", "Direction" and "Correct tool" input fields can be set using display
variants in the “Swiveling” startup screen.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-125
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Explanation of input screen form parameters:

Name _TC or TRAORI

• Name of swivel data record
• Deselection
An active swivel data record is deselected. Swivel frames are deleted.
In the case of active 5-axis transformation and deselected swivel data record
(TCARR=0), TRAORI is displayed. In this case, the swivel plan is approached by means
of the 5-axis transformation.
Retract
Corresponds to the CYCLE800 parameter _FR (retraction).

Swivel plane
• New swivel plane
• Additive swivel plane

Swivel mode
• Axis by axis
Rotation around X,Y,Z (selective), same as CYCLE800
• directly
This allows rotary axis positions to be entered directly. After rotary axes have been
positioned (or manual rotary axes have been rotated), a swivel frame is calculated for
these positions. In “direct” swivel mode, input fields with the names of the rotary axes of
the active swivel data record are displayed instead of “Rotation about” input fields.
Vertical soft key 6 provides “Teach-in”, in order to transfer the actual values of the
automatic rotary axes.

"Direct" swivel mode (example)

Swivel mode directly directly
Rotary axis 1 C -15.00
Rotary axis 2 B 0.000

Direction (for axis-by-axis swivel mode only)

Corresponds to the CYCLE800 parameter _DIR (direction).

Correct tool
Corresponds to the CYCLE800 parameter _ST=1x (correct tool tip).

Note
Note the machine manufacturer’s instructions.

Cycles
3-126 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Explanation of vertical soft keys of input screen form:

Basic setting (VSK 3)

Approaching the basic machine setter setting. If the frame chain does not contain any
rotations, this corresponds to the machine kinematics basic setting in consideration of the
translational offsets of the rotary axes (basic rotation).
Input screen form defaults with vertical soft key basic setting:
• Name: Active swivel data record
• Retract: Z
• Swivel mode: Axis by axis
• Rotation about X 0.0
• Rotation about Y 0.0
• Rotation about Z 0.0

Set zero plane (VSK 4)

The approached swivel plane is to be set to the new zero plane.
The rotations of the swivel frame ($P_WPFRAME) are transferred to the rotations of the
active ZO. When VSK4 "Set zero plane" is pressed, the machine axes do not move. The
complete coordinate system (rotations of the frame chain) remain unchanged with "Set zero
plane".
If the rotations of the swivel frame are other than 0, a new basic "machine setter" setting is
defined by "Set zero plane", which deviates from the basic machine kinematics setting.
This basic machine setter setting applies only to the active ZO for setting up the workpiece.
All subsequent actions such as scratching, measuring with probe, and swiveling with NC
workpiece programs refer to this zero plane or to the basic machine setter setting.

Basic machine kinematics setting

• The tool is located vertically on the plane.
• The position of the workpiece coordinate
system (WCS) on the plane is “still”
undefined.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-127
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Setup basic setting

• The active ZO contains rotations or an
offset in one or both rotary axes.
• The tool is located vertically on the
swiveled plane.
• The position of the workpiece coordinate
system (WCS) on the plane is “still”
undefined.

Clear zero plane (VSK 5)

The rotations of the active ZO are transferred to the rotations of the swivel frame
($P_WPFRAME). When VSK5 "Clear zero plane" is pressed, the machine axes do not
move. The complete coordinate system (rotations of the frame chain) remain unchanged
with "Clear zero plane".

Note
Approaching the basic machine kinematics setting
1. Press VSK 5 "Clear zero plane"
2. Press VSK 3 "Initial setting"
3. NC Start

Example:
The basic machine kinematics setting of the tool is vertical on the rotary axis C (vertical tool
orientation) on a machine with a rotary table around the Z tool axis (rotary axis C) and a
swivel head around the Y machine axis (rotary axis B).
If a workpiece is to be machined exclusively with horizontal tool orientation, the tool must first
be positioned horizontally using a rotation around Y of 90 degrees (possibly in conjunction
with a rotation around Z of 180 degrees) using "Swiveling in JOG".
The ZO is then defined using Scratching or Measuring in JOG, with horizontal tool
orientation. The translational values of the ZO refer to the basic machine kinematics setting.
If the NC machining program is to start in horizontal tool orientation with 0 swivel, a new
"basic machine setter setting" (horizontal) can be defined with VSK4 "Set zero plane".

Soft key << (VSK 8)

Input screen form "Swiveling" is exited.

Cycles
3-128 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Note on the active 5-axis transformation (TRAORI)

With active 5-axis transformation, the "Swiveling in JOG" input screen form fields below are
displayed:
• TRAORI (can be selected with deselection or set-up swivel data records)
• New/additive swivel plane → New zero plane
• Swivel mode: Axis by axis (cannot be selected)
• Rotation about X
• Rotation about Y
• Rotation about Z

Note on retracting the tool axis and traversing the rotary axes
The tool axis (e.g., with G17 = Z) can be retracted prior to swiveling the rotary axes.
Conventional rapid traverse for JOG is used for positioning (MD 32010
$MA_JOG_VELO_RAPID[AX]).
If the rotary axes are positioned, they are also traversed with G0 and conventional rapid
traverse for JOG (MD 32010 $MA_JOG_VELO_RAPID[AX]). Only the TOOLCARR.SPF
cycle is used for traversing, which can be adjusted by the machine manufacturer.
If a swivel plane with active TRAORI is traversed, the TOOLCARR.SPF cycle is also used
for this, whereby the corresponding direction vector is used to set the tool orientation to
vertical on the swivel plane
(e.g., for G17 with C3=1).

Note on offsets in the zero offset of rotary axes of the swivel data record
All rotary axes that are declared in the swivel data record can always have a value in the
offset of the zero offset. Offsets in the zero offset of the rotary axis that rotate around the tool
axis do not cause rotation of the WCS (basic rotation).
In all other cases, offsets in one rotary axis or in both rotary axes result in rotation of the
WCS and, thus, in a change in the basic machine kinematics setting. This rotation is taken
into account in the workpiece reference (WPFRAME) when CYCLE800 is called and must be
noted when programming the program steps after CYCLE800.
This does not apply to manual or semi-automatic rotary axes of the swivel data record as
these are unknown to the NC and thus have no zero offset.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-129
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16.5.3 Data transfer of swivel data in “Swiveling in JOG"

Only rotations are written to the active frame chain with the "Swiveling in JOG" function. All
translational offsets in the active frame chain are retained.
Depending on the possible combinations of rotations or setting/deleting of the zero plane, the
following apply to the transfer of swivel data to the current frame chain:
Swivel plane: New
• Deletes and links the rotations (of geometry axes XYZ) of the swivel frame workpiece
reference ($P_WPFRAME)
• Rotations of the active ZO are retained
Swivel plane: Additive
• Links the rotations of the input values to the rotations of the swivel frame workpiece
reference ($P_WPFRAME)
• Rotations of the active ZO1) are retained
Set zero plane
Transfers the rotations of the swivel frame workpiece reference ($P_WPFRAME) to the
rotations of the active ZO1)
Delete zero plane
Transfers the rotations of the active ZO to the rotations of the swivel frame workpiece
reference ($P_WPFRAME)

Note
1) ZO – current zero offset
If the basic ZO is active (G500) and the “Set zero point” system frame ($P_SETFRAME) is
set up, the swivel data are written in the SETFRAME.
If the basic ZO is active (G500) and the “Set zero point” system frame ($P_SETFRAME) is
not set up, the swivel data are written in the last active basic frame.

Cycles
3-130 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16.6 Startup - CYCLE800

3.16.6.1 General information

Entry soft key

6WDUWXS ! 6ZLYHO
⇒ ⇒ F\FOH

When CYCLE800 is started up, the data (swivel data record) are set in the tool data
$TC_CARR1.... These are grouped to form Swivel startup menus.
References:
For current information see:
• The "siemensd.txt" file on the delivery software (standard cycles) or
• In the case of HMI Advanced, F:\dh\cst.dir\HLP.dir\siemensd.txt.
• Description of Functions 840D/840Di/810D
/W1/ Tool Offset (Inclined Machining with 3 + 2 Axes)
• ISO 841-2001 or DIN 66217
The following cycles must be loaded:
• CYCLE800.SPF, CYCPE_SC.SPF (standard cycles)
• TOOLCARR.SPF (standard cycle)
• PROG_EVENT.SPF (manufacturer cycle)
The PROG_EVENT.SPF cycle is supplied as a manufacturer cycle and is used for
prepositioning of rotary axes (swivel axes) after a block search. The machine
manufacturer can expand the functionality of the PROG_Event by adding his own
manufacturer cycles. CYCPE1MA.SPF or CYCPE_MA.SPF must be used as the name of
the manufacturer cycles. Corresponding exit markers are prepared at the start and end of
PROG_EVENT.SPF for the CYCPE1MA.SPF and CYCPE_MA.SPF manufacturer cycles.
If the CYCPE1MA.SPF and CYCPE_MA.SPF manufacturer cycles are loaded in the NC,
the program branches from PROG_EVENT to the manufacturer cycles as appropriate.
The _TC_FR to _TC_NUM (GUD7) GUD variables must be activated.

Activate CYCLE800 installation and startup menu

The screen form in the startup operating area is activated as follows:
• HMI Embedded
The "Swivel cycle" soft key in the COMMON.COM file must be activated. Open the
COMMON.COM file and then delete the ";" in front of SC616.
The file is located in the "User Cycles" directory. Then perform an NC reset.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-131
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

• HMI Advanced:
Delete the ";" in front of the following lines in the STARTUP.COM (standard cycles) file:
;HS14=($82084,ac7)
;PRESS(HS14)
;LM("SWIVEL1a","SWIVEL1.com")
;END_PRESS
Following these changes, restart HMI Advanced.

Activate "Swiveling in JOG"

Horizontal soft key 8 is the "Swiveling" entry soft key in machine/JOG mode.
Soft key 8 is activated in the MA_JOG.COM file, which is located in the “Standard cycles"
directory.
Delete the ";" in front of the following lines in the MA_JOG.COM file:
HS8=($82119,,se1)
;PRESS(HS8)
;LM("SWIVEL3","jog_c800.com")
;END_PRESS

Machine and setting data

To use the swiveling cycle, the machine data below must be set as follows (minimum
requirement):
• Machine data with precise value assignment (P):
These are machine data that cannot be modified.
• Machine data with variable value assignment (V):
These are machine data, whose default values can be increased or decreased.

MD MD identifier Value Comment Modifiable

number
10602 $MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE 1 1) V
11450 $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE Bit 1=1 Activate PROG_EVENT after G
block search
11602 $MN_ASUP_START_MASK Bit 0=1 Swiveling in JOG V
11604 $MN_ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL 100 Swiveling in JOG V
18088 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER n>0 n = Number of swivel data V
records1)
18114 $MM_ENABLE_TOOL_ORIENT 2 Basic tool orientation V
20108 $MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK 0 Systemasub PROG_EVENT after V
block search
20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK ‘H4041‘ Bit 14=1 G
20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK ‘H400‘ - G
20126 $MC_TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE 0...n Described in CYCLE800 V
20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[41] 1 TCOABS1) G

Cycles
3-132 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

MD MD identifier Value Comment Modifiable

number
20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[51] 2 PAROT1) G
20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[52] 1 TOROTOF1) V
(for kinematics types T and M
only)
20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[41] 0 (Default)1) G
20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[51] 0 (Default)1) V
20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[52] 0 (Default)1) V
20180 $MC_TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_INCR[0] 0 (Default)1) G
20180 $MC_TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_INCR[1] 0 (Default)1) G
20182 $MC_TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_OFFSET[0] 0 (Default)1) G
20182 $MC_TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_OFFSET[1] 0 (Default)1) G
20184 $MC_TOCARR_BASE_FRAME_NUMBER -1 (Default)1) G
20360 $MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK Bit 10=1 For T, M kinematics, if orientation V
vector is to be retained even for
T0 and D0 (no tool).
21100 $MC_ORIENTATION_IS_EULER 0 Angles of rotations are V
interpreted as RPY
21104 $MC_ORI_IPO_WITH_G_CODE 1 If for swiveling + TRAORI (correct V
tool, swiveling in JOG)
22530 $MC_TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE 0 1) V
24006 $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK Bit 4=1 If system frame $P_WPFRAME is V
to remain active after a reset
24007 $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_CLEAR_MASK Bit 2,3=0 - V
Bit 4=1 If system frame $P_WPFRAME is
to be deleted on reset
24008 $MC_CHSFRAME_POWERON_MASK Bit 4, 3, 2=1 If system frames $P_WPFRAME, V
$P_TOOLFRAME and
$P_PARTFRAME are to be
deleted on power on
28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK Bit 4, 3, 2=1 Setup of system frames G
$P_WPFRAME,
$P_TOOLFRAME and
$P_PARTFRAME
28083 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_DATAFRAME_MASK Bit 4, 3, 2=1 Default=’H7f’ G
30455 MISC_FUNCTION_MASK Bit 2, 0=1 For rotary axes declared as V
modulo axes1)
32010 $MA_JOG_VELO_RAPID[AX] Rapid traverse in JOG mode for V
swiveling in JOG, with Cycles SW
6.5 and higher.
MD is relevant for axes that are
retracted and for rotary axes

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-133
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

SD no. SD identifier Value Comment Modifiable

42974 $SC_TOCARR_FINE_CORRECTION 0 Fine offsets of offset vectors V
42980 $SC_TOFRAME_MODE 2000 See notes V
Making changes to the required machine data results in reorganization of the buffered
memory (data loss).
Series startup must be performed after setting the MD and before NCK reset.
References:
/IAM/ Commissioning Manual HMI

1) Notes on machine and setting data

• MD 10602
If the ZO is not to be reprogrammed following TRAORI, e.g., for tool correction.
• MD 18114
Support of angular tools with tool orientation (SW 06.05.17.00 and higher)
Angular tools are created and managed in the HMI or NCU with tool type 130. The tool
lengths are entered in the tool of tool type 130. If an angular tool is also to be used on a
swiveled machining plane (CYCLE800), the basic tool orientation must be disconnected
with MD18114 MM_ENABLE_TOOL_ORIENT=2. This enables a direction vector to be
transferred to the tool in parameters $TC_DPV3[aa,bb] to $TC_DPV5[aa,bb].
The TOROT (G17), TOROTY (G18), and TOROTX (G19) commands must be
programmed for the tool change so that the basic tool orientation is updated.
• MD 18088
If several channels are defined in the NCU, the number of swivel data records is divided,
taking MD 28085: MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT into account.
– Example:
MD 18088 MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER =4
Number of channels=2.
Two swivel data records are provided for each channel.
• MD 20180/MD 20182
For rotary axes with the Hirth tooth system, the relevant values are entered in the
CYCLE800 startup menu.
• MD 24006/MD 24007
For Swiveling in JOG:
– MD24006 Bit 4=1
– MD24007 Bit 4=0
The workpiece reference (WPFRAME) must be active on Reset, in order to be able to
scratch or measure (cascaded measuring) with the active ZO after swiveling in JOG.

Cycles
3-134 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

• MD 22530
If several swivel data records are declared per channel, and if machine functions need to
be activated on changeover between swivel heads or tables, an M command can be
issued in the PLC program on switchover to another swivel data record.
– Example:
Number of swivel data records in channel 1 =2
MD 22530: TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE = -800
Programming of swivel data record 1 (TCARR=1) ⇒ M801
Programming of swivel data record 2 (TCARR=2) ⇒ M802
The PLC can limit or invert the spindle speed, for example, by outputting M
commands.
• MD 30455
This allows the rotary axis to traverse for G90 with DC (shortest path); see
TOOLCARR.SPF user cycle.
• MD 20150/MD 20152 and SD 42980
Note on kinematics (swivel head/mixed kinematics) with Hirth tooth system:
Depending on the active plane (G17,G18,G19), the TOROT command (or TOROTX,
TOROTY) is programmed (G-group 53) to calculate (in the NCU) the compensating frame
for the Hirth tooth system in CYCLE800.
If the Hirth tooth system causes the programmed rotation to deviate from the rotary axes'
possible positions, a $P_TOOLFRAME compensating frame is created for swivel head
and mixed kinematics (see HMI active ZO/details tool reference).
The calculation depends on setting data SD 42980: $SC_TOFRAME_MODE.
For kinematics (swivel head/mixed kinematics) with Hirth tooth setting data SD 42980:
Set $SC_TOFRAME_MODE=2000!
To ensure that the compensating frame (TOOLFRAME) is retained after a reset or end of
program, enter the following value in MD 20150: $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[52]:
– For G17 (TOROT) ⇒ MD 20150=2
– For G18 (TOROTY) ⇒ MD 20150=3
– For G19 (TOROTX).⇒ MD 20150=4

3.16.6.2 Startup of kinematic chain

The CYCLE800 startup process is supported by the following menu displays:
• Startup of kinematic chain
• Startup of rotary axis parameter
• Startup of fine kinematics

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-135
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Startup of kinematic chain menu display

You must set up a swivel data set for every swivel head, swivel table or combination of both.
Swivel data records can be declared in several channels (see machine data).
The swivel data record is assigned to the tool data by $TC_CARR1[n] to $TC_CARR40[n] or,
with NCU SW 7.1 or higher, to $TC_CARR65[n].

Explanation of vertical soft keys:

'DWDUHFRUG
6DYH
Current swivel data record is saved as the parts program. The parts program corresponds to
the name of the swivel data record.

'DWDUHFRUG
'HOHWH
Current swivel data record is deleted.

Explanation of parameters:
The meaning of the parameters in the "Kinematics" screen form is as follows:

Name: Swivel data record $TC_CARR34[n]

n ⇒ Swivel data record number
If several swivel data records are declared in each NC channel, then a name is assigned to
each swivel data record. No name needs to be specified if the swivel-mounted toolholder is
not exchangeable (i.e., one swivel data record per channel).
The program is advanced to the next swivel data record and the next channel via soft keys
(channel +/- swivel data record +/-).

Note
Swivel data record names may only contain permitted NC programming characters (A…Z,
0…9 and _)!

Cycles
3-136 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Kinematics: Type $TC_CARR23[n]

• Swivel head (type T)
• Swivel table (type P)
• Swivel head + swivel table (type M)

Swivel head (type T) Swivel table (type P) Swivel head + swivel table (type
M)

Offset vector I1 Offset vector I2 Offset vector I1

Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis vector V1
Offset vector I2 Offset vector I3 Offset vector I2
Rotary axis vector V2 Rotary axis vector V2 Offset vector I3
Offset vector I3 Offset vector I4 Rotary axis vector V2
Offset vector I4
The vectors always refer to the basic setting of the machine kinematics.
Swivel head
• I3 distance from the tool adapter to the pivot point/intersection of the 2nd rotary axis
• I2 distance from the pivot point/intersection of the 2nd rotary axis to the pivot
point/intersection of the 1st rotary axis
• I1 closure of the I1=-(I2+I3) vector chain, if the swivel head cannot be changed
Swivel table
• I2 distance from the machine reference point to the pivot point/intersection of the 1st
rotary axis
• I3 distance from the pivot point/intersection of the 1st rotary axis to the pivot
point/intersection of the 2nd rotary axis (or to the reference point of the tool adapter)
• I4 closure of the I4=-(I2+I3) vector chain, if the swivel table cannot be changed
Swivel head/swivel table (mixed kinematics)
• I2 distance from the tool adapter to the pivot point/intersection of the 1st rotary axis
• I1 closure of the I1=-I2 vector chain, if the swivel head cannot be changed
• I3 distance from the machine reference point to the pivot point/intersection of the 2nd
rotary axis (or to the reference point of the tool adapter)
• I4 closure of the I4=-I3 vector chain, if the swivel table cannot be changed

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-137
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

The offset vectors do not have to point to the pivot point of the rotary axes. The important
thing is that they point to a point on the direction of rotation (intersection).
The sign of the offset vectors (I1 to I4) and the rotary axis vectors (V1, V2) result from the
specifications of the axis directions according to ISO 841-2001 or DIN 66217 (right-hand
rule).
In the case of kinematics that move the workpiece (rotary table), the motion of the workpiece
relative to the tool must be taken into account.
Interrelation of TOOLCARRIER data ⇔ 5-axis transformation (Trafo type 24, 40, 56):

Note
With NCU SW 7.1 and higher, transformer type 72 ($MC_ TRAFO_TYPE_1) can be used for
a 5-axis transformation. The toolholder (TOOLCARRIER) vectors are used with transformer
type 72.

Swivel head (swivel-mounted tool)

$TC_CARR23[1]="T" $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=24
I1 $TC_CARR1...3[n] $MC_ TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1[0...2]
I2 $TC_CARR4...6[n] $MC_ TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1[0…2]
I3 $TC_CARR15...17[n] $MC_ TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1 [0...2]
Closure of the I1=-(I2+I3) vector chain; for fixed-mounted machine kinematics

Swivel table (swivel-mounted workpiece)

$TC_CARR23[1]=“P" $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=40
I2 $TC_CARR4...6[n] $MC_ TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1 [0..2]
I3 $TC_CARR15...17[n] $MC_ TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1[0…2]
I4 $TC_CARR18...20[n] $MC_ TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1[0...2]
Closure of the I4=-(I2+I3) vector chain; for fixed-mounted machine kinematics

Swivel head + swivel table (swivel-mounted tool + workpiece)

$TC_CARR23[1]=“M“ $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=56
I1 $TC_CARR1...3[n] $MC_ TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1[0…2]
I2 $TC_CARR4...6[n] $MC_ TRAFO5_BASE_TOOL_1 [0...2]
I3 $TC_CARR15...17[n] $MC_ TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_1[0...2]
I4 $TC_CARR18...20[n] $MC_ TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_1[0...2]
Closure of the I1=-I2 I4=-I3 vector chain; for fixed-mounted machine kinematics

Cycles
3-138 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Retraction/Retraction position $TC_CARR38[n] X; $TC_CARR39[n] Y; $TC_CARR40[n] Z

n ⇒ Swivel data record number
The startup engineer determines whether the 'Retract Z axis' and 'Retract Z,X,Y axes' or
‘Retract in tool direction' may be included in the input menu for the swivel cycle (see display
variants below).
The mode of retraction can be modified in the TOOLCARR.SPF user cycle (see User Cycle
TOOLCARR.SPF), if necessary. If the TOOLCARR.SPF user cycle is not modified, the
retraction position is approached as an absolute machine position.

Notice
Please note the following when traversing the tool axes:
Retract the tool axis in such a way that the tool and workpiece cannot collide when swiveled.

Offset vectors I1 to I4 for rotary axis vectors V1, V2 (machine kinematics $TC_CARR1[n] to
$TC_CARR20[n]
The vectors always contain 3 components, which represent the reference to the X, Y, Z
machine axes (see also Kinematics: Type above).
The positions in the kinematic chain are measured by the machine manufacturer; they are
always relevant with respect to a swivel head/swivel table (swivel data record).
Offset vectors I1 to I4 refer to the non-swiveled state of the rotary axes (machine kinematics
basic setting).
The machine kinematics used do not need to be fully implemented. However, be aware that
the traversing range in the swivel planes may be restricted. If machine kinematics are to be
implemented with just one rotary axis, this must always be declared as the 1st rotary axis.
Manually adjustable rotary axes (manual mode) are possible with and without measuring
systems and can be used with "plain machines".

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-139
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Display variants of input screen form CYCLE800 $TC_CARR37[n]

(n ⇒ swivel data record)
If the corresponding display variants are not set, the value will not be displayed in the input
screen form (see Section "Programming via Screen Form").

         GHFLPDOSODFHV

$[LVE\D[LV
$[LVE\D[LVSURMHFWLRQDQJOH
$[LVE\D[LVSURMHFWLRQDQJOHVROLGDQJOH
5RWDU\D[LV
$XWRPDWLF
0DQXDO
6HPLDXWRPDWLF
5RWDU\D[LV
$XWRPDWLF
0DQXDO
6HPLDXWRPDWLF
6HOHFWLRQRISUHIHUUHGGLUHFWLRQRID[HV
1R
5HIHUHQFHWRURWDU\D[LV
5HIHUHQFHWRURWDU\D[LV

&RUUHFWLRQRIWKHWRROWLS
1R
<HV

5HVHUYHG

5HWUDFWLRQPRGH
=D[LV
=D[LVRU=;<D[LV

5HWUDFWLRQLQWRROGLUHFWLRQ ZLWK&\FOHV6:DQGKLJKHU 

/HIW 5LJKW
= 0D[WRROGLUHFWLRQ
=;< ,QFUHPHQWDOWRROGLUHFWLRQ
==;< 0D[WRROGLUHFWLRQLQFUHPHQWDO

6ZLYHOGDWDUHFRUGFKDQJHWRROFKDQJH
 1R 

 0DQXDO $XWRPDWLF

 $XWRPDWLF $XWRPDWLF
 1R 

 0DQXDO 0DQXDO

 $XWRPDWLF 0DQXDO
 2QO\UHOHYDQWIRU6KRS0LOO6KRS7XUQ
 ,IQRVZLYHOGDWDUHFRUGFKDQJHLVGHFODUHG
$XWRPDWLFPDQXDOWRROFKDQJHVHWWLQJLVQRWUHOHYDQW
 &RGLQJRIUHWUDFWLRQPRGHVVHHIROORZLQJWDEOH

Cycles
3-140 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Table 3-1 Coding of retraction modes Z, ZXY, maximum, incremental tool direction

Z Z, X, Y Maximum tool Incremental tool Coding of

direction direction $TC_CARR37
xXXxxxxxx
1 0 0 0 00
1 1 0 0 01
0 1 0 0 02
0 0 0 0 03
0 0 1 0 04
1 0 1 0 05
0 1 1 0 06
1 1 1 0 07
0 0 0 1 08
1 0 0 1 09
0 1 0 1 10
1 1 0 1 11
0 0 1 1 12
1 0 1 1 13
0 1 1 1 14
1 1 1 1 15

The following display variants affect the input screen form for the swivel cycle:
• Swivel mode
⇒ Axis by axis
⇒ Axis by axis and projection angle
⇒ Axis by axis and projection angle and solid angle
Example:
Selection of swivel mode during startup: Axis by axis, projection angle
In this case, only 'axis by axis' or 'projection angle' is included in the input menu.
It is neither desirable nor possible to program a solid angle in this example.
• Direction
⇒ Rotary axis 1
⇒ Rotary axis 2
⇒ No
Reference to rotary axis 1 or 2 for the travel direction selection in the input screen form
for the swivel cycle.
The NCU calculates two possible solutions using the angle range of the rotary axes of the
machine kinematics. Usually, one of these solutions is technologically suitable.
The rotary axis to which the two solutions are to refer is selected in the startup menu (see
note for _DIR under "Parameters of Input Screen Form).

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-141
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

The solution to be applied is selected in the input screen form for the swivel cycle.
With No, the direction parameter is not displayed on the operating screen.
Example of effect of "Direction" parameter using mixed kinematics:

1. Rotary axis
Swivel head A rotates around machine axis X
2. Rotary axis
Rotary axis C rotates around machine axis Z
Angle range of 1st rotary axis –30 to +90 degrees
Angle range of 2nd rotary axis 0 to +360 degrees (modulo axis)
Direction parameter in startup screen form Swivel on rotary axis 1

Program 1: Swivel CYCLE800 (... rotate by X = 20 degrees, ... minus direction)

Axis A rotates to - 20 degrees and axis C to 180 degrees
Program 2: Swivel CYCLE800 (... rotate by X = 20 degrees, ... plus direction)
Axis A rotates to 20 degrees and axis C to 0 degrees
Program 3: Swivel CYCLE800 (... rotate by X = 45 degrees, ... minus direction)
Axis A rotates to 45 degrees and axis C to 0 degrees
Program 4: Swivel CYCLE800 (... rotate by X = 45 degrees, ... plus direction)
Axis A rotates to 45 degrees and axis C to 0 degrees

The Direction parameter has no effect in programs 3 and 4 because two solutions are
not produced for the kinematics starting at 30 degrees around X or Y
due to the limited angle range of the A axis (-30 to +90) and therefore the first solution
is always applied.
• Correct tool
⇒ No
⇒ Yes
"Correct Tool" display in the input screen form for the swivel cycle.
The correct tool function requires the 5-axis transformation (TRAORI) option.

See also
Manufacturer Cycle TOOLCARR.SPF - CYCLE800 (Page 3-154)

Cycles
3-142 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16.6.3 Startup of rotary axis parameter

Startup of rotary axis parameter menu display

Explanation of parameters:

Rotary axis 1 $TC_CARR35[n]; Rotary axis 2 $TC_CARR36[n]

The following identifiers should be chosen, where possible:
• Axis rotates around machine axis X ⇒ A
• Axis rotates around machine axis Y ⇒ B
• Axis rotates around machine axis Z ⇒ C
If the NCU axes are known, the same axis identifiers of the relevant NC rotary axes must be
selected (see automatic mode).
If the NCU axes are unknown, you can use any axis identifier (up to 6 letters or numbers).

Mode $TC_CARR37[n] (see Display Variants)

• Automatic
NC rotary axes are automatically traversed to the appropriate swivel angle.
• Manual
Rotary axes are moved manually by the operator to the appropriate position, e.g., "very
simple machines" with manually adjustable rotary axes (measuring system: steel gauge).
Messages 62180/62181 display the swivel angle to be set.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-143
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

• Semi-automatic
In "semi automatic" mode, messages 62180/62181 (display of the angle values to be set)
are not displayed.
Application:
Manual rotary axes that are positioned at the calculated angle by an appropriate
mechanism. For this purpose, the machine manufacturer can modify the TOOLCARR
user cycle to pass the swivel angle (local variable _A1, _A2) to a subroutine (markers
_M21... for manual rotary axes).
Both mixed machine kinematics (e.g., 1st rotary axis automatic, 2nd rotary axis manual) and
“incomplete” machine kinematics (e.g., 1st rotary axis rotates about axis X) are permitted.
If machine kinematics are to be implemented with just one rotary axis, this must always be
declared as the 1st rotary axis.

Angle range $TC_CARR30[n] .. $TC_CARR33[n]

A valid angle range (e.g., -90 to +90 degrees) must be assigned to each rotary axis. This
does not have to be the software end position range of the rotary axis in question.
With modulo axes, you must enter a traversing range of between 0 and 360 degrees.

Kinematics offset
In the "Offset Kinematics" input field, it is possible to enter the offset of rotary axis 1
($TC_CARR24[n]) or rotary axis 2 ($TC_CARR25[n]) if the position of the rotary axes is not
equal to 0 in the basic setting.

Hirth tooth system$TC_CARR26[n]... $TC_CARR29[n]

• No
Subsequent fields are concealed.
• Yes
⇒ Angular offset of Hirth tooth system at start of gearing.
⇒ Angular grid of Hirth tooth system
⇒ Automatic correction Yes/No (omitted starting in Cycle SW version 6.3)

Swivel data record change (only relevant for ShopMill/ShopTurn)

• No
• Automatic
• Manual

Tool change (only relevant for ShopMill/ShopTurn)

• Automatic
• Manual
"Tool change" display for kinematic type T and M only

Cycles
3-144 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16.6.4 Startup of fine kinematics

General information
Input screen form for fine offsets of offset vectors for swiveling (NCU 7.1 and higher):
In the "Fine kinematics" startup screen, fine offsets can be entered for the vectors of
machine kinematics I1 to I4 or the offset values of the rotary axes. The display and entry of
fine offsets of offset vectors takes place in a separate display in the "Start up swivel" area.
You use vertical soft key Kinematics, Rotary axes, Fine kinematics to enter this screen. The
fine offsets are activated by the following setting data: SD 42974:
$SC_TOCARR_FINE_CORRECTION = 1.
The fine offsets act in addition to the corresponding base vectors when the function
"swiveling" CYCLE800 or the NC function TCARR=n is called.
Assignment of base vectors to the fine offset vectors:
• I1 $TC_CARR1..3[n] → $TC_CARR41..43[n]
• I2 $TC_CARR4..6[n] → $TC_CARR44..46[n]
• I3 $TC_CARR15..17[n] → $TC_CARR55..57[n]
• I4 $TC_CARR18..20[n] → $TC_CARR58..60[n]
Offset vectors of rotary axes
• $TC_CARR24..25[n] → $TC_CARR64..65[n]
n...number of swivel data record

Application
The fine offsets can be applied for temperature compensation of machine kinematics. For
this purpose, the fine offsets can be written, activated, and deactivated in a corresponding
manufacturer cycle.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-145
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16.6.5 Startup examples for machine kinematics

Example 1: Swivel head 1 "HEAD_1"

• Rotary axis 1(C) (manual) about &KDQJHDEOHVZLYHOKHDGZLWKVWHHSWDSHUIRULQFRUSRUDWLRQLQVSLQGOH

Z
• Rotary axis 2(A) (manual) about
X
• Manually adjustable changeable
=

swivel head (manual)

<
Vectors relate to the kinematics
;
basic setting (drawing not true-to-
scale)



,
&

,




,
/ 
/FRUUHVSRQGVWRWRROOHQJWK

Table 3-2 Startup SK Swivel, Kinematics (Example 1)

Kinematics Swivel head HEAD_1

Retract Z
X Y Z
200.000
Offset vector I1 0.000 0.030 -63.000
Rotary axis vector V1 0.000 0.000 1.000
Offset vector I2 0.000 0.000 40.000
Rotary axis vector V2 1.000 0.000 0.000
Offset vector I3 0.000 -0.030 23.000

Display options
Swivel mode Axis by axis
Direction Rotary axis 2
Correct tool No

Cycles
3-146 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Kinematics Swivel head HEAD_1

Rotary axes
Rotary axis 1 C Mode Manual
Angular range 0.000 360.000
Rotary axis 2 A Mode Manual
Angular range -15.000 100.000

Example 2: Swivel head 2 "HEAD_2"

Rotary axis vector V1: Rotary axis B rotates about Y

Rotary axis vector V2: Rotary axis C rotates around Y and around Z
Offset vector I1: Closure of vector chain with fixed-mounted swivel head
I1=-(I2+I3)
Offset vector I2: Distance between pivot point of rotary axis 1 and pivot point of
rotary axis 2
Offset vector I3: Distance between reference point of tool and pivot point of rotary
axis 2
Cardanic swivel head (manually adjustable) with Hirth tooth system
Vectors relate to the basic setting of the kinematics.
If the swivel head is fixed-mounted, the vector chain is closed (see l1)

172 Rotary axis 2

V2
V1
45
degr.
172 I2
I1 Rotary axis 1

93.8
I3 Pivot point of
rotary axis Z

Pivot point of
rotary axis 2 Y
Reference point X
of tool

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-147
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Table 3-3 Startup SK Swivel, Kinematics (Example 2)

Kinematics Swivel head HEAD_2

Retract Z Tool direction Max.+inc.
X Y Z
200.000
Offset vector I1 0.000 -172.000 -265.800
Rotary axis vector V1 0.000 1.000 0.000
Offset vector I2 0.000 172.000 172.000
Rotary axis vector V2 0.000 1.0001) 1.0001)
Offset vector I3 0.000 0.000 93.800

Display options
Swivel mode Axis by axis
Direction Rotary axis 2

Rotary axes
Rotary axis 1 B Mode Manual
Angular range 0.000 360.000
Kinematics offset 0.000
Hirth tooth system Yes Angular grid 1.000
Rotary axis 2 C Mode Manual
Angular range 0.000 180.000
Kinematics offset 0.000
The reference point of the pivot point of rotary axes 1 and 2 can be offset on the line of
rotation and does not have to coincide with the mechanical pivot point.

1) Calculation of rotary axis vector V2: 45 degree angle

V2Y= sin(45)= 0.7071
V2z= cos(45)= 0.7071
V2Y and V2z can be normalized to 1.

Cycles
3-148 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Example 3: Cardanic table "TABLE_45"

Vectors relate to the basic setting of the kinematics.

Rotary axis vector Rotary axis B rotates around Y and

V1: around Z.
Rotary axis vector Rotary axis C rotates about Z.
V2
Offset vector I2: Distance from the reference point of
the machine to the pivot
point/intersection of rotary axis 1
Offset vector I3: Distance between pivot
point/intersection of rotary axis 1 and
pivot point/intersection of rotary axis
2
Offset vector I4: Closure of vector chain I4=-(I2+I3)

Side view of the machine 5HIHUHQFHSRLQWRIPDFKLQH

0.6;<= 
Spindle (tool adapter) is
positioned on a block 9 ,
dimension above the top ,] 

edge of the table (rotary

,\  
axis C) or the center of , 
Ð
the table. ,] 
,
A measuring rod in the  
spindle is used to 
determine the turning
center of rotary axis C.

5RWDU\D[LV&
5RWDU\D[LV% 

Z
9

Y
X

Table 3-4 Startup SK Swivel, Kinematics (Example 3)

Kinematics Swivel head TABLE_45

X Y Z
Offset vector I2 0.000 100.000 50.000
Rotary axis vector V1 0.000 -1.0001) 1.0001)
Offset vector I3 0.000 0.000 -30.000
Rotary axis vector V2 0.000 0.000 -1.000
Offset vector I4 0.000 -100.000 -20.000

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-149
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Kinematics Swivel head TABLE_45

Display options
Swivel mode Axis by axis
Direction Rotary axis 2
Correct tool No

Rotary axes
Rotary axis 1 B Mode Auto
Angular range 0.000 180.000
Rotary axis 2 C Mode Auto
Angular range 0.000 360.000

1) Calculation of rotary axis vector V1: β = -45 degrees

V1Y= sin(-45)= -0.7071
V1z= cos(-45)= 0.7071
V1Y and V1z can be normalized to -1 and 1.

Example 4: Swivel head/rotary table "MIXED_45"

Vectors relate to the basic setting of the kinematics.

Rotary axis vector Rotary axis B rotates around Y and

V1: around Z.
Rotary axis vector Rotary axis C rotates about Z.
V2:
Offset vector I2: Distance from the reference point of
the tool adapter to the pivot
point/intersection of rotary axis 1
Offset vector I1: Closure of vector chain l1=-12
Offset vector I3: Distance from the reference point of
the machine to the pivot
point/intersection of rotary axis 2
Offset vector I4: Closure of vector chain l4=-12

Cycles
3-150 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Side view of the

machine:
Spindle (tool
adapter) is 9
positioned on a
block dimension
above the top edge ¡
of the table (rotary =
axis C) or the center 5RWDU\D[LV%
of the table.
A measuring rod in
the spindle is used <
to determine the O
;
turning center of O] 
rotary axis C. O O O
O\ 

5HIHUHQFHSRLQWRI O O 5RWDU\D[LV&

PDFKLQH
0.6;<=
9

Table 3-5 Startup SK Swivel, Kinematics (Example 4)

Kinematics Swivel head MIXED_45
X Y Z
Offset vector I1 0.000 0.000 -30.600
Rotary axis vector V1 0.000 1.0001) 1.0001)
Offset vector I2 0.000 0.000 30.600
Offset vector I3 300.000 150.000 0.000
Rotary axis vector V2 0.000 0.000 -1.000
Offset vector I4 -300.000 -150.000 0.000

Display options
Swivel mode Axis by axis
Direction Rotary axis 1
Correct tool Yes

Rotary axes
Rotary axis 1 B Mode Auto
Angular range 0.000 180.000
Rotary axis 2 C Mode Auto
Angular range 0.000 360.000

1) Calculation of rotary axis vector V1: β = 45 degrees

V1Y= sin(45)= -0.7071
V1z= cos(45)= 0.7071
V1Y and V1z can be normalized to 1.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-151
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Example 5: Swivel table "TABLE_5"

Vectors relate to the basic setting of the kinematics.

Rotary axis vector Rotary axis A rotates about X.

V1:
Rotary axis vector Rotary axis C rotates about Z.
V2:
Offset vector I2: Distance from the reference point of
the machine to the pivot
point/intersection of rotary axis 1
Offset vector I3: Distance from the pivot point of
rotary axis 1 to the pivot
point/intersection of rotary axis 2
Offset vector I4: Closure of vector chain I4=-(I2+I3)

Side view of the machine

from the X direction
Spindle (tool adapter) is
positioned on a block
dimension above the top
edge of the table (rotary
axis C) or the center of the 9
table.
=
A measuring rod in the
spindle is used to
determine the turning
center of rotary axis C. <

; 5RWDU\D[LV&

O
O
O\ 
O
O\  5RWDU\D[LV$
5HIHUHQFHSRLQWRI
PDFKLQH
0.6;<=
9

Cycles
3-152 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Side view of the

machine from the
Y direction

9
=

<

;
5RWDU\D[LV&

O O O
O  ,, 
O] 
O 9
O[  5RWDU\D[LV$

5HIHUHQFHSRLQWRIPDFKLQH
0.6;<=

Table 3-6 Startup SK Swivel, Kinematics (Example 5)

Kinematics Swivel head TABLE_5

X Y Z
Offset vector I2 260.000 200.000 0.000
Rotary axis vector V1 -1.000 0.000 0.000
Offset vector I3 0.000 0.020 20.400
Rotary axis vector V2 0.000 0.000 -1.000
Offset vector I4 -260.000 -200.020 -20.400

Display options
Swivel mode Axis by axis
Direction Rotary axis 1
Correct tool No

Rotary axes
Rotary axis 1 A Mode Auto
Angular range -90.000 90.000
Rotary axis 2 C Mode Auto
Angular range 0.000 360.000

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-153
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

3.16.7 Manufacturer Cycle TOOLCARR.SPF - CYCLE800

Function
Customization by the machine manufacturer
During swiveling, all axis positions are traversed using the TOOLCARR.SPF cycle. This is
always called from the CYCLE800 swivel cycle or E_TCARR (ShopMill) or F_TCARR
(ShopTurn). The cycle can be modified by the machine manufacturer during startup, in order
to cater to the properties of specific machines.
If the cycle is not modified, the Z axis (marker _M41) or the Z axis followed by the X, Y axes
(marker _M42) is first moved when retracting prior to swiveling. Starting with cycle SW
version 6.5, retraction can also take place in the tool direction with swiveled tool axes (see
marker _M44 _M45).
The positions correspond to the CYCLE800 "Kinematics" ⇒ retraction positions startup
menu.

6WUXFWXUH EDVLF RIVZLYHOF\FOHV

,QSXWVFUHHQIRUPIRU6KRS0LOO6KRS7XUQ ,QSXWVFUHHQIRUPIRU&<&/(VWDQGDUGF\FOH

722/&$5563)
0DUNHUB0WRB0
(B7&$5563)
)B7&$5563) 

&<&/(63) 0DUNHUB0WRB0

(QGRIF\FOH

Note
The parameters are only valid in conjunction with the relevant jump label in TOOLCARR ⇒
see the program structure below.
If INCH is the basic system of the machine, the TOOLCARR cycle must be modified
accordingly.
Note the machine manufacturer’s instructions!

Cycles
3-154 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

&<&/(63)6WUXFWXUH 722/&$5563)
,QSXWSDUDPHWHU
VZLYHOGDWDUHFRUGQDPH
PRGH
RIIVHWV
URWDWLRQV
UHWUDFWLRQ

&DOFXODWLRQRI ,QLW
YDOLGVZLYHOGDWD 0DUNHUB0,QLW 5HZULWLQJRIYHFWRUVLQ
UHFRUG NLQHPDWLFFKDLQLVSRVVLEOH
HJWHPSHUDWXUHFRPSHQVDWLRQ
YHFWRUVRUFRQVLGHUDWLRQRI:D[LV
6ZLYHOGDWDUHFRUGLQYDOLG LQWKHFDVHRIERULQJPDFKLQHV

(UURUPHVVDJHV

5HWUDFWLRQ $GMXVWPHQWRI
0DUNHU
WRROD[LV UHWUDFWLRQVWUDWHJ\
B0=D[LV
B0=;<D[LV
B07RROGLUHFWLRQPD[
B07RROGLUHFWLRQLQF
1RUHWUDFWLRQ
7UDYHUVLQJWKHURWDU\D[HVLQWKHFDVHRI1&D[HV

0DUNHU
&DOFXODWLRQRI B0  5RWDU\D[LVDXWRPDWLFVZLYHOLQJ
URWDU\D[LVDQJOHV B0 5RWDU\D[LVDXWRPDWLF
'LVSOD\RIDQJOHYDOXHVWREH  5RWDU\D[LVPDQXDOVZLYHOLQJ
VHW PDQXDOURWDU\D[HV B0 5RWDU\D[LVDXWRPDWLFVZLYHOLQJ
'HDFWLYDWLQJILYHD[LV B0 5RWDU\D[LVPDQXDOVZLYHOLQJ
WUDQVIRUPDWLRQ B0 5RWDU\D[LVDXWRPDWLF
   5RWDU\D[LVPDQXDOVZLYHOLQJ
B05RWDU\D[HVPDQXDOVZLYHOLQJ
B0B0B06ZLYHOLQJLQ-2*ZLWK75$25,
1RWUDYHUVLQJRI
URWDU\D[HV

(QGRIF\FOH

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-155
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

6WUXFWXUH(B7&$5563) )B7&$5563)  722/&$5563)

7RROQDPH 7KHIROORZLQJVWUXFWXUHUHODWHVWRWKHVZLYHOGDWDUHFRUGFKDQJHDQG
,QSXWGDWDIRUVZLYHOLQJ WKHDVVRFLDWHGWRROFKDQJHLQ6KRS0LOO6KRS7XUQ

6'6!6ZLYHOGDWDUHFRUG

<HV
2OGHU6'6
1HZHU6'6"

1R 2OGHU6'6 <HV 0DUNHUB0&KDQJHPDJD]LQHWRRO

6ZLYHO B0&KDQJHPDQXDOWRRO
KHDG"

1R

6'6ROGQHZ <HV 0DUNHUB06ZDSVZLYHOKHDGWDEOH

&KDQJH  DXWRPDWLFDOO\
DXWRPDWLFDOO\"

1R

6'6ROGQHZ <HV 0DUNHUB06ZDSVZLYHOKHDGWDEOHPDQXDOO\

&KDQJHPDQXDOO\"

1R

0DUNHUB0&KDQJHVZLYHOKHDGWDEOH
2OG6'6 <HV  DXWRPDWLFDOO\
&KDQJHDXWRPDWLFDOO\"
0DUNHUB0&KDQJHVZLYHOKHDGWDEOH
1HZ6'6FKDQJH
 PDQXDOO\"
PDQXDOO\"
1R

2OG6'6 0DUNHUB0&KDQJHVZLYHOKHDGWDEOH
FKDQJHPDQXDOO\" <HV  PDQXDOO\"
1HZ6'6FKDQJH 0DUNHUB0&KDQJHVZLYHOKHDGWDEOH
DXWRPDWLFDOO\"  DXWRPDWLFDOO\"

1R

7RRO <HV 0DUNHUB0&KDQJHPDJD]LQHWRRO

FKDQJH" B0&KDQJHPDQXDOWRRO

1R
0DUNHUB06ZLYHODIWHUWRROFKDQJH $872 
B06ZLYHODIWHUWRROFKDQJH -2*

(QGRIF\FOH

Cycles
3-156 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Notes
• For Marker _M20 to _M31
Markers _M20 to _M31 are distinguished by kinematics with two rotary axes or one rotary
axis. A distinction is also made between automatic rotary axes (known to the NCU) and
manual rotary axes.
There is only ever one valid marker for the active swivel data record. Checks are carried
out via the _TC_ST parameter/GUD7 variable.
• For ShopMill/ShopTurn
The E_SWIV_H or F_SWIV_H cycle is called in ShopMill/ShopTurn (see markers _M2 to
_M9) in the TOOLCARR.SPF manufacturer cycle.
Parameter E_SWIV_H (Par1, Par2, Par3)
– Par1: Number of swivel data record (_TC1)
– Par2: Angle of 1st rotary axis
– Par3: Angle of 2nd rotary axis
Modification examples:
If the rotary axes (swivel head/table) are not to be positioned during swivel data
change/tool change, the call of the E_SWIV_H cycle can be commented out at the
relevant markers.
If the rotary axes are to move to a certain position, an angle value can be transferred to
parameters Par 2, Par 3.
• For "Correct tool"
“Correct tool” requires that a 5-axis transformation is set up, which is equivalent to the
corresponding swivel data record.
The programming section is integrated into marker _M20 in the TOOLCARR.SPF
manufacturer cycle.
The relevant program lines can be activated by commenting them out.
• For tool change + swivel
In general, the swivel (CYCLE800) and tool change functions for a machine are
independent of each other. Thus, the swiveled work plane can be retained in a
technological sequence with multiple tools (e.g., centering, drilling, tapping).
If the rotary axes of the active swivel data record are involved in the mechanical
sequence of the tool change or these rotary axes have to be retracted, the tool change
sequence program must ensure that the rotary axis positions before the tool change are
achieved again the tool change. If linear axes (geometry axes) are also involved in the
tool change, the rotations in the NC (swivel frame) must not be deleted. Rather, the linear
axes can be positioned as machine axes during the tool change using the G153 or SUPA
commands.
• For swiveling without active tool compensation
If the user wants to prevent swiveling or rotary axes without active tool cutting edge (D0),
the machine manufacturer can adapt this in the TOOLCARR.SPF cycle.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-157
Milling cycles
3.16 Swiveling – CYCLE800

Example with syntax as message:

_M40:
IF ((NOT $P_TOOL) AND _TC1)
LOOP
MSG ("no tool cutting edge active")
M0
STOPRE
ENDLOOP
ENDIF
GOTOF _MEND

Parameter
TOOLCARR(_MODE, _TC1, _A1, _A2, _TC2)

Parameter Data type Meaning

_MODE Corresponds to the markers of the described structure
_TC1 Number of the swivel head/table
_A1 Angle of the 1st rotary axis
_A2 Angle of the 2nd rotary axis (if present)
_TC2 Feedrate reduction when Swiveling in JOG (with Cycles SW 6.5 and
higher)

Cycles
3-158 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

3.17 3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

3.17.1 General information

The standard high-speed settings cycle CYCLE832 is available for the HMI with SW 6.3 and
higher and NCU SW 6.3 (CCU SW 4.3).

Application of CYCLE832:
• For technological support when machining free-form contours (surfaces) in the 3 or 5axis
high-speed machining range (High Speed Cutting - HSC).
• Predominantly used in the HSC milling range (possibility of use for turning or grinding)
• Groups together the important G codes and machine and setting data that are needed for
HSC machining
• Separation of technology/geometry using a relevant NC program architecture

6XUIDFHTXDOLW\

$FFXUDF\ 9HORFLW\

When executing CAM programs in the HSC range, the control has to process high feedrates
with the shortest NC blocks. The user expects a good surface finish quality with high
accuracy in the μm range and with extremely high machining feedrates >10 m/min. By
applying different machining strategies, the user can fine tune the program with the aid of
CYCLE832.
When roughing, the emphasis is on speed due to the smoothing of the contour.
When finishing, the emphasis is on accuracy.
In both cases, specifying a tolerance ensures that the machining contour is observed in
order to achieve the desired surface finish.
When defining the tolerance values for smoothing the contour, the operator must have
precise knowledge of the subsequent CAM program. The CYCLE832 cycle supports
machine types where a maximum of three linear and two rotary axes are involved in
machining.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-159
Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

Function
The following functions can be defined or enabled/disabled by CYCLE832:
• 4 types of machining: Finishing, rough-finishing, roughing, deselection (default setting)
• Tolerance band of the contour to be machined
• Smoothing (G64, G641, G642)
• NC block compressor (COMPCAD, COMPCURV, COMPOF)1)
• Feedforward control (FFWON, FFWOF)
• Jerk limitation (SOFT, BRISK)
• 5-axis transformation (TRAORI, TRAFOF)1)
• B SPLINE1)
1) Only if the relevant option is set.
The CYCLE832 cycle groups together the important G codes and the machine or setting
data required for HSC machining.

Machining modes
In CYCLE832, a distinction is made between four technological operations:
• "Finishing"
• "Rough-finishing"
• "Roughing"
• "Deselection" (default setting)
In CAM programs in the HSC range, the four machining types directly relate to the accuracy
and speed of the path contour (see help display). The operator/programmer uses the
tolerance value to give a corresponding weighting.
Different tolerances and settings (customizing technology) can be assigned to the four
machining types.

Screen form
The relevant G codes are preset (customizing technology) in the input screen form, in order
to ensure a smoothing path contour or that the CAM program is executed at optimum speed.
The cycle precedes the CAM program in the main menu (see typical CYCLE832 call).
Different interpretations of the tolerance values are taken into account. For example, for
G641, the tolerance value is transferred as ADIS= and for G642, the axis-specific MD 33100
COMPRESS_POS_TOL[AX] is updated.

Cycles
3-160 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

When activating the "Customize technology" input field, you can enable or disable
(keyswitch position ≥2):
• Compression (COMPCAD, COMPCURV, COMPOF, B-SPLINE),
• Continuous-path mode (G64, G641, G642) or
• Velocity control (FFWON, FFWOF, SOFT, BRISK).
If 5-axis transformation (TRAORI) is set up, this can be enabled/disabled in the
transformation input field.

Notice
Never ignore information provided by the machine manufacturer!

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-161
Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

3.17.2 Programming via input screen form

3.17.2.1 General information

Call of CYCLE 832 in HMI menu tree

Entry to Programs/Milling area
Soft key
!! +LJK6SHHG
⇒ 6HWWLQJV
is displayed.

CYCLE832 input screen form on standard interface

3.17.2.2 Parameters of input screen form

Machining (_TOLM)
• Finishing (default)
• Rough-finishing
• Roughing
• Deselection
Variable _TOLM Coding see Parameter Description for CYCLE832.

Cycles
3-162 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

Tolerance (_TOL)

This refers to the tolerance of axes involved in

machining. The tolerance value is written to the
relevant machine or setting data depending on the
G codes (G642, COMPCAD, COMPCURV, etc.).
If the machining axis is a rotary axis, the tolerance
value is written to the relevant machine or setting
data of the rotary axis with a factor (default factor
= 8).
With G641, the tolerance value corresponds to
the ADIS value.

On initial entry, the following values are set for the tolerance:
• Finishing: 0.01 (linear axes) 0.08 deg (rotary axes)
• Rough-finishing: 0.05 (linear axes) 0.4 deg (rotary axes)
• Roughing: 0.1 (linear axes) 0.8 deg (rotary axes)
• Deselection: 0.01 (linear axes) 0.1 deg (rotary axes)
The mm/inch system of units is taken into account.
If the tolerance value is also to be effective for rotary axes, 5-axis transformation must be set
up by the machine manufacturer but not activated in every case, e.g., machining of CAM
programs with resolved rotary axes.

Transformation (_TOLM)

The transformation input field is only displayed

when the NC option is set (5 axes machining
package set).
• No
• TRAORI → Enable first 5-axis transformation
• TRAORI(2) → Enable second 5-axis
transformation

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-163
Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

Selecting the transformation number or the manufacturer cycle to call the 5-axis
transformation.
• It is possible to store the name of a manufacturer cycle, which calls the manufacturer
cycle of the transformation, in the _TOLT2 GUD7 variables. If _TOLT2 is empty (""
default), selecting transformation 1,2... calls the 5-axis transformation with TRAORI(1) or
TRAORI(2).
• To start a 5-axis transformation program to a swiveled plane (see CYCLE800), the
toolholder is deleted and the WPFRAME swivel frame (workpiece reference) is used by
TRAOR after activation.

Customization, Customizing technology

→ see Section "Customizing Technology"
• Yes
• No
The subsequent input parameters can only be changed if customization is set to "Yes".
The "Customization" input field and the subsequent "Compression", "Path control", and
"Feedforward control" input fields are not shown if the keyswitch is in position 0 or 1.

Compression, NC block compressor (_TOLM)

• COMPOF (default)
• COMPCAD
• COMPCURV
• B SPLINE
The input field is only displayed if the compressor
function option is set.
B spline is only selected if the spline interpolation
option is set.
Option → A, B and C splines/compressor function

Cycles
3-164 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

Path control (_TOLM)

• G642 (default)
• G641
• G64
With an NC block compressor with COMPCAD,
COMPCURV, G642 is permanently selected.

Feedforward control, velocity control (_TOLM)

• FFWOF SOFT (default)

• FFWON SOFT
• FFWOF BRISK
The selection of feedforward control (FFWON)
and jerk limitation (SOFT) requires that the
machine manufacturer has optimized the control
or the machining axes.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-165
Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

3.17.3 Programming via parameters

Programming
CYCLE832(_TOL, _TOLM)

Note
CYCLE832 does not absolve the machine manufacturer from performing the required
optimization tasks when starting up the machine. This involves optimization of the axes
involved in machining and the NCU settings (feedforward control, jerk limitation, etc.).

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

_TOL real Tolerance of machining axes ⇒ unit mm/inch; degrees
_TOLM integer Tolerance mode
        GHFLPDOSODFHV 
'HVHOHFWLRQ

)LQLVKLQJ GHIDXOW 
5RXJKILQLVKLQJ
5RXJKLQJ 



75$)22) GHIDXOW  
75$25,  
75$25,  

*
*

* GHIDXOW  
)):2)62)7 GHIDXOW   
)):2162)7
)):2)%5,6.

&2032) GHIDXOW   
&203&$'
&203&859
%VSOLQH

5HVHUYHG

5HVHUYHG
 6HWWLQJFDQEHFKDQJHGE\WKHPDFKLQHPDQXIDFWXUHU
VHH6HFWLRQ&XVWRPL]LQJ7HFKQRORJ\

Cycles
3-166 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

Example of CYCLE832 call

T1 D1
G54
M3 S12000
CYCLE832(0.20,1003) ;Roughing
EXTCALL "CAM_Form_Schrupp"
CYCLE832(0.01,102001) ;Finishing
EXTCALL "CAM_Form_Schlicht"
CYCLE832(0.1,0) ;Deselection (default setting)
M02

Reduced program call

The following options to call CYCLE832 with a reduced parameter transfer are available:
• CYCLE832()
Corresponds to the selection of the "Machining" "Deselection" input screen form.
The G codes used in CYCLE832 (see CYCLE832 "Interfaces") are set to the value set in
MD 20150: GCODE_RESET_VALUE.
• CYCLE832(0.01)
Entering the tolerance value.
The active G commands are not changed in the cycle.

3.17.4 Customizing technology

3.17.4.1 General information

With the "Customizing technology" input field set to "Yes", both the machine manufacturer
and the machine setter/programmer can customize the technology for HSC machining.
Always take note of the technology of the subsequent CAM program.

3.17.4.2 Customizing of machine setter/programmer

Conditions
• The manufacturer password is deleted
• Keyswitch position 2 or 3 or protection level 5, 4, 3, 2
• “Customizing technology” input variable → “Yes”

Customizing technology
In order to customize the technology, the machine setter/programmer must have precise
knowledge of the subsequent CAM machining program.
The modified data are used to generate CYCLE832 and applies to the current call of
CYCLE832.
The machine manufacturer’s default settings are not changed.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-167
Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

3.17.4.3 Customization by the machine manufacturer

Conditions
• The manufacturer password is set
• “Customizing technology” input field → “Yes”

Customizing technology
When the CYCLE832 input screen form is opened, the parameters are preassigned with the
values of the _TOLV[n], _TOLT[n] GUD7 variables.
n → machining: finishing, rough-finishing, roughing, deselection
When the parameters are changed, the values are written directly to the _TOLV[n] or
_TOLT[n] GUD7 variables.
This gives the machine manufacturer the opportunity to customize the default settings to his
machining tasks.
Example:
Calling cycle CYCL832 roughing with three axes, machining axes tolerance 0.1mm with
G642 (Siemens default values).
The machine manufacturer can modify the roughing technology with setting:
machining axes tolerance 0.3 mm, TRAORI, G641.
Each time the tolerance cycle is called, this setting is then displayed and takes effect during
the execution.

Notes for the machine manufacturer

• In order to optimize the path control response when traversing with G64, the velocity
jumps overload factor is recalculated in CYCLE832, in accordance with the following
table:
Calculation of the velocity jumps overload factor for all machining axes

IPO [msec] Overload factor

≥ 12 1.2
9 1.3
6 1.4
4 1.6
3 1.8

IPO: MD 10071: $MN_IPO_CYCLE_TIME

Overload factor MD 32310: $MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR[AX]
Computation of the overload factor by CYCLE832 can be disabled by setting the local
variable _OVL_on=0 in CYC_832T.

Cycles
3-168 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

• If the NC block compressor (COMPCAP) or smoothing (G642) is active, the tolerance is

written in CYCLE832 to the MD 33100: $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL[AX] (linear
machining axes). If rotary axes are involved in machining (TRAORI), this tolerance is
written with factor 8 to MD 33100: $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL[AX] of the rotary axes. If
a different factor is to be used, the CYC_832T FACTOR local variable can be
preassigned with the relevant value.

3.17.4.4 Customizing additional program parameters CYC_832T

General information
If the machine manufacturer requires additional responses from CYCLE832 beyond those,
which can be achieved by customizing the technology, it is possible to make the necessary
changes in the CYC_832T cycle. For this purpose, CYC_832T should be copied into the
CMA directory (HMI manufacturer) and loaded into the NCU.
The CYC_832T functions as a frame program. The machine manufacturer must document
any changes.
If it is loaded into the NCU, the CYC_832T cycle is automatically called by CYCLE832.
Customizing CYC_832T does not mean that changes to CYCLE832 are required.

Parameter
CYC_832T(_ASVS, _FACTOR, _OVL_on)

Parameter Data type Meaning

_ASVS Machine-specific customization is possible at markers _M0 to _M4.
Markers: _M4 = Init CYCLE832 call made before the actual program
sequence of CYCLE832
_M0 = Deselection of CYCLE832
_M1 = Finishing machining
_M2 = Rough-finishing machining
_M3 = Roughing machining
_FACTOR1) Rotary axis tolerance factor
_OVL_on1) 0 = Do not customize overload factor MD
$MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR
1) The _FACTOR and _OVL_on parameters are only effective at marker _M4(INIT).

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-169
Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

Example of customizing
The machine manufacturer wants to perform the following customization:
1. The rotary axis tolerance is to be 12 times higher than the tolerances of the linear axes.
2. In the "Finishing", "Rough-finishing" and "Roughing" machining modes, the path jerk (MD
$MC_MAX_PATH_JERK) is defined as value 15 and the axis jerk (MD
$MA_MAX_AX_JERK[AX]) as value 150.
3. On deselection of CYCLE832, the changed machine data must be reset to the default
settings (1000.15).

Example of customizing technology

The machine manufacturer wants to perform the following customization:
1. The rotary axis tolerance is to be 12 times higher than the tolerances of the linear axes.
The rotary axis factor is to refer always to the metric system.
2. In the "Finishing", "Rough-finishing" and "Roughing" machining modes, the path jerk (MD
$MC_MAX_PATH_JERK) is defined as value 15 and the axis jerk (MD
$MA_MAX_AX_JERK[AX]) as value 150.
3. On deselection of CYCLE832, the changed machine data must be reset to the default
settings (1000.15).
The G-groups (G-group 59) technology is used. The following machine data were set up
by the machine manufacturer for this purpose:
MD20600: MAX_PATH_JERK[0]=1000 Deselection DYNNORM
MD20600: MAX_PATH_JERK[2]=15 Roughing DYNROUG
MD20600: MAX_PATH_JERK[3]=15 Rough-Finishing DYNSEMIFIN
MD20600: MAX_PATH_JERK[4]=15 Finishing DYNFINISH
MD32431: MAX_AX_JERK[0,n]=15 n=AX1 .. AX5
MD32431: MAX_AX_JERK[2,n]=150
MD32431: MAX_AX_JERK[3,n]=150
MD32431: MAX_AX_JERK[4,n]=150
The technology-dependent changeover occurs in CYCLE832T

%_N_CYC_832T_SPF
;$PATH=/_N_CST_DIR
PROC CYC_832T(INT _ASVS,VAR REAL _FACTOR,VAR INT _OVL_on) SBLOF DISPLOF
…
_M4
_FACTOR=12
IF NOT($MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC)
_FACTOR=_FACTOR*$MN_SCALING_VALUE_INCH
ENDIF
GOTOF _MEND

_M0: ;* Deselection

Cycles
3-170 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

IF ISVAR("DYNNORM")
DYNNORM
ENDIF
GOTOF _MEND

_M1: ;* Finishing
IF ISVAR("DYNNORM")
DYNFINISH
ENDIF
GOTOF _MEND

_M2: ;* Rough-finishing
IF ISVAR("DYNSEMIFIN")
DYNSEMIFIN
ENDIF
GOTOF _MEND

_M3: ;* Roughing
IF ISVAR("DYNROUGH")
DYNROUGH
ENDIF
GOTOF _MEND

_MEND:
RET

To permit the machine data in CYC_832T to be overwritten at all protection levels during the
program run, they must be redefined with REDEF.
Example:

%_N_MGUD_DEF
;$PATH=/_N_DEF_DIR

REDEF $MC_MAX_PATH_JERK APR 7 APW 7

REDEF $MA_MAX_AX_JERK APR 7 APW 7

M30

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-171
Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

3.17.5 Ports

G-codes
List of the G commands programmed in CYCLE832:
• G64, G641, G642
• G601
• FFWON, FFWOF
• SOFT, BRISK
• COMPCAD, COMPCURV,COMPOF,B-SPLINE
• TRAORI, TRAORI(2),TRAOFOF
• UPATH

Note
The G commands should not be generated in the subsequent CAM program.
Separation of technology and geometry.

Machine data
The following machine data are evaluated in CYCLE832 in order to describe the tolerance
values accordingly:

MD number MD identifier Comment

10071 $MN_IPO_CYCLE_TIME IPO cycle
20480 $MC_SMOOTHING_MODE
20482 $MC_COMPRESSOR_MODE.
24100 5-axis transformation machine data
to
24462
The following machine data is rewritten in CYCLE832:

MD number MD identifier Comment

20490 $MC_IGNORE_OVL_FACTOR_FOR_ADIS
33100 $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL[AX] Geometry axes 1...3
33100 $MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL[AX] Rotary axes 1 and 2 1)
32310 $MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR[AX] Geometry axes 1...3
32310 $MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR[AX] Rotary axes 1 and 2 1)
1) acc. to 5-axis transformation machine data

Cycles
3-172 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.17 High speed settings - CYCLE832

Setting data
List of setting data rewritten in CYCLE832:

SD no. SD identifier Comment

42450 $SC_CONTPREC For CPRECON and G64
42465 $SC_SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL Corresponds to the tolerance of the linear
axes
42466 $SC_SMOOTH_ORI_TOL Corresponds to the tolerance of the rotary
axes
42475 $SC_COMPRESS_CONTUR_TOL For COMPCURV only
42476 $SC_COMPRESS_ORI_TOL For COMPCURV only
1) The effectiveness of the $SC_SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL and
$SC_SMOOTH_ORI_TOL setting data depends on MD20480: $MC_SMOOTHING_MODE.
The effectiveness of the $SC_COMPRESS_CONTUR_TOL and
$SC_COMPRESS_ORI_TOL setting data depends on MD20482:$MC_COMPRESSOR_MODE

Channel-specific variable GUD7

The following channel-specific variables must be activated for CYCLE832 functionality
(machine manufacturer).
The definitions make up part of the GUD7 definitions in the SIEMENS standard cycle
package.

Parameter Format Assignment Comment

_TOLT2[2] STRING[32] "" (Default) Program name of subroutine for calling the 5-
axis transformation
_TOLT[4] integer Field (4): Field for saving the machine manufacturer’s
0: Deselection technological data settings
1: Finishing Coding corresponds to the _TOLM variable
(see parameters)
2: Rough-finishing
3: Roughing
_TOLV[4] real Field (4): Field for saving the tolerance values of the
0: Deselection machining axes using the machine
manufacturer settings (see “Customizing the
1: Finishing
technology”).
2: Rough-finishing
Default values: 0.01 deselection
3: Roughing (GUD7.def) 0.01 finishing
0.05 rough-finishing
0.1 roughing

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-173
Milling cycles
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

3.18 3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

Function
With engraving cycle CYCLE60, you can mill text positioned on a line or circle. The text may
be positioned on an upward or downward circle.
The character height and overall text width and the orientation of the text can be varied using
various parameters. Character spacing or the arc angle can also be changed in the case of
circular text.
The form of the characters cannot be changed. The cycle uses a proportional font, i.e., the
individual characters are of different widths. The line width of the characters corresponds to
the tool diameter.

Linear text

Upward circular text Downward circular text

Cycles
3-174 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

Programming
CYCLE60 (_TEXT, _RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _DPR, _PA, _PO, _STA, _CP1,
_CP2, _WID, _DF, _FFD, _FFP1, _VARI, _CODEP)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

_TEXT STRING Text to be engraved (up to 91 characters)
_RTP Real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety distance (to be added to _RFP, enter without sign)
_DP real Depth (absolute)
_DPR real Depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
_PA real Reference point for text orientation (absolute)
• Position of 1st axis (for _VARI = rectangular) or
• Radius of the arc (for _VARI = polar)
_PO real Reference point for text orientation (absolute)
• Position of 2nd axis (for _VARI = rectangular) or
• Angle with 1st axis (for _VARI = polar)
_STA real Angle with 1st axis (for _VARI = linear only)
_CP1 real Center point of the circle (absolute), (for circular arrangement only)
• Position of 1st axis (for _VARI = rectangular) or
• Radius of the arc (for _VARI = polar), with reference to the circle
center
_CP2 real Center point of the circle (absolute), (for circular arrangement only)
• Position of 2nd axis (_VARI = rectangular) or
• Angle with 1st axis (for _VARI = polar)
_WID real Character height (enter without sign)
_DF real Specification of the character width (corresponds to _VARI hundred
thousandths place)
• Incremental character spacing in mm/inch or
• Incremental overall text width in mm/inch or
• Arc angle in degrees
_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
_FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-175
Milling cycles
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

Parameter Data type Meaning

_VARI
integer Machining type: (enter without sign)
Values: ONES DIGIT:
Reference point
0: Right-angled (cartesian)
1: polar
TENS DIGIT:
Text orientation
0: Linear text
1: Upward circular text
2: Downward circular text
HUNDREDS DIGIT:
Reserved
THOUSANDS DIGIT:
Reference point of the horizontal text
0: Left
1: Middle
2: Right
TEN THOUSANDS DIGIT:
Reference point of the vertical text
0: Bottom
1: Middle
2: Top
HUNDRED THOUSANDS DIGIT:
Text width
0: Character spacing
1: Overall text width (linear text only)
2: Opening angle (only for circular text)
7. digit from right (million):
center of circle
0: Right-angled (cartesian)
1: polar
_CODEP integer Code page number for character set entered
1252...Code page for Central European languages
(value 0 is internally treated as equivalent to 1252)

Cycles
3-176 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

Example 1: Engraving linear text

This program engraves the text "SINUMERIK" on a line.
The reference point is at X10 Y25 lower left. The text is 14 mm high with 5 mm spacing
between characters.

Linear

N10 G17 DIAMOF F2000 S1500 M3

N20 T1 D1
N30 M6
N40 G0 G90 Z100
N50 CYCLE60("SINUMERIK",100,0,1,-1.5,0,10,25,0,,,14,5,2500,2000,0,1252)
N60 M30

Example 2: Engraving circular text

This program engraves two texts on a circle: "SINUMERIK" on upward circle and "840D" on
a downward circle.
The reference points are in the center and bottom at X50, Y90 and at X50 Y10. The 40 mm
radius of the circle results from the distance between the reference points and the circle
center point of X50, Y50.
The text is 9 mm high, the character spacing results from the programmed arc angles of 90
degrees and 30 degrees respectively.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-177
Milling cycles
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

Circular

N10 G17 DIAMOF F2000 S800 M3

N20 T1 D1
N30 M6
N40 G0 G90 Z100
N50 CYCLE60("SINUMERIK",100,0,1,-1.5, ;Text on an upward circle
0,50,90,0,50,50,9,90,2500,2000,
201010,1252)
N60 CYCLE60("840D",100,0,1,-1.5, ;Text on a downward circle
0,50,10,0,50,50,9,34,2500,2000,201020,1252)
M30

Flow
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position, from which the starting position of the first
character can be approached without collision.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Rapid traverse positioning to the starting position in the machining plane; followed by
positioning with G0 to the reference plane brought forward by the safety distance.
• Insertion to the programmed depth at the feedrate for depth infeed _FFD.
• Machining of each character at federate for surface machining _FFP1.
• After completion of each character, retraction to the safety plane is performed with G0,
followed by positioning on the starting point for the next character with G0.
• After execution of all programmed characters, the tool is positioned on the retraction
plane with G0.

Cycles
3-178 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

Explanation of the parameters

_TEXT (text to be engraved)
The text to be engraved is limited to 91 characters. All uppercase and lowercase letters,
numerals, and most special characters in code page 1252 are permitted.
See "Character set" on next page for all permissible special characters.
If the text contains impermissible characters, the cycle is aborted with alarm 61179
"Characters do not exist".
_DP, _DPR (character depth)
The character depth can be specified as either an absolute value (_DP) or incremental value
(_DPR) in relation to the reference plane. If it is entered as a relative value, the cycle
automatically calculates the correct depth on the basis of the positions of the reference and
retraction planes.
The character depth is reached with infeed; it is not divided into separate infeed steps. Depth
infeed for each character is vertical with G1.
_PA, _PO (reference point for text orientation)
Irrespective of the linear or circular orientation of the text, the reference point can either be
programmed as rectangular (Cartesian) or polar.
If the text is of a linear orientation, the reference point is always based on the current
workpiece zero.

Reference point at right angles Polar reference point

If the text is of a circular orientation with polar reference point programming, the reference
point always refers to the circle center point.
Whether the reference point is rectangular or polar is specified in parameter _VARI.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-179
Milling cycles
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

Reference point is center of circle

_CP1, _CP2 (center of circle)

When positioned on a circle, the circle center point can also be programmed as either
rectangular (Cartesian) or polar.
Whether the circle center point is rectangular or polar is specified in parameter _VARI.
These parameters only apply to circular orientation.

Center of circle - cartesian

Cycles
3-180 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

_STA (text orientation angle)

_STA specifies the angle between the 1st axis of the plane (abscissa) and the longitudinal
axis (line, on which the text is written) of the text to be written. This parameter only applies to
linear text orientation.

Angle for text orientation

_WID (character height)

The programmed character height corresponds to the height of uppercase letters or
numerals
minus twice the mill radius.
For special characters, for example (), the dimension 0.15 * _WID must be added above and
below.
_DF (character spacing)
For linear text, either the character spacing or the overall text width may be specified. These
are incremental values.
The cycle monitors whether it is possible to implement the programmed overall width, i.e.,
whether the sum of the character widths exceeds it.
In case of error, the alarm: 61176 "_DF text length programmed too small" is output.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-181
Milling cycles
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

Linear text character spacing Overall width character spacing

For orientation on a circle, the character spacing or arc angle between the first and the last
characters can be specified. The character spacing is not the linear distance between
adjacent characters, but is applied to the arc as a radian measure.
The arc angle is always specified as a positive value. It refers to the angle between the
center line of the first character and the center line of the last character.
The character spacing, overall text width or arc angle is specified in parameter _VARI.

Character spacing with circular text Opening angle character spacing

To distribute the characters evenly in a circle, simply program _DF=360. The cycle then
distributes the characters automatically over the complete circle. There is no need to
calculate the arc angle between the first and last character.

Cycles
3-182 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Milling cycles
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

_FFD, _FFP1 (feedrate)

Feedrate _FFP1 applies to all movements in the plane (milling characters), feedrate _FFD
applies to vertical insertion with G1.
_VARI (text orientation setting)
The _VARI parameter defines the text orientation.
See the _VARI parameter in this section for values.
_CODEP (code page number)
CYCLE60 is currently only capable of engraving characters from code page 1252. Therefore,
the parameter always has the value 1252.
If a number is passed that the cycle does not know, alarm
61178 "Channel %1 block %2: Lettering cycle: code page not available" is generated and the
cycle is aborted.
Character set
In addition to letters and numerals, the following special characters (punctuation marks,
parentheses, arithmetic symbols, currency symbols, and other special characters) are
possible:

. , : ; ! ? " ' ` ´ ^ _
( ) [ ] { } | # Ø ø °
+ - * / \ ÷ × < > = ~
€ $ £ § & % @ © ®
à á â ã ä å À Á Â Ã Ä Å
è é ê ë È É Ê Ë
ì í î ï Ì Í Î Ï
ò ó ô õ ö Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö
ù ú û ü Ù Ú Û Ü
ý ÿ Ý Ÿ
ñ Ñ š Š ž Ž ç Ç ¢ ¥
ß µ ð Ð þ Þ æ Æ œ Œ

There is a special rule for programming single quotes and double quotes (speech marks), as
these characters already have a function in string processing of the NC language. They must
be written within the text string, enclosed in single quotes.
Example:
To obtain the following sentence:
This is a text with " and '.,
program the following in _TEXT:
This is a text with ' " ' and ' ' ' .

Note
For a description of parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, see Drilling, Centering – CYCLE81.

See also
Drilling, centering - CYCLE81 (Page 2-4)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 3-183
Milling cycles
3.18 Engraving cycle CYCLE60

Cycles
3-184 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
Turning cycles 4
4.1 4.1 General information
The following sections describe how turning cycles are programmed.
This section is intended to guide you in selecting cycles and assigning parameters to them.
In addition to a detailed description of the function of the individual cycles and the
corresponding parameters, you will also find a programming example at the end of each
section in order for you to familiarize yourself with the use of cycles.

4.2 4.2 Conditions

Data block for turning cycles

Turning cycles require the GUD7.DEF module. This is supplied, along with the cycles, on a
diskette.

Call and return conditions

The G functions active before the cycle is called and the programmable frame remain active
beyond the cycle.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-1
Turning cycles
4.2 Conditions

Plane definition
The machining plane must be defined prior to the cycle call. With turning, it is usually the
G18 (ZX plane). The two axes of the current plane in turning are hereinafter referred to as
the longitudinal axis (first axis of this plane) and transverse axis (second axis of this plane).
In the turning cycles, the second axis of the plane is always allocated as the transverse axis
when diameter programming is active.

;
7UDQVYHUVHD[LV

*

/RQJLWXGLQDOD[LV =

References: /PG/, Programming Guide: Fundamentals

Spindle handling
The turning cycles are written in such a way that the spindle commands contained within
them always refer to the active master spindle of the control.
If you want to use a cycle on a machine with several spindles, the active spindle must first be
defined as the master spindle.
References: /PG/, Programming Guide: Fundamentals

Messages with regard to the machining state

Status messages are displayed on the control monitor while the turning cycles are
processed. The following messages are possible:
• "Thread start <No.> - longitudinal thread machining"
• "Thread start <No.> - transversal thread machining"
In each case, <No.> stands for the number of the thread start in the message text.
These message do not interrupt the program execution and continue to be displayed until
the next message is displayed or the cycle is completed.

Cycles
4-2 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.2 Conditions

Cycle setting data

Setting data is stored in the GUD7.DEF module for the CYCLE95 stock removal cycle.
Cycle setting data _ZSD[0] can be used to vary the calculation of the MID depth infeed in
CYCLE95. If it is set to zero, the parameter is calculated as before.
• _ZSD[0]=1 MID is a radius value
• _ZSD[0]=2 MID is a diameter value
Setting data is located in the GUD7.DEF module for the CYCLE93 grooving cycle. Cycle
setting data _ZSD[4] can be used to influence retraction after the first groove.
• _ZSD[4[=1 Retraction with G0
• _ZSD[4]=0 Retraction with G1 (same as before)
There is an option in _ZSD[6] to set mirroring behavior for the CYCLE93 grooving cycle.
• _ZSD[6]=0 Tool compensations are interchanged in the cycle when mirroring is active (to
be used without an orientatable toolholder).
• _ZSD[6]=1 Tool compensations are not interchanged in the cycle when mirroring is active
(to be used with an orientatable toolholder).

Contour monitoring relative to the clearance angle of the tool

Certain turning cycles in which traversing motions with relief cutting are generated monitor
the clearance angle of the active tool for a possible contour violation. This angle is entered in
the tool compensation as a value (in the D offset under parameter P24). A value between 0
and 90 degrees (unsigned) can be entered for the angle.

1RFRQWRXUYLRODWLRQ &RQWRXUYLRODWLRQ

When entering the tool clearance angle, note that this depends on the machining type
'longitudinal' or 'face'. If you want to use one tool for longitudinal and face machining, two

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-3
Turning cycles
4.2 Conditions

tool compensations must be used in the case of different tool clearance angles.
The cycle will check whether or not the programmed contour can be machined using the
selected tool.
If the machining is not possible using this tool, then
• the cycle will abort and an error message is output (in stock removal) or
• the contour is continued to be machined and a message is output (with undercut cycles).
In this case, the contour is determined by the cutting edge geometry.

1RFRQWRXUYLRODWLRQ &RQWRXUYLRODWLRQ

Note that active scale factors or rotations in the current plane modify the relationships at the
angles, and that this cannot be allowed for in the contour monitoring that takes place within
the cycle.
If the tool clearance angle is specified with zero in the tool compensation, this monitoring will
not be performed. For details on the reactions, please refer to the individual cycles.

Turning cycles with active adapter transformation

With NCK SW 6.2 and higher, turning cycles can also be executed with an active adapter
transformation. The transformed tool offset data for the tool point direction and clearance
angle are always read.

Cycles
4-4 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle - CYCLE93

4.3 4.3 Grooving cycle - CYCLE93

Function
With the grooving cycle, you can make symmetrical and asymmetrical grooves for
longitudinal and face machining on straight contour elements. You can machine both
external and internal grooves.

Programming
CYCLE93 (SPD, SPL, WIDG, DIAG, STA1, ANG1, ANG2, RCO1, RCO2, RCI1,
RCI2, FAL1, FAL2, IDEP, DTB, VARI, _VRT)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

SPD real Starting point in the facing axis (enter without sign)
SPL real Starting point in the longitudinal axis
WIDG real Groove width (enter without sign)
DIAG real Groove depth (enter without sign)
STA1 real Angle between contour and longitudinal axis
Range of values: 0<=STA1<=180 degrees
ANG1 real Flank angle 1: on the groove side determined by the starting point (enter
without sign)
Range of values: 0<=ANG1<89.999 degrees
ANG2 real Flank angle 2: on the other side (enter without sign)
Range of values: 0<=ANG2<89.999
RCO1 real Radius/chamfer 1, externally: on the side determined by the starting point
RCO2 real Radius/chamfer 2, externally
RCI1 real Radius/chamfer 1, internally: on the starting point side

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-5
Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle - CYCLE93

Parameter Data type Meaning

RCI2 real Radius/chamfer 2, internally
FAL1 real Finishing allowance at the recess base
FAL2 real Finishing allowance at the flanks
IDEP real Infeed depth (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at recess base
VARI integer Machining type
Range of values: 1...8 and 11...18
_VRT real Variable retraction distance from contour, incremental
(enter without sign)

Example for plunge-cutting

This program is used to produce a groove externally at an oblique line in the longitudinal
direction. The starting point is on the right-hand side at X35 Z60. The cycle uses tool offsets
D1 and D2 of tool T1. The cutting tool must be defined accordingly.
;

¡

¡


¡
&KDPIHUPP




 =

DEF REAL SPD=35, SPL=60, WIDG=30, -> ;Definition of parameters with

-> DIAG=25, STA1=5, ANG1=10, ANG2=20, -> ;value assignments
-> RCO1=0, RCI1=-2, RCI2=-2, RCO2=0, ->
-> FAL1=1, FAL2=1, IDEP=10, DTB=1
DEF INT VARI=5
N10 G0 G18 G90 Z65 X50 T1 D1 S400 M3 ;Starting point before the beginning of
;the cycle
N20 G95 F0.2 ;Specification of technology values
N30 CYCLE93 (SPD, SPL, WIDG, DIAG, -> ;Cycle call
-> STA1, ANG1, ANG2, RCO1, RCO2, ->
-> RCI1, RCI2, FAL1, FAL2, IDEP, ->
-> DTB, VARI)
N40 G0 G90 X50 Z65 ;Next position
N50 M02 ;End of program

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a single block.

Cycles
4-6 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle - CYCLE93

Flow
The depth infeed (towards the base of the groove) and infeed across the width (from groove
to groove) are distributed evenly and with the greatest possible value. If the groove is being
machined on an inclined surface, travel from one groove to the next follows the shortest
path, i.e., parallel to the cone, on which the groove is being machined. During this process, a
safety clearance to the contour is calculated internally in the cycle.
Step 1
Paraxial roughing to the base of the groove in single infeed steps. After each infeed, the tool
is retracted for chip breaking.

Step 2
The groove is machined vertically to the infeed direction in one or several steps whereby
each step, in turn, is divided according to the infeed depth. From the second cut along the
groove width onwards, the tool will retract by 1 mm each before retraction.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-7
Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle - CYCLE93

Step 3
Machining of the flanks in one step if angles are programmed under ANG1 or ANG2. Infeed
along the groove width is carried out in several steps if the flank width is larger.

Step 4
Stock removal of the finishing allowance parallel to the contour from the edge to the groove
center. During this operation, the tool radius compensation is selected and deselected by the
cycle automatically.

Explanation of the parameters

SPD and SPL (starting point)
You define the starting point of the groove, from which the cycle calculates the shape, using
these coordinates. The cycle determines its own starting point. For an external groove,

Cycles
4-8 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle - CYCLE93

movement begins in the direction of the longitudinal axis, for an internal groove in the
direction of the facing axis.
Grooves at bent contour elements can be realized differently. Depending on the form and
radius of the bend, either a paraxial straight line can be laid over the maximum of the bend
or a tangential oblique line can be created in a point of the edge points of the groove.
Radii and chamfers at the groove edge make sense with bent contours only if the
appropriate edge point is on the straight line specified for the cycle.

63/

,'(3 67$

',$*

63'
:,'*

WIDG and DIAG (groove width and groove depth)

The shape of the groove is defined with the groove width (WIDG) and groove depth (DIAG)
parameters. In its calculation, the cycle always assumes the point programmed under SPD
and SPL.
If the groove width is larger than that of the active tool, the width is removed in several steps.
When doing so, the whole width is distributed by the cycle equally. The maximum infeed is
95% of the tool width after deduction of the cutting edge radii. This provides a cutting
overlap.

;
:,'*

,'(3
',$*

63/
67$
63'

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-9
Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle - CYCLE93

If the programmed groove width is less than the actual tool width, the error message 61602
"Tool width defined incorrectly" appears.
The cycle is not started and machining is aborted. The alarm will also appear if a cutting
edge width equal to zero is detected in the cycle.
STA1 (angle)
Use the STA1 parameter to program the angle of the oblique line at which the groove is to
be machined. The angle can assume values between 0 and 180 degrees and always refers
to the longitudinal axis.

Note
For transverse grooving, the angle STA1 is usually 90° (paraxial case).

ANG1 and ANG2 (flank angle)

Asymmetric grooves can be described by flank angles specified separately. The angles can
assume values between 0 and 89.999 degrees.
RCO1, RCO2 and RCI1, RCI2 (radius/chamfer)
The shape of the groove can be modified by entering radii/chamfers for the edge or base of
the groove. The values for the radii must always be positive, the values for the chamfers
must always be negative. You can use the tens setting for the VARI parameter to determine
the type of calculation for programmed milling.
• With VARI<10 (tens=0), the absolute value of this parameter is regarded as chamfer
length (chamfering with CHF programming).
• With VARI>10, it is regarded as reduced path length (chamfering with CHR
programming).

Cycles
4-10 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle - CYCLE93

FAL1 and FAL2 (finishing allowance)

You can program separate final machining allowances for the groove base and the flanks.
Roughing is performed to these final machining allowances. The same tool is then used to
machine a contour-parallel cut along the final contour.

)LQLVKLQJ
DOORZDQFH
RIIODQNV)$/

)LQLVKLQJ
DOORZDQFH
DWEDVH)$/

IDEP (infeed depth)

By programming an infeed depth, you can divide the paraxial grooving action into several
depth infeeds. After every infeed, the tool is retracted by 1 mm or by the distance
programmed under _VRT for chip breaking.
The IDEP parameter must be programmed in all cases.
DTB (dwell time)
The dwell time at the groove base should be selected such that at least one spindle
revolution is carried out. It is programmed in seconds.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-11
Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle - CYCLE93

VARI (machining type)

The units digit of the VARI parameter determines the type of processing for the groove. It
can assume the values indicated in the illustration.
The tens digit of parameter VARI determines how the chamfers are taken into account.
VARI 1...8: Chamfers are calculated as CHF
VARI 11...18: Chamfers are calculated as CHR
Input of the units digit in cycle support is distributed among three selection fields:
Field 1: longitudinal/face
Field 2: outer/inner
Field 3: starting point left/right (for longitudinal) or top/bottom (for face)

VARI Selection in cycle

support
1/11 X longitudinal,
outside, left

Z
5/15 X longitudinal, outside,
right
Z
3/13 X longitudinal,
inside, left

Z
7/17 X longitudinal, inside,
right

Z
6/16 X face, outside, top

Z
8/18 X face, outside,
bottom

Z
2/12 X face, inside, top

Z
4/14 X face, inside,
bottom

If the parameter has a different value, the cycle will abort with alarm 61002 "Machining type
defined incorrectly".
The cycle carries out a contour monitoring such that a reasonable groove contour results.
This is not the case if the radii/chamfers come into contact or intersect at the groove base or
if you try to carry out a face grooving operation at a contour segment located parallel to the
longitudinal axis. In such cases, the cycle will abort with alarm 61603 "Groove form defined
incorrectly".

Cycles
4-12 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle - CYCLE93

_VRT (variable retraction path)

The retraction path can be programmed in the _VRT parameter on the basis of the outside or
inside diameter of the groove.
If _VRT=0 (parameter not programmed), retraction is 1 mm. The retraction path is always
measured according to the programmed system of units, inch or metric.
The same retraction path is also used for chip breaking after each depth infeed into the
groove.

Note
You must activate a double-edged tool before calling the grooving cycle. You must enter the
offset values for the two tool edges in two successive D numbers of the tool, the first of
which must be activated before the cycle is called. The cycle itself defines for which
machining step it will use which of the two tool compensation values and will also enable
them automatically. After completion of the cycle, the tool compensation number
programmed prior to the cycle call is active again. If no D number is programmed for a tool
compensation when the cycle is called, the execution of the cycle is aborted with the alarm
61000 "No tool compensation active".

This cycle setting data _ZSD[4] can affect the retraction after the 1st groove.
_ZSD[4]=0: means retraction with G1 as before,
_ZSD[4]=1: means retraction with G0.
Cycle data _ZSD[6] can be set to define how the tool offset is handled in the cycle.
_ZSD[6]=0: TO is interchanged internally in the cycle (without orientatable toolholder)
_ZSD[6]=1: TO is not interchanged internally in the cycle (with orientatable toolholder)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-13
Turning cycles
4.4 Undercut cycle - CYCLE94

4.4 4.4 Undercut cycle - CYCLE94

Function
With this cycle, you can machine undercuts of form E and F in accordance with DIN509 with
the usual load on a finished part diameter of >3 mm.
Another cycle, CYCLE96, exists for producing thread undercuts (see Section "Thread
Undercut - CYCLE96).

)RUP)

)RUP(

Programming
CYCLE94 (SPD, SPL, FORM, _VARI)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

SPD real Starting point in the facing axis (enter without sign)
SPL real Starting point of the contour in the longitudinal axis (enter without sign)
FORM char Definition of the form
Values: E (for form E), F (for form F)
_VARI integer Specification of undercut position
Values:
0 (corresponding to the tool point direction of the tool),
1 to 4 (define position)

Cycles
4-14 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.4 Undercut cycle - CYCLE94

Example of Undercut_Form_E
You can machine an undercut of form E with this program.

)250(



 =

N10 T25 D3 S300 M3 G18 G95 F0.3 ;Specification of technology values

N20 G0 G90 Z100 X50 ;Selection of starting position
N30 CYCLE94(20, 60, "E") ; Cycle call
N40 G90 G0 Z100 X50 ;Approach next position
N50 M02 ;End of program

Flow
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position from which each undercut can be approached
without collision.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of the starting point determined in the cycle by using G0
• Selection of the cutter radius compensation according to the active tool point direction
and traveling along the undercut contour at the feedrate programmed prior to the cycle
call
• Retraction to the starting point with G0 and deselection of the cutter radius compensation
with G40

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-15
Turning cycles
4.4 Undercut cycle - CYCLE94

Explanation of the parameters

SPD and SPL (starting point)
The finished part diameter for the undercut is entered in the SPD parameter. You define the
finished part dimensions in the longitudinal axis using the SPL parameter.
If a finial diameter of <3 mm results for the value programmed for SPD, the cycle is
canceled, and alarm 61601 "Finished part diameter too small" is issued.

63/

63'

FORM (definition)
Form E and form F are fixed in DIN509 and must be defined using this parameter.
If the parameter has a value other than E or F, the cycle aborts and creates alarm 61609
"Form defined incorrectly".

;
)250(

6/
)RUZRUNSLHFHVZLWKRQH
PDFKLQHGVXUIDFH

)250) =

)RUZRUNSLHFHVZLWK 6/
WZRPDFKLQHGVXUIDFHV
DWULJKWDQJOHV

Cycles
4-16 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.4 Undercut cycle - CYCLE94

_VARI (undercut position)

The position of the undercut can be either specified directly or derived from the tool point
direction with the _VARI parameter.
VARI=0: According to tool point direction
The tool point direction is determined by the cycle automatically from the active tool
compensation. The cycle can then only work with tool point directions 1 to 4.
If the cycle detects either of the tool point directions 5 ... 9, the alarm 61608 "Wrong tool
point direction programmed" and the cycle is aborted.

;

6/ 6/

=

6/ 6/

_VARI=1...4: Definition of undercut position

The cycle determines its starting point automatically. This is by 2 mm away from the end
diameter and by 10 mm away from the finishing dimension in the longitudinal axis. The
position of this starting point referred to the programmed coordinate values is determined by
the tool point direction of the active tool.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-17
Turning cycles
4.4 Undercut cycle - CYCLE94

When _VARI<>0, the following applies:

• The actual tool point direction is not checked, i.e., all directions can be used if
technologically suitable;
• No special consideration is given to functions such as adapter transformation or
orientatable toolholders in the cycle. It is assumed that the user is familiar with the
conditions on the machine and has specified the position correctly;
• Similarly, mirroring is not specially treated, the user must be responsible for making the
correct settings.

Note
You must activate a tool offset before you call the cycles. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted
after alarm 61000 "No tool compensation active" has been output.

The clearance angle of the active tool is monitored in the cycle if an appropriate value is
specified in the appropriate parameter of the tool compensation. If it turns out that the form of
the undercut cannot be machined using the selected tool since its tool clearance angle is too
small, the message "Changed form of undercut" is displayed on the control system. The
machining, however, is continued.

Cycles
4-18 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

4.5 4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

Function
With the stock removal cycle, you can machine any user-programmed contour from a blank
with paraxial stock removal. The contour may contain relief cut elements. It is possible to
machine contours using longitudinal and face machining, both externally and internally. The
technology can be freely selected (roughing, finishing, complete machining). When roughing
the contour, paraxial cuts from the maximum programmed infeed depth are programmed and
burrs are also removed parallel to the contour after an intersection point with the contour has
been reached. Roughing is performed up to the final machining allowance programmed.
Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing. The tool radius compensation is
selected and deselected by the cycle automatically.

Programming
CYCLE95 (NPP, MID, FALZ, FALX, FAL, FF1, FF2, FF3, VARI, DT, DAM,
_VRT)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-19
Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

NPP string Name of contour subroutine
MID real Infeed depth (enter without sign)
FALZ real Finishing allowance in the longitudinal axis (enter without sign)
FALX real Finishing allowance in the transverse axis (enter without sign)
FAL real Finishing allowance according to the contour (enter without sign)
FF1 real Feedrate for roughing without undercut
FF2 real Feedrate for insertion into relief cut elements
FF3 real Feedrate for finishing
VARI integer Machining type
Range of values: 1…12, 201…212
HUNDREDS DIGIT:
Values:
0: With rounding at the contour
No residual corners remain, the contour is rounded with overlapping. This
means that rounding is performed across multiple intersections.
2: Without rounding at the contour
Contours are always rounded to the previous roughing intersection
followed by retraction. Residual corners can remain, depending on the
ratio of the tool radius to infeed depth (MID).
DT real Dwell time fore chip breaking when roughing
DAM real Path length after which each roughing step is interrupted for chip
breaking
_VRT real Lift-off distance from contour when roughing, incremental (to be entered
without sign)

Cycles
4-20 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

Stock removal cycle example 1

The contour shown in the illustration to explain the defining parameters is to be machined
longitudinally externally by complete machining. Axis-specific finishing allowances are
specified. Cutting will not be interrupted when roughing. The maximum infeed is 5 mm. The
contour is stored in a separate program.

3 

3 

3 

5
3 
3 
3 

DEF STRING[8] UPNAME ;Definition of a variable for the contour

;name
N10 T1 D1 G0 G18 G95 S500 M3 Z125 X81 ;Approach position before cycle call
UPNAME="CONTOUR_1" ;Assignment of subroutine name
N20 CYCLE95 (UPNAME, 5, 1.2, 0.6, , -> ;Cycle call
-> 0.2, 0.1, 0.2, 9, , , 0.5)
N30 G0 G90 X81 ;Reapproach starting position
N40 Z125 ;Traverse axis by axis
N50 M30 ;End of program
%_N_ KONTUR_1_SPF ;Beginning of contour subroutine
;$PATH=/_N_SPF_DIR
N100 G1 Z120 X37 ;Traverse axis by axis
N110 Z117 X40
N120 Z112 ;Rounding with radius 5
N130 G1 Z95 X65 RND=5 ;Traverse axis by axis
N140 Z87
N150 Z77 X29
N160 Z62
N170 Z58 X44
N180 Z52
N190 Z41 X37
N200 Z35
N210 G1 X76
N220 M17 ;End of subroutine

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a single block.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-21
Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

Stock removal cycle example 2

The stock removal contour is defined in the calling program. The program is completed after
the stock removal cycle.

3 

3 

3 

3 
3 

N110 G18 DIAMOF G90 G96 F0.8

N120 S500 M3
N130 T11 D1
N140 G0 X70
N150 Z60
N160 CYCLE95 (“ANFANG:ENDE“,2.5,0.8, -> ; Cycle call
-> 0.8,0,0.8,0.75,0.6,1)
N170 M02
START:
N180 G1 X10 Z100 F0.6
N190 Z90
N200 Z=AC(70) ANG=150
N210 Z=AC(50) ANG=135
N220 Z=AC(50) X=AC(50)
END:
N230 M02

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a single block.

Cycles
4-22 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

Flow
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position is any position from which the contour starting point can be approached
without collision.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• The cycle starting point is calculated internally and approached with G0 in both axes at
the same time.
Roughing without relief cut elements:
• The paraxial infeed to the current depth is calculated internally and approached with G0.
• Approach of paraxial roughing intersection point with G1 and at feedrate FF1.
• Round parallel to the contour at contour + final machining allowance to the last roughing
intersection point with G1/G2/G3 and FF1.
• Lift-off by the amount programmed under _VRT in each axis and retraction with G0.
• This sequence is repeated until the total depth of the machining step is reached.
• When roughing without relief cut elements, retraction to the cycle starting point is carried
out axis by axis.

Roughing the relief cut elements:

• Approach of the starting point for the next relief cut axis by axis with G0 When doing so,
an additional cycle-internal safety clearance is observed.
• Infeed along the contour + finishing allowance with G1/G2/G3 and FF2.
• Approach of paraxial roughing intersection point with G1 and at feedrate FF1.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-23
Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

• Round to the last roughing intersection. Lift off and retract as in the first machining
section.
• If there are further relief cut elements, this sequence is repeated for each relief cut.


;

=
5RXJKLQJZLWKRXWUHOLHIFXW
5RXJKLQJRIWKHILUVWUHOLHIFXW
5RXJKLQJRIWKHVHFRQGUHOLHIFXW

Finishing:
• The calculated cycle starting point is approached in both axes simultaneously with G0
and tool nose radius compensation is selected.
• Motion continues with both axes simultaneously and with G0 minus an amount equivalent
to the final machining allowance + tool nose radius + 1 mm safety clearance ahead of the
contour starting point, and from there with G1 to the contour starting point.
• Finish cutting along the contour with G1/G2/G3 and FF3.
• Retraction to starting point with both axes and G0.

Cycles
4-24 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

Explanation of the parameters

NPP (name)
In this parameter, you enter either the name of the contour subroutine or the block number or
labels for a program section. This contour subroutine must not be a subroutine with a
parameter list.
The name of the contour subroutine is subject to all name conventions described in the
Programming Guide.

)$/;
133

)$/=

References: /PG/ Programming Guide

The machining contour can also be a section of the calling routine or from any other
program. The section is identified by start or end labels or by block numbers. In this case,
the program name and labels/block number are identified by an ":".
Examples:
NPP="KONTUR_1" ;The stock removal contour is the
;complete "Contour_1" program.
NPP="ANFANG:ENDE ;The stock removal contour is
;defined as a section in the calling
;program, which starts from the
;block containing label ANFANG to
;the block containing label ENDE.
NPP="/_N_SPF_DIR/_N_KONTUR_1_SPF:N130:N210" ;The stock removal contour is
;defined in blocks N130 to N210 in
;the CONTOUR_1 program.
;The program name must be
;entered complete with path and
;extension, see description of
;CALL in References: /PGA/
;Programming Guide Advanced.

Note
If the section is defined by block numbers, it must be noted that, for the NPP section, these
block numbers must be adjusted if the program is modified and subsequently renumbered.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-25
Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

MID (infeed depth)

You define the maximum possible infeed depth for the roughing operation in the MID
parameter. With SW 4 and higher, the interpretation of this parameter depends on the cycle
setting data _ZSD[0] (see Section "Requirements").
The cycle automatically calculates the current infeed depth for roughing. With contours
containing relief cut elements, the roughing process is divided by the cycle into individual
roughing sections. The cycle calculates a new current infeed depth for each roughing
section. This infeed depth is always between the programmed infeed depth and the half of its
value. The number of required roughing steps is determined on the basis of the total depth of
a roughing section and of the programmed maximum infeed depth to which the total depth to
be machined is distributed equally. This provides optimum cutting conditions. The machining
steps shown in the figure above are used for roughing this contour.
Example of calculating the current infeed depth:
Machining section 1 has a total depth of 39 mm. If the maximum infeed depth is 5 m, eight
roughing cuts are required. These are carried out with an infeed of 4.875 mm.
In machining step 2, 8 roughing steps, too, are carried out with an infeed of 4.5 mm each
(total difference 36 mm).
In machining step 3, two roughing passes are carried out with a current infeed of 3.5 (total
difference 7 mm).

;
[



[

[

FAL, FALZ and FALX (finishing allowance)

A finishing allowance for roughing can be specified either using the parameters FALZ and
FALX if you want to specify different finishing allowances axis-specifically or via the
parameter FAL for a finishing allowance that follows the contour. In this case, this value is
taken into account in both axes as a finishing allowance.
No plausibility check is carried out for the programmed values. In other words: If all three
parameters are assigned values, all these finishing allowances are taken into account by the
cycle.

Cycles
4-26 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

It is, however, reasonable to decide either on the one or other form of definition of a finishing
allowance.
Roughing is always carried out up to these finishing allowances. After each paraxial roughing
operation, the resulting residual corners are immediately cut parallel to the contour, so that
these do not have to be removed after the roughing operation is completed. If no finishing
allowances are programmed, stock is removed when roughing up to the final contour.
The finishing machining mode does not consider programmed values for the final machining
allowance. Turning always takes place to the finishing dimension.
FF1, FF2 and FF3 (feedrate)
You can define different feedrates for the different machining steps, as shown in the figure
on the right.

***

; *
)) 5RXJKLQJ

))

))

;
)LQLVKLQJ

))

VARI (machining type)

You can call the machining type in the cycle support as follows:

0DFKLQLQJ 5RXJKLQJ URXJKLQJILQLVKLQJFRPSOHWHPDFKLQLQJ

6HOHFWLRQ /RQJLWXGLQDO ORQJLWXGLQDOIDFH

6HOHFWLRQ 2XWVLGH RXWVLGHLQVLGH 

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-27
Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

The machining type can be found in the table below.

Value Processing Selection Selection

1/201 Roughing Longitudinal External
2/202 Roughing Transverse External
3/203 Roughing Longitudinal Internal
4/204 Roughing Transverse Internal
5/205 Finishing Longitudinal External
6/206 Finishing Transverse External
7/207 Finishing Longitudinal Internal
8/208 Finishing Transverse Internal
9/209 Complete machining Longitudinal External
10/210 Complete machining Transverse External
11/211 Complete machining Longitudinal Internal
12/212 Complete machining Transverse Internal

Cycles
4-28 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

/RQJLWXGLQDORXWVLGH
; 9$5, [[[[[[

/RQJLWXGLQDOLQVLGH
9$5, [[[[[[
=

;

2UDIWHU
UHFKXFNLQJ

/RQJLWXGLQDOLQVLGH
9$5, [[[[[[[[[
)DFHLQVLGH =
9$5, [[[[[[
;
)DFHRXWVLGH
9$5, [[[[[[

=

;

2UDIWHU
UHFKXFNLQJ

)DFHLQVLGH
9$5, [[[[[[
=

Note
In longitudinal machining, the infeed is always carried out along the transversal axis, and in
face machining - along the longitudinal axis.
External machining means that the infeed is carried out in the direction of the negative axis.
With internal machining, the infeed is carried out in the direction of the positive axis.
When roughing in CYCLE95, you can choose between "with rounding" or "without rounding"
at the contour. In order to do so, the HUNDREDS DIGIT is incorporated in the VARI
parameter.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-29
Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

The VARI parameter is subjected to a plausibility check. If you select an invalid value, the
cycle is aborted and alarm 61002 "Incorrect machining type defined" is output.
DT and DAM (dwell time and path length)
With these two parameters, you can program an interruption of the individual roughing cuts
after a defined displacement for the purposes of chip breaking. These parameters are only
relevant for roughing. The parameter DAM is used to define the maximum distance after
which chip breaking is to be carried out. In DT, you can also program a dwell time to be
executed at each of the interruption points. If no distance is specified for the cut interruption
(DAM=0), uninterrupted roughing steps without dwell times are created.

8QLQWHUUXSWHGSDUD[LDOFXW

;
'$0 *
,QIHHGPRWLRQ

* * * *

_VRT (lift-off distance)

Parameter _VRT can be used to program the amount by which the tool is retracted in both
axes when roughing.
If _VRT=0 (parameter not programmed), liftoff is 1 mm. The lift-off distance is always
measured in inches or in metric units depending on the programmed measuring system, i.e.,
_VRT=1 for inch -> programming produces a lift-off of 1 inch.

Note
Contour definition
You program the contour in the form of NC blocks. The contour must contain at least 3
blocks with motions in the two axes of the machining plane.
The machining plane (G17, G18, G19) is set in the main program before the cycle is called
or applied according to the basic setting of this G-group on the machine It cannot be altered
in the contour.
If the contour program is shorter, the cycle is aborted after the alarms 10933 "Number of
contour blocks contained in the contour program not sufficient" and 61606 "Error in contour
preparation" have been output.
Relief cut elements can be connected directly one after the other.
Blocks without motions in the plane can be written without restrictions.

Cycles
4-30 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

In the cycle, all traversing blocks are prepared for the first two axes of the current plane
since only these are involved in the cutting process. The contour may contain motions for
other axes; however, their travel distances do not take effect during execution of the cycle.
Only straight line and circle programming with G0, G1, G2 and G3 are permitted as the
geometry in the contour. Furthermore, it is also possible to program the commands for
rounding and chamfer. If any other motion commands are programmed in the contour, the
cycle is aborted with the alarm 10930 "Illegal type of interpolation in the stock removal
contour".
The first block with a traversing motion in the current machining plane must contain a motion
command G0, G1, G2 or G3; otherwise, the cycle is canceled, and alarm 15800 "Incorrect
prerequisites for CONTPRON" is issued. This alarm is also activated when G41/G42 is
active.
The starting point of the contour is the first position in the machining plane programmed in
the contour.
The maximum number of blocks with movements in the plane permissible in the contour
depends on the type of contour. In principle, there is no limit to the possible number of relief
cuts.
If a contour contains more contour elements than the cycle-internal memory can hold, the
cycle is aborted with alarm 10934 "Contour table overrun".
Machining must then be divided into several machining sections, each of which is
represented by its own contour subroutine and each cycle is called separately.
If the maximum diameter in one contour is not located within the programmed end point or
starting point of the contour, the cycle automatically extends a paraxial straight line
extending up to the maximum point of the contour at the end of the machining operation and
this part of the contour is then removed as a relief cut.

;

$GGHG
VWUDLJKWOLQH

(QGSRLQW

6WDUWLQJ
SRLQW

=

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-31
Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

Contour direction
The direction in which the stock removal contour is programmed can be freely selected. In
the cycle, the machining direction is defined automatically. In complete machining, the
contour is finished in the same direction as machining was carried out when roughing.
If only finishing is selected, the contour is always traversed in the programmed direction.
When deciding on the machining direction, the first and the last programmed contour points
are taken into account. For this reason, both coordinates must always be programmed in the
first block of the contour subroutine.
Contour monitoring
The cycle performs contour monitoring of the following:
• Clearance angle of the active tool
• Circular programming of arcs with an arc angle > 180 degrees
With relief cut elements, the cycle checks whether the machining is possible using the active
tool. If the cycle detects that this machining will result in a contour violation, it will be aborted
after alarm 61604 "Active tool violates programmed contour" has been output.
If the tool clearance angle is specified with zero in the tool compensation, this monitoring will
not be performed.
If too large arcs are found in the compensation, alarm 10931 "Incorrect machining contour"
appears.
Overhanging contours cannot be machined by CYCLE95. Contours of this type are not
monitored by the cycle and consequently there is no alarm.

;
([DPSOHRIDQRYHUKDQJLQJFRQWRXUHOHPHQW
LQWKHUHOLHIFXWWKDWFDQQRWEHPDFKLQHG
0DFKLQLQJGLUHFWLRQ

Cycles
4-32 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95

Start point
The cycle determines the starting point for the machining operation automatically. The
starting point is located in the axis in which the depth infeed is carried out, shifted from the
contour by the amount of the finishing allowance + lift-off distance (parameter _VRT). In the
other axis, it is by finishing allowance + _VRT ahead of the contour starting point.
When the starting point is approached, the cutter radius compensation is selected internally
in the cycle. The last point before the cycle is called must therefore be selected such that this
approach is possible without collision and space enough is provided to carry out the
appropriate compensatory motion.
Cycle approach strategy
In roughing, the starting point determined by the cycle is always approached with both axes
simultaneously, and in finishing, axis by axis. In finishing, the infeed axis traverses first.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-33
Turning cycles
4.6 Thread undercut - CYCLE96

4.6 4.6 Thread undercut - CYCLE96

Function
This cycle is for machining thread undercuts in accordance with DIN 76 on parts with a
metric ISO thread.

Programming
CYCLE96 (DIATH, SPL, FORM, _VARI)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

DIATH real Nominal diameter of the thread
SPL real Starting point on the contour of the longitudinal axis
FORM char Definition of the form
Values:
A (for form A)
B (for form B)
C (for form C)
D (for form D)
_VARI integer Specification of undercut position
Values:
0: corresponding to tool point direction
1 to 4: Define position

Cycles
4-34 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.6 Thread undercut - CYCLE96

Example of Thread Undercut_Form_A

This program can be used to program a thread undercut of form A.




=

N10 D3 T1 S300 M3 G95 F0.3 ;Specification of technology values

N20 G0 G18 G90 Z100 X50 ;Selection of starting position
N30 CYCLE96 (10, 60, "A") ; Cycle call
N40 G90 G0 X30 Z100 ;Approach next position
N50 M30 ;End of program

Flow
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position from which each thread undercut can be
approached without collision.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of the starting point determined in the cycle by using G0
• Selection of the tool radius compensation according to the active tool point direction.
Traversing along the undercut contour using the feedrate programmed before the cycle
was called
• Retraction to the starting point with G0 and deselection of tool radius compensation with
G40.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-35
Turning cycles
4.6 Thread undercut - CYCLE96

Explanation of the parameters

DIATH (nominal diameter)
With this cycle, you can machine thread undercuts for metric ISO threads from M3 to M68.
If a finial diameter of <3 mm results for the value programmed for DIATH, the cycle is
canceled, and alarm 61601 "Finished part diameter too small" is issued.
If the parameter has a value other than that specified in DIN76 Part 1, the cycle is also
canceled, generating alarm 61001 "Thread pitch incorrectly defined".

63/

',$7+

SPL (starting point)

The finished dimension in the longitudinal axis is defined using the parameter SPL.

Cycles
4-36 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.6 Thread undercut - CYCLE96

FORM (definition)
Thread undercuts of the forms A and B are defined for external threads, form A for standard
run-outs of threads, and form B for short run-outs of threads. Thread undercuts of the forms
C and D are used for internal threads, form C for a standard run-out of the thread, and form
D for a short run-out.

)2506$DQG%
)2506&DQG'
63/
¡

5
 63/
5
',$7+

',$7+

5

¡

If the parameter has a value other than A ... D, the cycle aborts and creates alarm 61609
"Form defined incorrectly".
Internally in the cycle, the tool radius compensation is selected automatically.
_VARI (undercut position)
The position of the undercut can be either specified directly or derived from the tool point
direction with the _VARI parameter. See _VARI for CYCLE94.
The cycle will find the starting point determined by the tool point direction of the active tool
and the thread diameter automatically. The position of this starting point referred to the
programmed coordinate values is determined by the tool point direction of the active tool.
For the forms A and B, the undercut angle of the active tool is monitored in the cycle. If it is
detected that the form of the undercut cannot be machined using the selected tool, the
message "Changed form of undercut" is displayed on the control system; the machining,
however, is continued.

Note
Before calling the cycle, a tool compensation must be activated. Otherwise, the cycle is
terminated and the error message 61000 "No tool compensation active" is issued.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-37
Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting - CYCLE97

4.7 4.7 Thread cutting - CYCLE97

Function
With this thread cutting cycle, you can machine cylindrical and tapered outside and inside
threads with constant pitch in longitudinal or face machining. The thread can be single or
multiple. With multiple threads, the individual thread turns are machined one after the other.
Infeed is automatic. You can select either constant infeed per cut or constant cross-section
of cut.
Right-hand or left hand thread is determined by the direction of rotation of the spindle which
must be programmed prior to the cycle start.
Neither feedrate nor spindle override have any effect in thread travel blocks. The spindle
override must not be changed during thread machining.

References: /PG/, Programming Manual: Fundamentals, Section “Thread cutting with

constant lead, G33”

Note
To be able to use this cycle, a speed-controlled spindle with position measuring system is
required.

Programming
CYCLE97 (PIT, MPIT, SPL, FPL, DM1, DM2, APP, ROP, TDEP, FAL, IANG,
NSP, NRC, NID, VARI, NUMT, _VRT)

Cycles
4-38 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting - CYCLE97

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

PIT real Thread pitch as a value (enter without sign)
MPIT real Thread pitch as thread size
Range of values: 3 (for M3) ... 60 (for M60)
SPL real Thread starting point in the longitudinal axis
FPL real Thread end point in the longitudinal axis
DM1 real Thread diameter at the starting point
DM2 real Thread diameter at the end point
APP real Run-in path (enter without sign)
ROP real Run-out path (enter without sign)
TDEP real Thread depth (enter without sign)
FAL real Finishing allowance (enter without sign)
IANG real Infeed angle
Range of values:
"+" (for flank infeed at the flank)
"–" (for alternating flank infeed)
NSP integer Starting point offset for the first thread turn (enter without sign)
NRC integer Number of roughing cuts (enter without sign)
NID integer Number of idle passes (enter without sign)
VARI integer Definition of the machining type for the thread
Range of values: 1 ... 4
NUMT integer Number of thread turns (enter without sign)
_VRT real Variable retraction distance based on initial diameter, incremental (enter
without sign)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-39
Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting - CYCLE97

Example of thread cutting

With this program, you can cut an M42x2 metric outside thread with flank infeed. Infeed is
carried out with constant cutting cross-section. 5 roughing cuts are carried out at a thread
depth of 1.23 mm without finishing allowance. At completion of this operation, 2 idle passes
will be carried out.

0[

=


DEF REAL MPIT=42, SPL=0, FPL=-35, ;Definition of parameters with

DM1=42, DM2=42, APP=10, ROP=3, ;value assignments

TDEP=1.23, FAL=0, IANG=30, NSP=0

DEF INT NRC=5, NID=2, VARI=3, NUMT=1
N10 G0 G18 G90 Z100 X60 ;Selection of starting position
N20 G95 D1 T1 S1000 M4 ;Specification of technology values
N30 CYCLE97 ( , MPIT, SPL, FPL, DM1, -> ;Cycle call
-> DM2, APP, ROP, TDEP, FAL, IANG, ->
-> NSP, NRC, NID, VARI, NUMT)
N40 G90 G0 X100 Z100 ;Approach next position
N50 M30 ;End of program

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a single block.

Cycles
4-40 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting - CYCLE97

Flow
Position reached prior to cycle start:
Starting position is any position from which the programmed thread starting point + run-in
path can be approached without collision.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of the starting point determined in the cycle at the beginning of the run-in path
for the first thread turn with G0
• Infeed for roughing according to the infeed type defined under VARI.
• Thread cutting is repeated according to the programmed number of roughing cuts.
• The finishing allowance is removed in the following step with G33.
• This step is repeated according to the number of idle passes.
• The whole sequence of motions is repeated for each further thread turn.

Explanation of the parameters

PIT and MPIT (value and thread size)
The thread pitch is an axis-parallel value and is specified without sign. To produce metric
cylindrical threads, it is also possible to specify the thread start as a thread size via the
parameter MPIT (M3 to M60). Only one of the two parameters should be used by option. If
they contain contradicting values, the cycle generates the alarm 61001 "Invalid thread pitch"
and is aborted.

)3/ 3,7 63/

523 $33
7'(3

)$/
'0 '0

DM1 and DM2 (diameter)

This parameter is used to set the thread diameter of the start and end points of the thread.
In the case of internal threads, this is the tap-hole diameter.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-41
Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting - CYCLE97

Interrelation SPL, FPL, APP and ROP (starting, end point, run-in and run-out path)
The programmed starting point (SPL) or end point (FPL) constitutes the original starting point
of the thread. The starting point used in the cycle, however, is the starting point brought
forward by the run-in path APP, and, correspondingly, the end point is the programmed end
point brought back by the run-out path ROP. In the transversal axis, the starting point
defined by the cycle is always by 1 mm above the programmed thread diameter. This lift-off
plane is generated automatically within the control system.
Interrelation TDEP, FAL, NRC and NID (thread depth, finishing allowance, number of cuts)
The programmed finishing allowance acts paraxially and is subtracted from the specified
thread depth TDEP; the remainder is divided into roughing cuts.
The cycle will calculate the individual infeed depth automatically, depending on the VARI
parameter.
When the thread depth is divided into infeeds with constant cutting cross-section, the cutting
force will remain constant over all roughing cuts. In this case, the infeed will be performed
using different values for the infeed depth.
A second variant is the distribution of the whole thread depth to constant infeed depths.
When doing so, the cutting cross-section becomes larger from cut to cut, but with smaller
values for the thread depth, this technology can result in better cutting conditions.
The finishing allowance FAL is removed after roughing in one step. Then the idle passes
programmed under parameter NID are executed.
IANG (infeed angle)
You define the infeed angle with the IANG parameter. If you wish to infeed at a right angle to
the cutting direction in the thread, the value of this parameter must be set to zero. In other
words, the parameter can also be omitted from the parameter list, since in this case, it is
automatically loaded with zero by default. If you wish to infeed along the flanks, the absolute
value of this parameter may amount maximally to the half of the flank angle of the tool.

,$1*
ƀ

,$1* ƀ


Cycles
4-42 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting - CYCLE97

The execution of the infeed is defined by the sign of this parameter. With a positive value,
infeed is always carried out at the same flank, and with a negative value, at both flanks
alternating. The infeed type with alternating flanks is only possible for cylindrical threads. If
the value of IANG for tapered threads is nonetheless negative, the cycle will carry out a flank
infeed along a flank.

,QIHHGDORQJ ,QIHHGZLWK
DIODQN DOWHUQDWLQJIODQNV

NSP (starting point offset)

With this parameter, you can program the angular value that defines the point of the first cut
of the first thread start on the circumference of the turned part. This is a starting point offset.
The parameter can assume values between 0.0001 and +359.9999 degrees. If no starting
point offset is specified or the parameter is omitted from the parameter list, the first thread
turn automatically starts at the zero-degree mark.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-43
Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting - CYCLE97

VARI (machining type)

With the VARI parameter, you define if machining is to be internal or external and, with which
technology the infeed will be machined during roughing. The VARI parameter can assume
values between 1 and 4 with the following meaning:

,QIHHGZLWKFRQVWDQW
LQIHHGGHSWK

,QIHHGZLWKFRQVWDQWFXWWLQJ
FURVVVHFWLRQ

Value external/internal Const. infeed/const. cutting cross-section

1 External Constant infeed
2 Internal Constant infeed
3 External Constant cutting cross-section
4 Internal Constant cutting cross-section

If a different value is programmed for the VARI parameter, the cycle is aborted after output of
alarm 61002 "Machining type defined incorrectly".
NUMT (number of thread turns)
You specify the number of thread starts for a multiple thread with the NUMT parameter. For
a single-turn thread, the parameter must be assigned zero or can be dropped completely in
the parameter list.
The thread turns are distributed equally over the circumference of the turned part; the first
thread turn is determined by the NSP parameter.
To produce a multiple-turn thread with an asymmetrical arrangement of the thread turns on
the circumference, the cycle for each thread turn must be called when programming the
appropriate starting point offset.

Cycles
4-44 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting - CYCLE97

GHJUHHPDUNHU
6WDUWRI 6WDUWRI
VWWKUHDG WKWKUHDG
163

6WDUWRI 6WDUWRI
QGWKUHDG UGWKUHDG

1807+ 

_VRT (variable retraction path)

The retraction path can be programmed on the basis of the initial thread diameter in the
_VRT parameter. When _VRT = 0 (parameter not programmed), the retraction path is 1 mm.
The retraction path is always measured according to the programmed system of units, inch
or metric.

Note
Differentiation between longitudinal and face thread
The decision whether a longitudinal or face thread is to be machined is made by the cycle
itself. This depends on the angle of the taper at which the threads are cut. If the angle at the
taper ≤45 degrees, the longitudinal axis thread is machined, otherwise it will be the face
thread.

; ;

$QJOH¡ $QJOH!¡

= =
/RQJLWXGLQDOWKUHDG )DFHWKUHDG

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-45
Turning cycles
4.8 Thread chaining - CYCLE98

4.8 4.8 Thread chaining - CYCLE98

Function
With this cycle, you can produce several concatenated cylindrical or tapered threads with a
constant pitch in longitudinal or face machining, all of which can have different thread
pitches.
The thread can be single or multiple. With multiple threads, the individual thread turns are
machined one after the other.
Infeed is automatic. You can select either constant infeed per cut or constant cross-section
of cut. Right-hand or left hand thread is determined by the direction of rotation of the spindle
which must be programmed prior to the cycle start.
Neither feedrate nor spindle override have any effect in thread travel blocks. The spindle
override must not be changed during thread machining.

References: /PG/, Programming Manual: Fundamentals, Section “Thread cutting with

constant lead, G33”

Programming
CYCLE98 (PO1, DM1, PO2, DM2, PO3, DM3, PO4, DM4, APP, ROP, TDEP,
FAL, IANG, NSP, NRC, NID, PP1, PP2, PP3, VARI, NUMT, _VRT)

Cycles
4-46 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.8 Thread chaining - CYCLE98

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

PO1 real Thread starting point in the longitudinal axis
DM1 real Thread diameter at the starting point
PO2 real First intermediate point in the longitudinal axis
DM2 real Diameter at the first intermediate point
PO3 real Second intermediate point
DM3 real Diameter at the second intermediate point
PO4 real Thread end point in the longitudinal axis
DM4 real Diameter at the end point
APP real Run-in path (enter without sign)
ROP real Run-out path (enter without sign)
TDEP real Thread depth (enter without sign)
FAL real Finishing allowance (enter without sign)
IANG real Infeed angle
Range of values:
"+" (for flank infeed at the flank)
"–" (for alternating flank infeed)
NSP real Starting point offset for the first thread turn (enter without sign)
NRC integer Number of roughing cuts (enter without sign)
NID integer Number of idle passes (enter without sign)
PP1 real Thread pitch 1 as a value (enter without sign)
PP2 real Thread pitch 2 as a value (enter without sign)
PP3 real Thread pitch 3 as a value (enter without sign)
VARI integer Definition of the machining type for the thread
Range of values: 1 ... 4
NUMT integer Number of thread turns (enter without sign)
_VRT real Variable retraction distance based on initial diameter, incremental (enter
without sign)

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-47
Turning cycles
4.8 Thread chaining - CYCLE98

Example of thread chain

With this program, you can produce a chain of threads, starting with a cylindrical thread. The
infeed is performed vertically to the thread; neither finishing allowance, nor starting point
offset are programmed. Five roughing cuts and one noncut are performed. The machining
type is defined as longitudinal, external, with constant cross-section of cut.

;






=
  

N10 G18 G95 T5 D1 S1000 M4 ;Specification of technology values

N20 G0 X40 Z10 ;Approach starting position
N30 CYCLE98 (0, 30, -30, 30, -60, -> ;Cycle call
-> 36, -80, 50, 10, 10, 0.92, , , , ->
-> 5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2, 3, 1)
N40 G0 X55 ;Traverse axis by axis
N50 Z10
N60 X40
N70 M30 ;End of program

Note
-> means: it must be programmed in a single block.

Cycles
4-48 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.8 Thread chaining - CYCLE98

Flow
Position reached prior to cycle start:
Starting position is any position from which the programmed thread starting point + run-in
path can be approached without collision.
The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:
• Approach of the starting point determined in the cycle at the beginning of the run-in path
for the first thread turn with G0
• Infeed for roughing according to the infeed type defined under VARI.
• Thread cutting is repeated according to the programmed number of roughing cuts.
• The finishing allowance is removed in the following step with G33.
• This step is repeated according to the number of idle passes.
• The whole sequence of motions is repeated for each further thread turn.

Explanation of the parameters

PO1 and DM1 (starting point and diameter)
You define the original starting point of the thread chain using these parameters. The starting
point determined by the cycle itself and approached at the beginning using G0 is located by
the run-in path before the programmed starting point (starting point A in the diagram on the
previous page).

3 3 3 3

33 33 33
523
'0 '0
'0
'0
$33

PO2, DM2 and PO3, DM3 (intermediate point and diameter)

You define two intermediate points in the thread using these parameters.
PO4 and DM4 (end point and diameter)
The original end point of the thread is programmed under parameters PO4 and DM4.

Note
With an inside thread, DM1 to DM4 corresponds to the tap hole diameter.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-49
Turning cycles
4.8 Thread chaining - CYCLE98

Interrelation between APP and ROP (run-in/run-out paths)

The starting point used in the cycle, however, is the starting point brought forward by the run-
in path APP, and, correspondingly, the end point is the programmed end point brought back
by the run-out path ROP.
In the transversal axis, the starting point defined by the cycle is always by 1 mm above the
programmed thread diameter. This lift-off plane is generated automatically within the control
system.
Interrelation between TDEP, FAL, NRC and NID (thread depth, finishing allowance, number
of roughing and idle passes)
The programmed finishing allowance acts paraxially and is subtracted from the specified
thread depth TDEP; the remainder is divided into roughing cuts. The cycle will calculate the
individual infeed depth automatically, depending on the VARI parameter. The thread depth to
be machined is divided into infeeds with the same cross-section of cut so that the cutting
pressure remains constant for all rough cuts. In this case, the infeed will be performed using
different values for the infeed depth.
A second variant is the distribution of the whole thread depth to constant infeed depths.
When doing so, the cutting cross-section becomes larger from cut to cut, but with smaller
values for the thread depth, this technology can result in better cutting conditions.
The finishing allowance FAL is removed after roughing in one step. Then the idle passes
programmed under parameter NID are executed.
IANG (infeed angle)
You define the infeed angle with the IANG parameter. If you wish to infeed at a right angle to
the cutting direction in the thread, the value of this parameter must be set to zero. In other
words, the parameter can also be omitted from the parameter list, since in this case, it is
automatically loaded with zero by default. If you wish to infeed along the flanks, the absolute
value of this parameter may amount maximally to the half of the flank angle of the tool.

,$1*
ƀ

,$1* ƀ


Cycles
4-50 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.8 Thread chaining - CYCLE98

The execution of the infeed is defined by the sign of this parameter. With a positive value,
infeed is always carried out at the same flank, and with a negative value, at both flanks
alternating. The infeed type with alternating flanks is only possible for cylindrical threads. If
the value of IANG for tapered threads is nonetheless negative, the cycle will carry out a flank
infeed along a flank.

,QIHHGDORQJ ,QIHHGZLWK
DIODQN DOWHUQDWLQJIODQNV

NSP (starting point offset)

With this parameter, you can program the angular value that defines the point of the first cut
of the first thread start on the circumference of the turned part. This is a starting point offset.
The parameter can assume values between 0.0001 and +359.9999 degrees. If no starting
point offset is specified or the parameter is omitted from the parameter list, the first thread
turn automatically starts at the zero-degree mark.
PP1, PP2 and PP3 (thread pitch)
With these parameters, you determine the thread pitch from the three sections of the thread
chain. The pitch value must be entered as a paraxial value without sign.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-51
Turning cycles
4.8 Thread chaining - CYCLE98

VARI (machining type)

With the VARI parameter, you define if machining is to be internal or external and, with which
technology the infeed will be machined during roughing. The VARI parameter can assume
values between 1 and 4 with the following meaning:

,QIHHGZLWKFRQVWDQW
LQIHHGGHSWK

,QIHHGZLWKFRQVWDQWFXWWLQJ
FURVVVHFWLRQ

Value external/internal Const. infeed/const. cutting cross-section

1 External Constant infeed
2 Internal Constant infeed
3 External Constant cutting cross-section
4 Internal Constant cutting cross-section

If another value is assigned to the VARI parameter, the cycle is aborted and the following
alarm: 61002 "Machining type incorrectly programmed".
NUMT (number of thread turns)
You specify the number of thread starts for a multiple thread with the NUMT parameter. For
a single-turn thread, the parameter must be assigned zero or can be dropped completely in
the parameter list.
The thread turns are distributed equally over the circumference of the turned part; the first
thread turn is determined by the NSP parameter.
To produce a multiple-turn thread with an asymmetrical arrangement of the thread turns on
the circumference, the cycle for each thread turn must be called when programming the
appropriate starting point offset.

Cycles
4-52 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.8 Thread chaining - CYCLE98

GHJUHHPDUNHU
6WDUWRI 6WDUWRI
VWWKUHDG WKWKUHDG
163

6WDUWRI 6WDUWRI
QGWKUHDG UGWKUHDG

1807+ 

_VRT (variable retraction path)

The retraction path can be programmed on the basis of the initial thread diameter in the
_VRT parameter. When _VRT = 0 (parameter not programmed), the retraction path is 1 mm.
The retraction path is always measured according to the programmed system of units, inch
or metric.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-53
Turning cycles
4.9 Thread recutting

4.9 4.9 Thread recutting

Function
The angular offset of a thread start resulting from tool breakage or remeasurement is taken
into account and compensated for by the "Thread recut" function. This function can be
executed in JOG mode in the Machine operating area.
The cycles use the data stored in the thread start during synchronization to calculate an
additional offset angle for each thread, which is applied in addition to the programmed
starting point offset.

Note
Thread cutting cycles CYCLE97 and CYCLE98 can be used for thread recutting.

Conditions
The channel in which the thread recutting program is to be executed is selected; the relevant
axes must already be referenced. The channel is in the Reset state, the spindle is stationary.

Flow
• Select JOG in "Machine" operating area.
• Press "Recut thread" soft key -> open screen form for this function.

• Thread into thread start using the threading tool.

• When the cutting tool is positioned exactly in the thread start, press the "Sync Point" soft
key.
• Press the "Cancel" soft key to return to the upper level soft key menu without activating
the function (no data are then stored in the NC).
• Select the "OK" soft key to transfer all values to the GUD in the NC.
• Then retract the tool and move it to its starting position.
• Select "Automatic" and, using block search, position the program pointer in front of the
thread cycle call.
• Start the program with NC start.

Cycles
4-54 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.9 Thread recutting

Miscellaneous functions
You can delete values stored earlier by selecting another soft key labeled "Delete".
If several spindles are operating in the channel, another selection box is displayed in the
screen form, in which you can select a spindle to machine the thread.

Start up
Thread recutting requires operation in the JOG basic display. This is activated with the
"Finish thread" HS8 soft key in file MA_JOG.COM.
• Startup of thread recutting for HMI Advanced:
First open the MA_JOG.COM file and then delete the semicolon preceding the following
lines:
– HS8=($80720,,se1)
– ;PRESS(HS8)
– ;LM("GENS","drehen2.com")
– ;END_PRESS
The file is located in the "Standard Cycles" directory. The soft key is then active. The HMI
must then be restarted.
• Startup of thread recutting for HMI Embedded:
First open the COMMON.COM file and then delete ";" in front of SC108. The file is
located in the "User Cycles" directory. The HMI must then be restarted.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-55
Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

4.10 4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

Function
With the CYCLE950 extended stock removal cycle, you can machine a contour programmed
with paraxial or parallel-contour stock removal. Any blank can be defined and is considered
during stock removal. The finished part contour must be continuous and may contain any
number of relief cut elements. You can specify a blank as a contour or by means of axial
values.
Contours can be machined longitudinally or facing with this cycle. You can freely select a
technology (roughing, finishing, complete machining, machining and infeed directions). It is
possible to update a blank.
For roughing, the programmed infeed depth is observed precisely; the last two roughing
steps are divided equally. Roughing is performed up to the final machining allowance
programmed. Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing. The tool radius
compensation is selected and deselected by the cycle automatically.

Note
The extended stock removal cycle is an option. It requires SW 6 in both the NCK and HMI
Advanced.

New functions compared to CYCLE95:

• You can define a blank either by programming a contour, specifying an allowance on the
finished part contour or entering a blank cylinder (or hollow cylinder in the case of internal
machining), from which stock must be removed.
• It is possible to detect residual material that cannot be machined with the active tool. The
cycle can generate an updated blank contour, which is stored as a program in the parts
program memory.
• The contours for stock removal can be specified in any of the following ways:
– In a separate program
– In the calling main program
– As a section of any program

• For roughing, it is possible to choose between paraxial and contour-parallel machining.

• During roughing, you have the option of machining along the contour so that no corners
are left over, or removing stock immediately at the roughing intersection.
• The angle for stock removal at the contour during roughing can be programmed.
• Optionally, relief cuts can be machined or skipped during roughing.

Cycles
4-56 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

:LWKRXWEODQN
;
)LQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU

=
%ODQNGHILQLWLRQDVFRQWRXU
;
)LQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU
%ODQNGHILQLWLRQDVFRQWRXU

=
%ODQNGHILQLWLRQYLDRIIVHWYDOXH
;
)LQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU

=

Programming
CYCLE950 (_NP1, _NP2, _NP3, _NP4, _VARI, _MID, _FALZ, _FALX, _FF1,
_FF2, _FF3, _FF4, _VRT, _ANGB, _SDIS, _NP5, _NP6, _NP7, _NP8,
_APZ, _APZA, _APX, _APXA, _TOL1)

Parameter

Parameter Data type Meaning

_NP1 string Name of the contour subroutine for the finished part contour
_NP2 string Label/block number start of finished part contour, optional (this can be
used to define contour sections)
_NP3 string Label/block number end of finished part contour, optional (this can be
used to define contour sections)
_NP4 string Name of the stock removal program to be generated

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-57
Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

Parameter Data type Meaning

_VARI
integer Machining type: (enter without sign)
Values: ONES DIGIT:
1: longitudinal
2: transversal
3: parallel to the contour
TENS DIGIT:
1: programmed infeed direction X-
2: programmed infeed direction X+
3: programmed infeed direction Z-
4: programmed infeed direction Z+
HUNDREDS DIGIT:
1: Roughing
2: Finishing
3: Complete
THOUSANDS DIGIT:
1: With rounding
2: Without rounding (lift-off)
TEN THOUSANDS DIGIT
1: Machining of relief cuts
2: No machining of relief cuts
HUNDRED THOUSANDS DIGIT
1: programmed machining direction X-
2: programmed machining direction X+
3: programmed machining direction Z-
4: programmed machining direction Z+
_MID real Infeed depth (enter without sign)
_FALZ real Finishing allowance in the longitudinal axis (enter without sign)
_FALX real Finishing allowance in the transverse axis (enter without sign)
_FF1 real Feedrate for longitudinal roughing
_FF2 real Feedrate for face roughing
_FF3 real Feedrate for finishing
_FF4 real Feedrate at contour transition elements (radius, chamfer)
_VRT real Lift-off distance for roughing, incremental (enter without sign)
_ANGB real Lift-off angle for roughing
_SDIS real Safety clearance for avoiding obstacles, incremental
_NP5 string Name of contour program for blank contour
_NP6 string Label/block number start of blank contour, optional
(this can be used to define contour sections)
_NP7 string Label/block number end of blank contour, optional
(this can be used to define contour sections)
_NP8 string Name of contour program for updated blank contour
_APZ real Axial value for defining blank for longitudinal axis
_APZA integer Absolute or incremental evaluation of the _APZ parameter
90=absolute, 91=incremental
_APX real Axial value for defining blank for facing axis
_APXA integer Absolute or incremental evaluation of the _APX parameter
90=absolute, 91=incremental
_TOL1 real Blank tolerance

Cycles
4-58 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

Example 1
The contour saved in the PART1.MPF program is to be machined from a preformed blank.
The type of machining for the stock removal process is
• Roughing only,
• Longitudinal,
• External,
• With rounding (so that no corners are left over),
• Relief cuts are to be machined.
The blank contour is specified in the BLANK1.MPF program. A turning tool with tool point
position 3 and a radius of 0.8 mm is used.

;

)LQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU

%ODQNGHILQLWLRQDVFRQWRXU

=

Machining program:

%_N_EXAMPLE_1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW_WPD
;Example 1: Stock removal with blank
;Sca, 01.04.99
;
;Tool offset data
N10 $TC_DP1[3,1]=500 $TC_DP2[3,1]=3 $TC_DP6[3,1]=0.8
$TC_DP24[3,1] =60
N15 G18 G0 G90 DIAMON
N20 T3 D1
N25 X300
N30 Z150
N35 G96 S500 M3 F2
N45 CYCLE950("Part1",,,"Machined_Part1", ->
-> 311111,1.25,1,1,0.8,0.7,0.6,0.3,0.5,45,2,"Blank1",,,,,,,,1)
N45 G0 X300
N50 Z150
N60 M2

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-59
Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

Finished part contour:

%_N_PART1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW_WPD
; Finished part contour Example 1
;
N100 G18 DIAMON F1000
N110 G1 X0 Z90
N120 X20 RND=4
N130 X30 Z80
N140 Z72
N150 X34
N160 Z58
N170 X28 Z55 F300
N180 Z50 F1000
N190 X40
N200 X60 Z46
N210 Z30
N220 X76 CHF=3
N230 Z0
N240 M17

Blank contour:

%_N_BLANK1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW_WPD
;Blank contour Example 1
;
N100 G18 DIAMON F1000
N110 G0 X0 Z93
N120 G1 X37
N130 Z55
N140 X66
N150 Z35
N160 X80
N170 Z0
N180 X0
N190 Z93 ;End point=starting point
;Blank contour must be closed
N200 M17

After machining, the STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW.WPD workpiece contains a new program

called MACHINED_PART1.MPF. This program is created during the first program call and
contains the traversing motions for machining the contour in accordance with the blank.

Cycles
4-60 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

Example 2
A simple inside contour is to be machined on the same part as in example 1. For this
purpose, a center bore is first made using a diameter 10 drill. The inside contour is then
roughed parallel to the contour since the hole roughly corresponds to the end contour. This
is achieved by again defining a blank contour for inside machining.
The stock removal contour is located in the same program as the cycle call in the blocks
N400 to N420, the blank contour in blocks N430 to N490.

13

B13B13
B13B13

Machining program:

%_N_EXAMPLE_2_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW_WPD
;Example 2: Internal stock removal, parallel
;to contour
;Sca, 01.04.99
;
;Tool offset data for turning tool, inside
N100 $TC_DP1[2,1]=500 $TC_DP2[2,1]=6
$TC_DP6[2,1]=0.5 $TC_DP24[2,1]=60
N105 $TC_DP1[1,1]=200 $TC_DP3[1,1]=100
$TC_DP6[1,1]=5
N110 G18 G0 G90 DIAMON
N120 X300
N130 Z150
N140 T1 D1 M6 ;Change drill with diameter 10
N150 X0 ;Center drilling in three steps
N160 Z100
N170 F500 S400 M3
N175 G1 Z75
N180 Z76
N190 Z60
N200 Z61
N210 Z45

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-61
Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

N220 G0 Z100
N230 X300 ;Approach tool change point
N240 Z150
N250 T2 D1 M6 ;Insert turning tool for inside
;machining

N260 G96 F0.5 S500 M3

N275 CYCLE950("","N400","N420",
"Machined_Part1_inside",311123,1.25,0,0,
0.8,0.5,0.4,0.3,0.5,45,1,"","N430","N490",,,,,
,1)
N280 G0 X300
N290 Z150
N300 GOTOF _END ;Skip contour definition
N400 G0 X14 Z90 ;N400 to N420 finished part contour
N410 G1 Z52
N420 X0 Z45
N430 G0 X10 Z90 ;N430 to N490 blank contour
N440 X16
N450 Z40
N460 X0
N470 Z47
N480 X10 Z59
N490 Z90
N500 _END:M2

Example 3
The same part from example 1 is now to be machined in two steps.
In the first machining step (N45), roughing is carried out using a tool with tool point position 9
and a large radius with deep infeed depth and no blank specified. The result to be generated
is an updated blank called BLANK3.MPF.
The type of machining for this step is:
• Roughing only,
• Longitudinal,
• External,
• With rounding,
• Relief cuts are not to be machined.
In the second machining step (N75), the residual material on this blank is machined with a
different tool and then finished.
The type of machining for this step is:
• Complete machining (roughing and finishing)
• Longitudinal,
• External,
• With rounding (so that no corners are left over),
• Relief cuts are to be machined.

Cycles
4-62 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

Machining program:
%_N_EXAMPLE_3_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW_W
PD
;Example 3: Stock removal in two steps
;with blank updating
; Sca, 09.04.99
;
;Tool offset data
;T3: Roughing steel for rough machining, tool point position 9, radius 5
N05 $TC_DP1[3,1]=500 $TC_DP2[3,1]=9
$TC_DP6[3,1]=5 $TC_DP24[3,1]=80
;T4: Turning tool for residual material
and finishing
;Tool point position 3, radius 0.4
N10 $TC_DP1[4.1]=500 $TC_DP2[4.1]=3
$TC_DP6[4.1]=0.4 $TC_DP24[4.1]=80
N15 G18 G0 G90 DIAMON
N20 T3 D1 ;Tool for roughing
N25 X300
N30 Z150
N35 G96 S500 M3 F2
N45 CYCLE950("Part1",,,"Machined_Part3",
321111,8,1,1,0.8,0.7,0.6,0.5,1,45,6,
"DEFAULT",,,"Blank3",0,91,0,91,1)
N50 G0 X300
N55 Z150
N60 T4 D1 ;Tool for roughing residual material and
;finishing
N65 G96 S500 M3 F2
N75
CYCLE950("Part1",,,"Finishing_Part3",311311,0.5,0.25,0.25,0.8,0.7,0.6,0.5,1,45,6,
"Blank3",,,,,,,,1)
N160 M2

Finished part contour: as in Example 1

;
)LQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU
8SGDWHGEODQNFRQWRXUDIWHU
WKHILUVWPDFKLQLQJVWHS

=

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-63
Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

Flow
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position, from which the blank contour can be approached
without collision. The cycle calculates collision-free approach movements to the starting
point for machining, but does not consider the toolholder data.
Movement for paraxial roughing:
• The starting point for roughing is calculated internally in the cycle and approached with
G0.
• The infeed to the next depth, calculated in accordance with the specifications in the _MID
parameter, is carried out with G0, and paraxial roughing is then performed with G1. The
feedrate during roughing is calculated internally in the cycle according to the path; it is the
feedrate that results from the values specified for longitudinal and face feed (_FF1 and
_FF2).
• For "Rounding along contour", the previous intersection is approached parallel to the
contour.
• When the previous intersection is reached or for "Without rounding along contour"
machining, the tool is lifted off at the angle programmed in _ANGB and then retracted to
the starting point for the next infeed with G0. If the angle is 45 degrees, the programmed
lift-off distance _VRT is also followed precisely; it is not exceeded for other angles.
• This procedure is repeated until the total depth of the machining section has been
reached.
Sequence of motions for roughing in parallel with contour:
• The starting point for roughing and the individual infeed depths are calculated as for
paraxial roughing and approached with G0 or G1.
• Roughing is carried out in contour-parallel paths.
• Lift-off and retraction are carried out as paraxial roughing.

Explanation of the parameters

_NP1, _NP2, _NP3 (contour programming finished part)
The finished part contour can be programmed optionally in a separate program or in the
current main program that calls the routine. The data is transferred to the cycle via
parameters _NP1 – Name of the program or _NP2, _NP3 – ID of program section from ... to
using block numbers or labels.
So there are three options for contour programming:
• The contour is defined in a separate program, in which case only _NP1 needs to be
programmed (see example 1)
• The contour is defined in the calling program, in which case only _NP2 and _NP3 have to
be programmed (see example 2)
• The stock removal contour is part of a program but not part of the program that calls the
cycle, in which case all three parameters must be programmed.
When the contour is programmed as a program section, the last contour element (block with
label or block number end of blank contour) must not contain a radius or chamfer. Write the
program name in _NP1 with path name and program type.
Example:
_NP1="/_N_SPF_DIR/_N_PART1_SPF"

Cycles
4-64 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

_NP4 (name of the stock removal program)

The stock removal cycle generates a program for the travel blocks that are required for stock
removal between the blank and the finished part. If no other path is specified when this
program is generated, it is stored in the parts program memory, in the same directory as the
calling program. If a path is entered, it is stored accordingly in the file system. If no other type
is specified, the program is a main program (type MPF).
The _NP4 parameter defines the name of this program.
_VARI (machining type)
The _VARI parameter defines the type of machining. Possible settings are:
Ones digit:
1 = longitudinal
2 = transversal
3 = parallel to the contour
Tens digit:
1 = programmed infeed direction X-
2 = programmed infeed direction X+
3 = programmed infeed direction Z-
4 = programmed infeed direction Z+
Hundreds digit:
1 = roughing
2 = finishing
3 = complete
Thousands digit:
1 = with rounding
2 = without rounding (lift-off)
The selection of with or without rounding along the contour determines whether lift-off occurs
immediately at the roughing intersection or whether rounding takes place along the contour
up to the previous intersection so that no residual corners remain.
Ten thousands digit:
1 = Machining of relief cuts
2 = No machining of relief cuts
Hundred thousands digit:
1 = programmed machining direction X-
2 = programmed machining direction X+
3 = programmed machining direction Z-
4 = programmed machining direction Z+
Example:
_VARI=312311 means machining:
longitudinally,
infeed direction X- (thus, outside),
complete;
no rounding along the contour, relief cuts are machined, machining direction Z-.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-65
Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

3DUD[LDOVWRFNUHPRYDO
; :LWKRXWURXQGLQJUHVLGXDOFRUQHUVUHPDLQ
:LWKURXQGLQJDWWKHFRQWRXU ;
)LQLVKHGSDUW
FRQWRXU B0,' )LQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU
B)$/; 
 

  
 


B6',6

B)$/=

= =
,QIHHG &XWUHVLGXDOFRUQHUV URXQGLQJ  /LIWRII
,QIHHG
$SSURDFK /LIWRII
$SSURDFK 5HWUDFWLRQ
5RXJKLQJ 5HWUDFWLRQ
5RXJKLQJ

; &RQWRXUSDUDOOHOVWRFNUHPRYDO

)LQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU

  
  


=
,QIHHG /LIWRII
$SSURDFK 5HWUDFWLRQ
5RXJKLQJ

_MID (infeed depth for roughing)

The infeed depth for roughing is programmed with the _MID parameter. Roughing steps are
generated with this infeed until the remaining depth is less than twice the infeed depth. Two
steps are then performed, each at half of the remaining depth. If the facing axis is involved in
the infeed for roughing, _MID is interpreted as a radius or diameter depending on the value
of cycle setting data _ZSD[0].

Cycle setting data Description

_ZSD[0]=0 _MID is evaluated in accordance with the G group for radius/diameter
programming; in the case of DIAMOF it is a radius, otherwise it is a
diameter.
_ZSD[0]=1 _MID is a radius value
_ZSD[0]=2 _MID is a diameter value

When roughing parallel to contour, the infeed depth does not act in relation to the specified
infeed axis, but vertically to the contour. This always results in more cuts than in paraxial
roughing with the same infeed depth value.

Cycles
4-66 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

_FALZ, _FALX (final machining allowance)

The default for a final machining allowance for roughing is provided by the FALZ (for Z axis)
and FALX (for X axis) parameters. Roughing is always carried out up to these finishing
allowances. If no finishing allowances are programmed, stock is removed when roughing up
to the final contour.
_FF1, _FF2, _FF3 and FF4 (feedrate)
Separate feedrates can be specified for roughing and finishing, as shown in the figure.

* ***
5RXJKLQJ
;
B)) B))

5HVXOWLQJ
IHHGUDWHIURP
B))DQGB))

=
B)) )LQLVKLQJ
;
B)) FKDPIHU

B))

B))
B)) UDGLXV 

=

Separate feedrates apply for longitudinal (_FF1) and face (_FF2) during roughing. If inclined
or circular path sections are traversed when machining the contour, the appropriate feedrate
is calculated automatically inside the cycle.
The feedrates programmed at the contour are active during finishing. If none are
programmed there, the finishing feedrate in _FF3 and the feedrates at radii and chamfers in
_FF4 apply to these contour transition elements. (See example 1 for programming of the part
in the above figure)
_VRT (lift-off distance) and _ANGB (lift-off angle)
Parameter _VRT can be used to program the amount by which the tool is retracted in both
axes when roughing.
If _VRT=0 (parameter not programmed), the tool will retract by 1 mm.
It is also possible to program the angle, at which the axis is retracted from the contour in the
_ANGB parameter. If nothing is programmed, the angle is 45°.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-67
Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

_SDIS (safety clearance)

The _SDIS parameter determines the amount of clearance for obstructions. This clearance is
active for retraction from a relief cut and approach to the next relief cut, for example. If no
value is programmed, the clearance is 1 mm.
_NP5, _NP6, _NP7 (contour programming blank)
If a blank is programmed as a contour, it can be programmed as a program name using the
_NP5 parameter or as a program section with the _NP6 and _NP7 parameters. Otherwise,
programming is carried out as for finished parts (see _NP1, _NP2, _NP3).
_NP8 (name of contour program for updated blank contour)
The CYCLE950 cycle can detect residual material that cannot be removed with the active
tool. To continue this machining with a different tool, it is possible to generate an updated
blank contour automatically. This is stored as a program in the parts program memory. You
can specify the program name in the _NP8 parameter with or without path details (see
example 3).
An updated blank contour is always generated when a travel program is generated.
_APZ, _APZA, _APX, _APXA (blank definition)
You can also define a blank by entering the dimensions of a blank cylinder (or hollow
cylinder) or as an allowance on the finished part contour in the _APZ and _APX parameters.
You can enter the cylinder dimensions as either absolute or incremental values, although an
allowance on the finished part contour is always interpreted incrementally.
Absolute or incremental values are selected via the _APZA and _APXA parameters (_APZA,
_APXA: 90 – absolute, 91 – incremental).

; %ODQNGHILQLWLRQYLDRIIVHWYDOXH

)LQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU

B$3;
B$3=

=

Cycles
4-68 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

; &\OLQGHUZLWKDEVROXWHGLPHQVLRQV ; &\OLQGHUZLWKLQFUHPHQWDOGLPHQVLRQV

B$3=
B$3;

B$3;
13 13 B$3=

= =

_TOL1 (blank tolerance)

Since a blank does not always correspond exactly to the blank definition, when it is cast or
forged, for example, it makes sense not to travel to the blank contour with G0 for roughing
and for the infeed, but to activate G1 shortly beforehand, in order to compensate for any
tolerances. The _TOL1 parameter defines the distance from the blank, at which G1 becomes
active.
Traversing is started with G1 at this incremental amount before the blank. If the parameter is
not programmed, it has the value 1 mm.

Note
Contour definition
Unlike CYCLE95, one block that contains a link to the current plane is sufficient for contour
programming.
For further details of contour definition, see CYCLE95.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-69
Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

Blank contour definition

A blank contour must either be a closed contour (starting point=end point), which
encompasses the finished part contour either partially or fully, or a contour section between
the starting and end points of the finished part contour. The programmed direction is
irrelevant.

; %ODQNGHILQLWLRQZLWKFORVHGFRQWRXU
)LQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU
%ODQNFRQWRXU
6WDUWSRLQW
(QGSRLQWRIEODQN

=
;%ODQNFRQWRXUDVFRQWRXUVHFWLRQEHWZHHQ
VWDUWDQGHQGSRLQWRIILQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU
(QGSRLQWRIEODQN
)LQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU
DQGILQLVKHGSDUW
%ODQNFRQWRXU

6WDUW SRLQW RIEODQNDQGILQLVKHGSDUW =

Blank contours must always be described in such a way that they are not partially identical to
the finished part contours, i.e., the machined materials are not combined.

; %ODQNDQGILQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU
SURFHHGLGHQWLFDOO\

=

Cycles
4-70 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

Explanation of the cycle structure

CYCLE950 is used to solve very complex problems during stock removal, which require high
processing power in the control. For best timing, the calculation is carried out in the HMI. The
calculation is started in the cycle and a program with traversing blocks for stock removal is
generated in its result and stored in the control’s file system, where it is called and executed
immediately. This structure means that it is only necessary to perform the calculation the first
time a program is executed with the CYCLE950 call. When called a second time, the
traversing program is available and can be called by the cycle.
Recalculation is performed when:
• A finished contour has been modified;
• A transfer parameter of the cycle has changed;
• A tool with different tool offset data has been activated before the cycle call.

Program storage in the file system

If the contours for CYCLE950 are programmed outside the program that makes the call, the
following applies to searching in the file system of the control:
• If the calling program is stored in a workpiece directory, then the programs, which contain
the finished part contour or blank contour, must also be stored in the same workpiece
directory, or at least programmed with path information.
• If the invoked program is located in the "Parts program" directory (MPF.DIR), the
programs are also searched for there, if no path is specified.
The cycle creates a program that contains the traversing blocks for stock removal and,
optionally, an updated blank contour. These are either stored in the same directory as the
cycle-calling program or in accordance with the specified path.

Simulation CYCLE950
In the simulation of the CYCLE950 extended stock removal cycle, the generated programs
are saved to the NCU file system. Therefore, only the "NC Active Data" setting is practical,
since tool offset data are included in the program calculation.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-71
Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

Blank updating
The CYCLE950 extended stock removal cycle detects residual material during roughing and
is able to generate an updated blank contour outside the machining process, which can be
used in a further machining step.

;

0DFKLQLQJGLUHFWLRQ

)LQLVKHGSDUWFRQWRXU
%ODQNFRQWRXU
˞

˞

5HVLGXDOFRQWRXU =
)LQLVKLQJDOORZDQFH ZKHQUHOLHIFXWWLQJ
˞ &OHDUDQFHDQJOHRIODWKH

To do this, the cycle internally considers the angle at the tool point. The tool clearance angle
must be entered in the tool offset data (parameter 24). The cycle automatically defines the
main cutting angle, according to the tool point position. For tool point positions 1 to 4, the
blank update is calculated with a main cutting angle of 90°. For tool point positions 5 to 9, the
main cutting angle is assumed to be identical to the tool clearance angle.

7RROSRLQWGLUHFWLRQ

0DLQ
FXWWLQJ &OHDUDQFHDQJOH
HGJHDQJOH ¡ ˞

7RROSRLQWGLUHFWLRQ

0DLQ
FXWWLQJ
&OHDUDQFHDQJOH
HGJHDQJOH ˞ ˞

Cycles
4-72 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

If CYCLE950 is called with blank update in the same program more than once, different
names must be assigned to the generated blank contours; it is not permissible to use the
program name (parameter _NP8) more than once.

Note
Extended stock removal cannot be performed in m:n configurations.

Note
Special information for HMI-Advanced OEM users:
The "Extended Stock Removal Cycle" package occupies Task 26 in the HMI for
communication between the cycle and the HMI.
For this purpose, a file is created in the \ADD_ON direction when the package is installed:
• REGIE.INI
As a result, this task is not available to other OEM applications.

Description of alarm source CYCLE950

see References: /DA/ SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D Diagnostic Manual

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 4-73
Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950

Cycles
4-74 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
Error Messages and Error Handling 5
5.1 5.1 General information
If error conditions are detected in the cycles, an alarm is generated and the execution of the
cycle is aborted.
The cycles continue to output messages in the dialog line of the control. These message will
not interrupt the program execution.

Note
For more information on errors and required responses, as well as messages output in the
control's dialog line, please refer to the diagnostics guide.
References: see /DA/ Diagnostics Guide SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

5.2 5.2 Error handling in the cycles

If error conditions are detected in the cycles, an alarm is generated and the machining is
aborted. Alarms with numbers between 61000 and 62999 generated in the cycles. This
range of numbers, in turn, is divided again with regard to alarm responses and cancel
criteria. The error text that is displayed together with the alarm number gives you more
detailed information on the error cause.

Alarm number Clearing Alarm Response

criterion
61000 ... 61999 NC_RESET Block preparation in the NC is aborted
62000 ... 62999 Clear key Program execution is not interrupted; display only

Overview of cycle alarms

With a small number of exceptions, the error numbers are subject to the classifications
below:

6 _ X _ _

• X=0 General cycle alarms

• X=1 Alarms generated by the drilling, drilling pattern and milling cycles
• X=6 Alarms generated by the drilling cycles
The table in the diagnostics guide includes a list of all errors occurring in the cycles with their
location of occurrence and appropriate instructions for fault correction.
see References: Diagnostics Guide SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 5-1
Error Messages and Error Handling
5.3 Messages in the cycles

5.3 5.3 Messages in the cycles

The cycles output messages in the dialog line of the control. These message will not
interrupt the program execution.
Messages provide information with regard to a certain behavior of the cycles and with regard
to the progress of machining and are usually kept beyond a machining step or until the end
of the cycle. The following messages are possible:

Message text Source

"Depth: according to the value for the relative CYCLE81...CYCLE89, CYCLE840
depth"
"Machining elongated hole" LONGHOLE
"Slot is being processed" SLOT1
"Circumferential slot is being processed" SLOT2
"Incorrect mill direction: G3 will be generated" SLOT1, SLOT2, POCKET1, POCKET2,
CYCLE90
"Changed form of the undercut" CYCLE94, CYCLE96
"1. drilling depth: according to the value for the CYCLE83
relative depth"
"Caution: Final machining allowance >= tool POCKET1, POCKET2
diameter!"
"Thread start: - machining as a longitudinal thread" CYCLE97, CYCLE98
"Thread start: - machining as a face thread" CYCLE97, CYCLE98
"Simulation active, no tool programmed, final POCKET1...POCKET4, SLOT1, SLOT2,
contour being traversed" CYCLE93, CYCLE72
"Simulation active, no tool programmed" CYCLE71, CYCLE90, CYCLE94, CYCLE96
"Waiting for spindle reversal" CYCLE840

Cycles
5-2 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
A List of abbreviations A
A Output
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange American coding standard for
the exchange of information
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit: User switching circuit
ASUB Asynchronous subroutine
AuxF Auxiliary function
AV Job planning
BB Ready to run
BCD Binary Coded Decimals: Decimal numbers encoded In binary code
BCS Basic Coordinate System
BIN Binary files (Binary Files)
BIOS Basic Input Output System
BO Operating mode
BOT Boot files: Boot files for SIMODRIVE 611D
BP Basic program
C1 .. C4 Channel 1 to channel 4
CAD Computer-Aided Design
CAM Computer-Aided Manufacturing
C-bus Communication bus
CNC Computerized Numerical Control Computerized numerical control
COM Communication
COR Coordinate rotation
CP Communications Processor
CPU Central Processing Unit Central processing unit
CR Carriage Return
CRC Cutter radius compensation
CRT Cathode Ray Tube picture tube
CSB Central Service Board: PLC module
CTS Clear To Send: Signal from serial data interfaces
CUTCOM Cutter radius compensation: Tool radius compensation
DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter
DB Data Block in the PLC
DBB Data Block Byte in the PLC
DBW Data Block Word in the PLC
DBX Data block bit in the PLC
DC Direct Control: Movement of the rotary axis via the shortest path to the absolute
position within one revolution

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 A-1
List of abbreviations

DCD Data Carrier Detect

DDE Dynamic Data Exchange
DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Industry Standard)
DIO Data Input/Output: Data transfer display
DIR DIRectory Directory
DLL Dynamic Link Library
DOS Disk Operating System
DPM Dual-Port Memory
DPR Dual-Port RAM
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DRF Differential Resolver Function: (Handwheel)
DRY DRY run: Dry run feedrate
DSB Decoding Single Block: Decoding single block
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DW Data word
EIA code Special punched tape code, number of holes per character always odd
ENC Encoder: Actual value encoder
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
ERROR Error from printer
FB Function block
FBD Function plan (PLC programming method)
FBS Slimline screen
FC Function Call: Function block in the PLC
FDB Product database
FDD Feed Drive
FDD Floppy Disk Drive
FEPROM Flash-EPROM: Read and write memory
FIFO First In First Out: memory, which works without address specification and whose
data are read in the order in which they were stored.
FIPO Fine Interpolator
FM Function Module
FM-NC Function module – numerical control
FPU Floating Point Unit Floating Point Unit
FRA Frame block
FRAME Data block (FRAME)
FST Feed Stop: Feed stop
GUD Global User Data Global user data
HD Hard Disk Hard disk
HEX Abbreviation for hexadecimal number
HHU HHU
HMI Human Machine Interface: Operator functionality of SINUMERIK for operation,
programming and simulation.
HMS High-resolution Measuring System
HW Hardware

Cycles
A-2 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 List of abbreviations

I Input
I/O Input/output
I/R Infeed/regenerative feedback unit (power supply) of the
SIMODRIVE 611(D)
IBN Start up
ICA Interpolatory Compensation Interpolatory compensation
IF Drive module pulse enable
IK (GD) Implicit communication (global data)
IM Interface Module Interface module
IMR Interface Module Receive: Interconnection module for receiving data
IMS Interface Module Send: Interconnection module for sending data
INC Increment Increment
INI INItializing data Initializing data
IPO Interpolator
IS Interface signal
ISA Industry Standard Architecture
ISO International Standard Organization
ISO code Special punched tape code, number of holes per character always even
JOG JOGging: Setup mode
KÜ Speed ratio
Kv Servo gain factor
LAD Ladder diagram (PLC programming method)
LC Line Feed
LCD Liquid crystal display
LEC Leadscrew error compensation
LED Light-emitting diode
LR Position controller
LUD Local User Data
MB Megabyte
MC Measuring circuit
MCP Machine control panel
MCS Machine coordinate system
MD Machine data
MDA Manual Data Input Manual input
MLFB Machine-readable product designation
Mode group Mode group
MPF Main Program File: NC part program (main program)
MPI Multi-Point Interface Multiport Interface
MS Microsoft (software manufacturer)
MSD Main Spindle Drive
NC Numerical Control: Numerical Control
NCK Numerical Control Kernel: NC kernel with block preparation, traversing range, etc.
NCU Numerical Control Unit: NCK hardware unit

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 A-3
List of abbreviations

NRK Name for the operating system of the NCK

NURBS Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline
OB Organization block in the PLC
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OP Operator panel
OP Operator Panel: Operating setup
OPI Operator Panel Interface
OPI Operator Panel Interface: Interface for connection to the operator panel
OPT Options: Options
OSI Open Systems Interconnection: Standard for computer communications
P-bus I/O bus
PC/ Personal computer
PCIN Name of the SW for data exchange with the control
PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association plug-in memory
normalization board
PCU PC Unit: PC box (computer unit)
PG Programming device
PLC Automation system
PLC Programmable Logic Control Controller
PMS Position Measuring System
POS Positioning drive
RAM Random Access Memory: Program memory that can be read and written to
REF Reference point approach function
REPOS Reposition function
RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer: Type of processor with small instruction set and
ability to process instructions at high speed
ROV Rapid Override Input correction
RPA R-Parameter Active: Memory area on the
NCK for R parameter numbers
RPY Roll Pitch Yaw: Rotation type of a coordinate system
RTS Request To Send: RTS, control signal of serial data interfaces
SBL Single Block Single block
SD Setting Data
SDB System Data Block
SEA Setting Data Active: Identifier (file type) for setting data
SFB System Function Block
SFC System Function Call
SK Soft key
SKP SKiP: Skip block
SM Stepper Motor
Software Software
SPF Sub Program File: Subprogram
SPS Programmable Logic Controller
SR Subprogram

Cycles
A-4 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 List of abbreviations

SRAM Static RAM (non-volatile)

SSI Serial Synchronous Interface: Synchronous serial interface
STL Statement list
SYF System Files System files
T Tool
TC Tool change
TEA Testing Data Active: Identifier for machine data
TLC Tool length offset
TNRC Tool nose radius compensation
TO Tool offset
TO Tool Offset Tool offset
TOA Tool Offset Active: Identifier (file type) for tool offsets
TRANSMIT Transform Milling Into Turning: Coordinate conversion on turning machine for milling
operations
TRC Tool Radius Compensation
UFR User Frame: Work offset
UI Operator interface
V.24 Serial interface (definition of the exchange lines between DTE and DCE)
WCS Workpiece coordinate system
WO Work offset
WOP Workshop-oriented Programming
WPD Workpiece Directory: Workpiece directory
ZOA Zero Offset Active: Identifier (file type) for work offset data
µC Micro Controller

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 A-5
List of abbreviations

Cycles
A-6 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
B List of parameters
List of input/output variables for cycles
B
Name Meaning in English Meaning in German
AD Allowance depth Blank pocket depth dimension from reference
plane
AFSL Angle for slot length Angle for slot length
ANG1, ANG2 Flank angle Flank angle
ANGB Liftoff angle for roughing Lift-off angle for roughing
AP1 Unfinished dimension in plane Basic size pocket length/pocket radius
AP2 Unfinished dimension in plane Blank dimension of pocket width
APP Approach path Run-in path
APX Axial value for defining blank for facing Axial value for defining blank for facing axis
axis
APXA Absolute or incremental evaluation of Absolute or incremental evaluation of the _APX
parameter APX parameter
APZ Axial value for defining blank for Axial value for defining blank for longitudinal axis
longitudinal axis
APZA Absolute or incremental evaluation of Absolute or incremental evaluation of the _APZ
parameter APZ parameter
AS1, AS2 Direction of approach/approach travel Specification of approach direction/path
AXN Tool axis Tool axis
BNAME Name for program of drill positions Name for program of drill positions
CDIR Circle direction Direction of rotation, mill direction
CPA Center point, abscissa Center point of hole circle, abscissa (absolute)
CPO Center point, ordinate Center point of hole circle, ordinate (absolute)
CRAD Corner radius Corner radius
DAM Degression value, Path for roughing Degression value/path length
interrupt
DBH Distance between holes Spacing between the holes
DIAG Groove depth Groove depth
DIATH Diameter of thread Nominal diameter, outer diameter of the thread
DIS1 Distance Programmable limit distance
DIS1 Distance between columns Distance between columns
DIS2 Number of lines, Distance between rows Distance between rows
DM1 ... DM4 Diameter Thread diameter at the starting point
DP Depth Depth (absolute)
DP1 First depth Insertion depth
DPR Depth, relative Depth, relative to reference plane
DT Dwell time Dwell time fore chip breaking when roughing

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 B-1
List of parameters

Name Meaning in English Meaning in German

DTB Dwell time at bottom Dwell time at final drilling depth/groove base
DTD Dwell time at depth Dwell time at final drilling depth
DTS Dwell time at starting point Dwell time at starting point
ENC Tapping with/without encoder Tapping with/without encoder
FAL Finish allowance Final machining allowance along contour at edge
of slot/pocket
FAL1 Finish allowance on groove base Finishing allowance at the recess base
FAL2 Finish allowance on flanks Finishing allowance at the flanks
FALD Finish allowance depth Final machining allowance at the base
FALZ Finish allowance, z axis Final machining allowance in the longitudinal axis
FALX Finish allowance, x axis Final machining allowance in the facing axis
FDEP First depth First drilling depth (absolute)
FDIS First distance Distance from first hole to reference point
FDP1 Overrun path in direction to plane Overrun path in plane infeed direction
FDPR First depth, relative First drilling depth, relative to reference plane
FF1 Feedrate for roughing Feedrate for roughing
FF2 Feedrate for insertion Feedrate for insertion
FF3 Feedrate for finishing Feedrate for finishing
FF4 Feedrate for contour transition elements Feedrate for contour transition elements
FFCP Feedrate for circular positioning Feedrate for intermediate positioning on a circle
(SW 6.3 and higher)
FFD Feedrate for depth Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 Feedrate surface Feedrate for surface machining
FFP2 Feedrate for finishing Feedrate for finishing
FFR Feedrate Feed
FORM Definition of form Definition of the form
FPL Final point along longitudinal axis Final point along the longitudinal axis
FRF Feedrate factor Feedrate factor
IANG Infeed angle Infeed angle
INDA Incremental angle Incrementing angle
IDEP Infeed depth Infeed depth
KNAME Name of the contour subroutine Name of contour subroutine
LSANF Block number/label identifying start of Block number/label identifying start of contour
contour definition definition
LSEND Block number/label identifying end of Block number/label identifying end of contour
contour definition definition
LP1 Length of approach travel, radius Length of approach travel, radius
LP2 Length of return travel, radius Length of return travel, radius
KDIAM Internal diameter of thread Core diameter, internal diameter of the thread
LENG Elongated hole length, pocket length Elongated hole length, pocket length
MDEP Minimum depth Minimum drilling depth
MID Maximum infeed depth Maximum infeed depth for an infeed

Cycles
B-2 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 List of parameters

Name Meaning in English Meaning in German

MIDA Maximum infeed width Maximum infeed width
MIDF Maximum infeed depth for finishing Maximum infeed depth for finishing
MPIT Thread lead as thread size Thread pitch as thread size
NID Number of noncuts Number of noncuts
NP1 ... NP8 Name/Label ... Name of the contour subroutine for the finished
part contour/label
NPP Name of parts program Name of contour subroutine
NRC Number of roughing cuts Number of roughing cuts
NSP Start point offset first thread Start point offset for the first thread start
NUM Number of holes Number of holes
NUM1 Number of columns Number of columns
NUM2 Number of lines Number of rows
NUMT Number of threads Number of thread starts
PA Reference point, abscissa Pocket reference point
PO Reference point, ordinate Pocket reference point
PO1 ... PO4 Point in longitudinal axis Starting point/intermediate point/end point of the
thread in the longitudinal axis
PIT Thread lead Thread pitch as a value
PNAME Name for pocket milling machining Name for pocket milling machining program
program
POSS Position for oriented spindle stop spindle position
PP1 ... PP3 Thread pitch 1...3 as value Thread pitch 1…3 as value
PRAD Pocket radius Pocket radius
RAD Radius Radius of circle
RAD1 Radius Radius of helical path on insertion
RCO1, RCO2 Radius/chamfer outside Radius/chamfer, outside
RCI1, RCI2 Radius/chamfer inside Radius/chamfer, inside
RFF Retract feed Retraction feedrate
RFP Reference plane Reference plane (absolute)
ROP Run out path Run-out path
RPA Retract path, abscissa Retraction path in the abscissa
RPAP Retract path, applicate Retraction path in the boring axis
RPO Retract path, ordinate Retraction path in the ordinate
RL Bypass contour Bypassing the contour centrally
RTP Retract plane Retraction plane (absolute)
SDAC Spindle direction after cycle Direction of rotation after end of cycle
SDIR Spindle direction Spindle direction
SDIS Safety clearance Safety clearance
SDR Spindle direction for retraction Direction of rotation for retraction
SPCA Reference point, abscissa Abscissa of a reference point on the straight line
(absolute)
SPCO Reference point, ordinate Ordinate of this reference point (absolute)
SPD Starting point in the facing axis Starting point in the transverse axis

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 B-3
List of parameters

Name Meaning in English Meaning in German

SPL Starting point along longitudinal axis Starting point in the longitudinal axis
SSF Speed for finishing Speed when finishing
SST Speed for tapping Speed for tapping
SST1 Speed for retraction Speed for retraction
STA, STA1 Angle Angle
STA2 Insertion angle Maximum insertion angle for oscillation movement
TDEP Thread depth Thread depth
TN Name of stock removal tool Name of solid machining tool
TOL1 Blank tolerance Blank tolerance
TYPTH Type of thread Thread type
VARI Working variant Machining type
VRT Variable return path Variable return distance/return path
WID (Pocket) width Pocket width
WIDG Groove width Groove width

Cycles
B-4 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
Glossary

Access authorization
The CNC program blocks and data are protected by a 7-level system of access restrictions:
• Three password levels for system manufacturers, machine manufacturers and users and
• Four keylock switch settings, which can be evaluated via the PLC.

Approach machine (fixed-point)

Approach motion towards one of the predefined -> fixed machine points.

Auxiliary functions
Auxiliary functions can be used to transfer -> parameters to the -> PLC in -> parts programs,
where they trigger reactions which are defined by the machine manufacturer.

Backlash compensation
Compensation for a mechanical machine backlash, e.g., backlash on reversal for ball
screws. Backlash compensation can be entered separately for each axis.

Backup battery
The backup battery ensures that the -> user program is reliably backed up in the -> CPU
against mains failure and that fixed data areas and markers, times and counters are kept in
non-volatile memory.

Blank
Workpiece as it is before the part is machined.

Block
"Block" is the term given to any files required for creating and processing programs.

Block search
The block search function allows any point in the part program to be selected, at which
machining must start or be continued. The function is provided for the purpose of testing part
programs or continuing machining after a program abort.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Glossary-1
Glossary

Booting
Loading the system program after power on.

Channel
A channel is characterized by its ability to execute a -> parts program independently of other
channels. A channel exclusively controls the axes and spindles assigned to it. Parts
programs run on various channels can be coordinated by -> synchronization.

Channel structure
The channel structure enables the -> programs of the individual channels to be executed
simultaneously and asynchronously.

Circular interpolation
The -> tool is required to travel in a circle between defined points on the contour at a
specified feedrate while machining the workpiece.

Clear all
The following -> CPU memories are erased by a general reset operation:
• the -> working memory
• the read/write area of the -> load memory
• the -> system memory
• the -> backup memory

CNC
-> NC

CNC programming language

The CNC programming language is based on DIN 66025 with high-level language
expansions. The -> high-level CNC language and programming allow, among other things,
macros to be defined (groupings of individual instructions).

COM
Component of the NC control for the implementation and coordination of communication.

Compensation axis
Axis with a setpoint or actual value modified by the compensation value

Compensation table
Table containing interpolation points. It provides the compensation values of the
compensation axis for selected positions on the basic axis.

Cycles
Glossary-2 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Glossary

Compensation value
Difference between the axis position measured by the encoder and the desired, programmed
axis position.

Connecting cable
Connecting cables are pre-assembled or user-assembled 2-wire cables with a connector at
each end. These interconnecting cables connect the -> CPU via the -> multipoint interface
(MPI) with a -> programming device or other CPUs.

Contour
Outline of a -> workpiece.

Contour monitoring
The following error is monitored within a definable tolerance band as a measure of contour
accuracy. An impermissibly high following error might be caused by a drive overload, for
example. In such cases, an alarm is output and the axes are stopped.

Coordinate system
See -> machine coordinate system, -> workpiece coordinate system.

CPU
Central Processor Unit, -> PLC

Cycle
Protected subroutine for executing a repetitive machining process on the -> workpiece.

Cycle support
The available cycles are listed in the "Cycle support" menu in the "Program" operating area.
Once the desired machining cycle has been selected, the parameters required for assigning
values are displayed in plain text.

Data Block
1. Data unit of the -> PLC, which the -> HIGHSTEP programs can access.
2. Data unit of the -> NC: Data modules contain data definitions for global user data. These
data can be initialized directly when they are defined.

Data transfer program PCIN

PCIN is an auxiliary program for sending and receiving CNC user data (e.g., part programs,
tool offsets, etc.) via a serial interface. The PCIN program can run in MS-DOS on standard
industrial PCs.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Glossary-3
Glossary

Data word
A data unit, two bytes in size, within a -> data block.

Diagnostics
1. Operating area of the control.
2. The control has both a self-diagnostics program as well as test functions for servicing
purposes: status, alarm and service displays.

Digital input/output module

Digital modules are signal formers for binary process signals.

Dimensions specification, metric and inches

Position and pitch values can be programmed in inches in the machining program. The
control is set to a basic system regardless of the programmable dimensional specification
(G70/G71).

DRF
Differential Resolver Function: NC function which generates an incremental work offset in
Automatic mode in conjunction with an electronic handwheel.

Drift compensation
When the CNC axes are in the constant motion phase, automatic drift compensation is
implemented in the analog speed control (SINUMERIK FM-NC).

Dynamic feedforward control

Inaccuracies in the contour caused by following errors can be almost entirely eliminated with
the aid of dynamic, acceleration-dependent feedforward control. The result is extraordinary
machining precision even at high tool path feed-rates. The feedforward control can be
individually selected and deselected for each axis in the parts program.

Editor
The editor makes it possible to create, edit, extend, join, and import programs/texts/program
blocks.

Electronic handwheel
Electronic handwheels can be used to traverse the selected axes simultaneously in manual
mode. The handwheel clicks are analyzed by the increment analyzer.

Exact stop
With a programmed exact stop instruction, the position stated in a block is approached
precisely and very slowly, if necessary. In order to reduce the approach time, -> exact stop
limits are defined for rapid traverse and feed.

Cycles
Glossary-4 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Glossary

Exact stop limit

When all path axes reach their exact stop limits, the control responds as if it had reached its
precise destination point. The -> part program continues execution at the next block.

External zero offset

Zero offset specified by the -> PLC.

Fast lift-off from contour

When an interrupt is received, it is possible to initiate a motion via the CNC machining
program, which allows the tool to be lifted quickly from the workpiece contour currently being
machined. The retraction angle and the distance retracted can also be parameterized. An
interrupt routine can also be executed following the fast lift-off of the tool.
(SINUMERIK FM-NC, 840D).

Feedrate override
The current feedrate setting entered via the control panel or by the PLC is overlaid on the
programmed feedrate (0-200 %). The feedrate can also be corrected by a programmable
percentage factor (1-200%) in the machining program.

Finished-part contour
Contour of the finished workpiece. See also -> Blank.

Fixed machine point

A point defined uniquely by the machine tool, e.g., the reference point.

Fixed-point approach
Machine tools can approach fixed points such as a tool change point, loading point, pallet
change point, etc. in a defined way. The coordinates of these points are stored in the control.
Where possible, the control moves these axes in -> rapid traverse.

Frame
A frame is an arithmetic rule that transforms one Cartesian coordinate system into another
Cartesian coordinate system. A frame contains the components -> zero offset, -> rotation, ->
scaling, -> mirroring.

Geometry
Description of a -> workpiece in the -> workpiece coordinate system.

Geometry axis
Geometry axes are used to describe a 2- or 3-dimensional range in the workpiece coordinate
system.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Glossary-5
Glossary

Global main program/subprogram

Each global main program/subprogram may appear only once under its name in the
directory. It is not possible to use the same program name in different directories with
different contents as a global program.

Ground
Ground is taken as the total of all linked inactive parts of a device which will not become live
with a dangerous contact voltage even in the event of a malfunction.

Helical interpolation
The helical interpolation function is ideal for machining internal and external threads using
form milling cutters and for milling lubrication grooves. The helix comprises two movements:
1. Circular movement in one plane
2. Linear movement perpendicular to this plane.

High-level CNC language

The high-level language offers: -> user variable, -> pre-defined user variable, -> system
variable, -> indirect programming, -> mathematical and trigonometric functions, ->
comparison operations and logic operations, -> program jumps and program branching, ->
program coordination (SINUMERIK 840D), -> macro technology.

High-speed digital inputs/outputs

The digital inputs can be used for example to start fast CNC program routines (interrupt
routines). High-speed, program-driven switching functions can be initiated via the digital
CNC outputs (SINUMERIK 840D).

HIGHSTEP
Summary of the programming options for the -> PLC in the AS300/AS400 system.

I/O module
I/O modules represent the link between the CPU and the process. I/O modules are:
• ->Digital input/output modules
• ->Analog input/output modules
• ->Simulator modules

Identifier
In accordance with DIN 66025, words are supplemented using identifiers (names) for
variables (arithmetic variables, system variables, user variables), subroutines, key words,
and words with multiple address letters. These supplements have the same meaning as the
words with respect to block format. Identifiers must be unique. It is not permissible to use the
same identifier for different objects.

Cycles
Glossary-6 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Glossary

Inch measuring system

Measuring system, which defines distances in inches and fractions of inches.

Inclined surface machining

Drilling and milling operations on workpiece surfaces that do not lie in the coordinate planes
of the machine can be performed easily using the function "inclined-surface machining".

Increment
Travel path length specification based on number of increments. The number of increments
can be stored as a -> setting data or selected with keys labeled with 10, 100, 1000, 10,000.

Incremental dimension
Also incremental dimension: A destination for axis traversal is defined by a distance to be
covered and a direction referenced to a point already reached. See also -> absolute
dimension.

Initialization block
Initialization blocks are special -> program blocks. They contain value assignments that are
performed before program execution.
The primary purpose of initialization blocks is to initialize predefined data or global user data.

Initialization files
It is possible to create an initialization file for each -> workpiece. Various variable
assignments which are intended to apply specifically to one workpiece can be stored in this
file.

Intermediate blocks
Traversing movements with tool offset selected (G41/G42) can be interrupted by a limited
number of intermediate blocks (block without axis movements in the compensation plane)
whereby the tool offset can still be correctly calculated. The permissible number of
intermediate blocks which the control reads ahead can be set in system parameters.

Interpolator
Logical unit of the -> NCK which determines intermediate values for the movements to be
traversed on the individual axes on the basis of destination positions specified in the parts
program.

Interpolatory compensation
Interpolatory compensation can be used to compensate for leadscrew errors and measuring
system errors (LEC, MSEC) caused during production.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Glossary-7
Glossary

Interrupt routine
Interrupt routines are special -> subroutines which can be started on the basis of events
(external signals) in the machining process. A parts program block which is currently being
worked through is interrupted and the position of the axes at the point of interruption is
automatically saved.

Interrupts
All alarms and -> messages are output on the operator panel in plain text with the date and
time and a symbol indicating the cancel criterion. Alarms and messages are displayed
separately.
1. Alarms and messages in the part program:
Alarms and messages can be displayed in plain text directly from the part program.
2. Alarms and messages from PLC
Alarms and messages for the machine can be displayed in plain text from the PLC
program. No additional function block packages are required for this purpose.

Inverse time feedrate

On SINUMERIK FM-NC and 840D controls, it is possible to program the time required to
traverse the path of a block instead of the feedrate speed for the axis movement (G93).

JOG
Control operating mode (setup operation): In JOG mode, the machine can be set up.
Individual axes and spindles can be traversed in JOG mode by means of the direction keys.
Other JOG mode functions are -> reference point approach, -> Repos and -> Preset (set
actual value).

Key switch
• S7-300:The key switch is the operating mode switch of the -> CPU. The keylock switch is
operated by a removable key.
• 840D/FM-NC: The keyswitch on the -> machine control panel has 4 settings, to which
functions are assigned by the operating system of the control. Further, the keylock switch
has three differently colored keys, which can be removed in the specified positions.

Keywords
Words with a specific notation, which have a defined meaning in the programming language
for -> parts programs.

KUE
Speed ratio

Kv
Servo gain factor, a control variable in a control loop.

Cycles
Glossary-8 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Glossary

Languages
The operator-prompt display texts, system messages and system alarms are available (on
diskette) in five system languages: German, English, French, Italian, and Spanish. The user
can select two of the listed languages at a time in the control.

Leadscrew error compensation

Compensation for the mechanical inaccuracies of a leadscrew participating in the feed. The
control uses stored deviation values for the compensation.

Limit speed
Maximum/minimum (spindle) speed: The maximum speed of a spindle may be limited by
values defined in the machine data, the -> PLC or -> setting data.

Linear axis
The linear axis is an axis, which, in contrast to a rotary axis, describes a straight line.

Linear interpolation
The tool travels along a straight line to the destination point while machining the workpiece.

Load memory
For the CPU 314 of the -> PLC, the load memory is equal to the -> Work memory .

Look ahead
With the look ahead function, a configurable number of traversing blocks is read in advance
in order to calculate the optimum machining velocity.

Look-ahead detection of contour violations

The control can recognize and signal the following types of collision:
1. The path distance is shorter than the tool radius.
2. The width of the inner corner is smaller than the tool diameter.

Machine
Operating area of the control.

Machine axes
Physically existent axes on the machine tool.

Machine control panel

An operator panel on a machine tool with operating elements such as keys, rotary switches,
etc., and simple indicators such as LEDs. It is used to directly influence the machine tool via
the PLC.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Glossary-9
Glossary

Machine coordinate system

A coordinate system, which is related to the axes of the machine tool.

Machine zero
Fixed point of the machine tool to which all (derived) measuring systems can be traced back.

Macro techniques
Grouping of a set of instructions under a single identifier. The identifier represents the set of
consolidated instructions in the program.

Main block
A block prefixed by ":" containing all the parameters required to start execution of a -> parts
program.

Main program
Parts program identified by a number or identifier in which further main programs,
subroutines or -> cycles may be called.

MDA
Control operating mode: Manual Data Input: In the MDI mode, individual program blocks or
block sequences with no reference to a main program or subprogram can be input and
executed immediately afterwards through actuation of the NC start key.

Measuring circuit
• SINUMERIK FM-NC: The requisite control circuits for axes and spindles are integrated in
the control module as standard. A maximum total of 4 axes and spindles can be
implemented, with no more than 2 spindles.
• SINUMERIK 840D The signals from the sensors are analyzed in the SIMODRIVE 611D
drive modules. The maximum configuration is 8 axes and spindles in total, but including
no more than 5 spindles.

Messages
All messages programmed in the parts program and -> alarms recognized by the system are
output on the operator panel in plain text with the date and time and a symbol indicating the
cancel criterion. Alarms and messages are displayed separately.

Metric system
Standardized system of units: For length, e.g., mm (millimeters), m (meters).

Mirroring
Mirroring reverses the signs of the coordinate values of a contour, with respect to an axis. It
is possible to mirror with respect to more than one axis at a time.

Cycles
Glossary-10 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Glossary

Multipoint interface
The multipoint interface (MPI) is a 9-pin sub-D port. A configurable number of devices can be
connected to a multipoint interface and then communicate with each other.
• Programming devices
• Operator control and monitoring equipment
• Further automation systems
The parameter block "Multipoint Interface MPI" of the CPU contains the -> parameters which
define the properties of the multipoint interface.

NC
Numerical Control: Numerical control (NC) includes all components of machine tool control: -
> NCK, -> PLC, -> MMC, -> COM.

Note
CNC (computerized numerical control) would be more appropriate for the SINUMERIK 840D
or FM-NC controls: MARS and Merkur controls.

NCK
Numerical Control Kernel: Component of the NC control which executes -> parts programs
and essentially coordinates the movements on the machine tool.

Network
The term "network" describes the connection of several S7-300 and other terminal devices,
e.g. a programming device, via -> interconnecting cables. A data exchange takes place over
the network between the connected devices.

Node number
The node number represents the "contact address" of a -> CPU or the -> programming
device or any other intelligent periphery module if these are communicating via a -> network
with each other. The node number is assigned to the CPU or the programming device with
the S7 tool -> "S7 configuration".

NRK
Numeric Robotic Kernel (operating system of the -> NCK)

NURBS
Internal motion control and path interpolation are performed using NURBS (non-uniform
rational B-splines). A standard procedure is thus available (SINUMERIK 840D) as an internal
control function for all modes of interpolation.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Glossary-11
Glossary

OEM
The scope for implementing individual solutions (OEM applications) for the SINUMERIK
840D has been provided for machine manufacturers, who wish to create their own operator
interface or integrate process-oriented functions in the control.

Offset memory
Data range in the control, in which the tool offset data are stored.

Oriented spindle stop

Stops the workpiece spindle in a specified angular position, e.g., in order to perform
additional machining at a particular location.

Oriented tool retraction

RETTOOL: If machining is interrupted (e.g., when a tool breaks), a program command can
be used to retract the tool in a user-specified orientation by a defined distance.

Override
Manual or programmable control feature, which enables the user to override programmed
feedrates or speeds in order to adapt them to a specific workpiece or material.

Parameter
• S7-300: a distinction is made between 2 types of parameters:
– Parameters of a STEP 7 instruction
A parameter of a STEP 7 instruction is the address of the operand to be processed or
a constant.
– Parameters of a -> parameter block
A parameter of a parameter block determines the behavior of a module.
• 840D:
– Operating area of the control.
– Arithmetic parameter for which the programmer of the parts program can assign or
request values as required in the program.

Part program management

Part programs can be organized according to -> workpieces. The number of programs and
data to be managed determine the size of the user memory. Each file (programs and data)
can be given a name consisting of a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters.

Parts program
A sequence of instructions to the NC control which combine to produce a specific ->
workpiece. Likewise, performing a certain machining operation on a specific -> blank.

Cycles
Glossary-12 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Glossary

PG
Programming device

PLC
Programmable Logic Control -> Programmable Logic Controller. Component of the -> NC
control: Programmable controller for processing the control logic of the machine tool.

PLC program memory

• SINUMERIK FM-NC: The PLC user program, the user data and the basic PLC program
are stored together in the PLC user memory on the CPU 314. The S7-CPU314 has a 24
Kbyte user memory for this purpose.
• SINUMERIK 840D The PLC user program, the user data and the basic PLC program are
stored together in the PLC user memory. The PLC user memory can be expanded up to
96 KB with memory expansions.

PLC Programming
The PLC is programmed with STEP 7 software. STEP 7 programming software is based on
the standard WINDOWS operating system and incorporates the functionality of STEP5
programming with innovative expansions and developments.

Polar coordinates
A coordinate system, which defines the position of a point on a plane in terms of its distance
from the origin and the angle formed by the radius vector with a defined axis.

Polynomial interpolation
Polynomial interpolation provides a means of generating a very wide range of curves,
including straight-line, parabolic and exponential functions (SINUMERIK 840D).

Positioning axis
Axis that performs an auxiliary movement on a machine tool (e.g., tool magazine, pallet
transport). Positioning axes are axes that do not interpolate with -> path axes.

Power on
Control is switched off and then switched on again.

Preset
The control zero point can be redefined in the machine coordinate system by means of the
Preset function. Preset does not cause the axes to move; instead, a new position value is
entered for the current axis positions.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Glossary-13
Glossary

Program
1. Operating area of the control.
2. Sequence of instructions to the control.

Program block
Program blocks contain the main and subroutines of the -> part programs.

Programmable frames
Programmable -> frames can be used to define new coordinate system starting points
dynamically while the parts program is running. A distinction is made between absolute
definition using a new frame and additive definition with reference to an existing starting
point.

Programmable Logic Controller

Programmable logic controllers (PLC) are electronic controls, the function of which is stored
as a program in the control unit. This means that the layout and wiring of the device do not
depend on the function of the control. The programmable logic controller has the same
structure as a computer; it consists of a CPU (central module) with memory, input/output
modules and an internal bus system. The peripherals and the programming language are
matched to the requirements of the control technology.

Programmable working area limitation

Limitation of the motion space of the tool to a space defined by programmed limitations.

Programming key
Characters and character sequences, which have a defined meaning in the programming
language for -> parts programs (see programming guide).

Protection zone
Three-dimensional space within the -> working area which the tool tip is not permitted to
enter.

Quadrant error compensation

Contour errors at quadrant transitions, which arise as a result of changing friction conditions
on the guideways, can be virtually entirely eliminated with the quadrant error compensation.
Parameterization of the quadrant error compensation is performed by means of a circuit test.

R parameters
Arithmetic parameter for which the programmer of the -> parts program can freely assign or
request values in the program.

Cycles
Glossary-14 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Glossary

Rapid traverse
The highest traverse rate of an axis. It is used for example to move the tool from rest position
to the -> workpiece contour or retract the tool from the contour.

Reference point
Point on the machine tool used to reference the measuring system of the -> machine axes.

Reference point approach

If the system of position measuring employed is not based on absolute-value encoders, the
control must perform a reference point approach in order to ensure that the actual values
supplied by the measuring system agree with the machine coordinate values.

REPOS
1. Repositioning on the contour using operator input
The REPOS function can use the direction keys to reposition at the point of interruption.
2. Repositioning on the contour by program
The program commands provide various approach strategies: Approach point of
interruption, approach start of block, approach end of block, approach a point on the path
between start of block and interruption.

Retentive memory
Data areas in data blocks and times, counters and markers are retentive (non-volatile) if their
contents are not lost when the system is restarted or the mains supply is disconnected.

Rigid tapping
This function allows threads to be tapped without a compensating chuck. By using the
method whereby the spindle, as a rotary axis, and the drilling axis interpolate, threads can be
cut to a precise final drilling depth (e.g. for blind hole threads) (requirement: spindles in axis
operation).

Rotary axis
Rotary axes apply a workpiece or tool rotation to a defined angular position.

Rotary axis, turning continuously

Depending on the application, the travel range of a rotary axis can be limited to less than
360 degrees or the axis can be continuously turned in both directions. Continuously turning
rotary axes are used, for example, for eccentric machining, grinding and winding.

Rotation
Component of a -> frame which defines a rotation of the coordinate system through a
specific angle.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Glossary-15
Glossary

Rounding axis
Rounding axes rotate a workpiece or tool to an angular position corresponding to an
indexing grid. When a grid index is reached, the rounding axis is "in position".

S7-300 bus
The S7-300 bus is a serial data bus by means of which the modules communicate with each
other and are supplied with the required voltage. The connections between the modules are
made with the -> bus connectors.

S7-Configuration
S7 configuration is a tool with the aid of which modules can be parameterized. With S7
configuration, various -> parameter blocks of the -> CPU and the I/O modules are set on the
-> PG. These parameters are transmitted to the CPU.

Scaling
Component of a -> frame, which causes axis-specific scale modifications.

Security functions
The controls contain watchdog monitors which are always active. These monitors detect
problems in the CNC, PLC or machine in time to prevent damage to workpiece, tool or
machine as far as possible. In the event of a fault, the machining operation is interrupted and
the drives stopped. The cause of the malfunction is logged and output as an alarm. At the
same time, the PLC is notified that a CNC alarm has been triggered.

Serial V.24 interface

For data input/output there is
• The MMC100 MMC module includes a serial V.24 interface (RS232)
• The MMC101 and MMC102 MMC modules have two RS232C interfaces
are available. Machining programs and manufacturer and user data can be loaded and
saved via these interfaces.

Services
Operating area of the control.

Set
A section of a -> parts program terminated with a line feed. A distinction is made between ->
main blocks and -> subblocks.

Setting data
Data, which communicates the properties of the machine tool to the NC control, as defined
by the system software.

Cycles
Glossary-16 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Glossary

Simulator module
A simulator module is a module
• on which digital input variables can be simulated via control elements and
• Digital output quantities can be displayed

Soft key
A key, whose name appears on an area of the screen. The choice of soft keys displayed is
dynamically adapted to the operating situation. The freely assignable function keys (soft
keys) are assigned defined functions in the software.

Software limit switch

Software limit switches define the limits of the travel range of an axis and prevent the slide
contacting the hardware limit switches. 2 pairs of values can be assigned on each axis,
which can then be activated separately via the -> PLC.

Spindles
The spindle functionality is a two-level construct:
1. Spindles: speed or position-controlled spindle drives, analog
digital (SINUMERIK 840D)
2. Auxiliary spindles: speed-controlled spindle drives, "auxiliary spindle" function package,
e.g., for driven tools.

Spline interpolation
Using the spline interpolation function, the control is able to generate a smooth curve from
just a small number of specified interpolation points along a setpoint contour.

SPS
-> Programmable Logic Controller

Standard cycles
Standard cycles are provided for machining operations, which are frequently repeated:
• Cycles for drilling/milling applications
• Cycles for turning applications (SINUMERIK FM-NC)
The available cycles are listed in the "Cycle support" menu in the "Program" operating area.
Once the desired machining cycle has been selected, the parameters required for assigning
values are displayed in plain text.

Standard rail
A mounting rail is used to attach the modules of an S7-300.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Glossary-17
Glossary

Subblock
Block preceded by "N" containing information for a sequence, e.g., positional data.

Subprogram
A sequence of instructions in a -> parts program, which can be called repeatedly with various
defining parameters. The subroutine is called from a main program. Every subprogram can
be protected against unauthorized read-out and display. -> Cycles are a form of subroutine.

Synchronization
Instructions in -> parts programs for coordination of sequences in different -> channels at
specific machining points.

Synchronized actions
1. Auxiliary function output
During the workpiece machining, technology functions (-> auxiliary functions) can be
issued from the CNC program to the PLC. These auxiliary functions are used for example
to control additional equipment for the machine tool, such as quills, grabbers, clamping
chucks etc.
2. Fast auxiliary function output
For time-critical switching functions, the confirmation times for the -> auxiliary functions
are minimized, and unnecessary stopping points in the machining process can be
avoided.

Synchronized axes
Synchronized axes take the same time to traverse their path as the geometry axes take for
their path.

System memory
The system memory is a memory in the CPU in which the following data are stored:
• Data required by the operating system
• The operands times, counters, markers

System variables
A variable, which exists although it has not been programmed by the -> parts program
programmer. It is defined by a data type and the variable name preceded by the character $.
See also -> User-defined variable.

Teach In
Teach-in is a means of creating or correcting parts programs. The individual program blocks
can be input via the keyboard and executed immediately. Positions approached via the
direction keys or handwheel can also be stored. Additional information such as G functions,
feedrates or M functions can be entered in the same block.

Cycles
Glossary-18 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
 Glossary

Text editor
-> Editor

Tool
A tool is a software tool for inputting and changing the -> parameters of a parameter block.
Tools include:
• -> S7 configuration
• S7-TOP
• S7-Info
A part used on the machine tool for machining. Examples of tools include lathe tools, milling
cutters, drills, laser beams, etc.

Tool nose radius compensation

Contour programming assumes that the tool is pointed. Since this is not actually the case in
practice, the curvature radius of the tool used must be communicated to the control, which
then takes it into account. The curvature center is maintained equidistantly around the
contour, offset by the curvature radius.

Tool offset
By programming a T function (5 decades, integer) in the block, you can select the tool. Every
T number can be assigned up to nine cutting edges (D addresses). The number of tools to
be managed in the control is set at the configuration stage.

Tool radius compensation

In order to program a desired -> workpiece contour directly, the control must traverse a path
equidistant to the programmed contour, taking into account the radius of the tool used
(G41/G42).

Transformation
Programming in a Cartesian coordinate system, execution in a non-Cartesian coordinate
system (e.g., with machine axes as rotary axes).

Traversing range
The maximum permissible travel range for linear axes is ± 9 decades. The absolute value
depends on the selected input and position control resolution and the unit of measurement
(inch or metric).

User-defined variable
The user can declare user-defined variables for any use in the -> parts program or data
block (global user data). A definition contains a data type specification and the variable
name. See also -> System variable.

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Glossary-19
Glossary

Variable definition
A variable definition includes the specification of a data type and a variable name. The
variable names can be used to access the value of the variables.

Velocity control
In order to be able to achieve an acceptable traversing velocity on very short traverse
movements within a single block, predictive velocity control can be set over several blocks
(-> look ahead).

Work offset
Specification of a new reference point for a coordinate system through reference to an
existing zero point and a -> frame.
1. settable
SINUMERIK FM-NC: Four independent zero offsets can be selected for each CNC axis.
SINUMERIK 840D A configurable number of settable work offsets are available for each
CNC axis. The offsets - which are selected by means of G functions - take effect
alternately.
2. external
In addition to all offsets that define the position of the workpiece zero, it is possible to
superimpose an external zero offset via one of the following:
– Handwheel (DRF offset)
– PLC
3. Programmable
Zero offsets are programmable for all path and positioning axes with the TRANS
command.

Workpiece
Part to be made/machined by the machine tool.

Workpiece contour
Setpoint contour of the -> workpiece to be made/machined.

Workpiece coordinate system

The starting position of the workpiece coordinate system is the ->workpiece zero. In
machining operations programmed in the workpiece coordinate system, the dimensions and
directions refer to this system.

Workpiece zero
The workpiece zero is the starting point for the -> workpiece coordinate system. It is defined
by the distance from the machine zero.

Cycles
Glossary-20 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0
Index
A CYCLE81, 2-4
CYCLE82, 2-7
absolutedrillingdepth, 2-6, 3-15, 3-21, 3-36, 3-62, CYCLE83, 2-10
3-105 CYCLE832, 3-160
Axis assignment, 1-3 CYCLE84, 2-18
CYCLE840, 2-25
CYCLE85, 2-32
B CYCLE86, 2-35
Behavior when quantity parameter is zero, 2-51 CYCLE87, 2-39
Blank, 4-56 CYCLE88, 2-42
Boring, 2-1 CYCLE89, 2-45
Boring 1, 2-32 CYCLE90, 3-4
Boring 2, 2-35 CYCLE93, 4-5
Boring 3, 2-39 CYCLE94, 4-14
Boring 4, 2-42 CYCLE95, 4-19
Boring 5, 2-45 CYCLE950, 4-56
CYCLE96, 4-34
CYCLE97, 4-38
C CYCLE98, 4-46

Call, 1-3
Call conditions, 1-3 D
Centering, 2-4
Circle of holes, 2-55 Deep-hole drilling, 2-10
Circular spigot milling - CYCLE77, 3-79 Dot matrix, 2-58
Circumferential slot - SLOT2, 3-25 Drilling, 2-4
Contour definition, 4-69 Drilling cycles, 1-1
Contour definition, 4-30 Drilling pattern cycles, 2-51
Contour monitoring, 4-3, 4-32 Drilling, counterboring, 2-7
Contour programming, 4-64
CONTPRON, 4-31
Cycle alarms, 5-1 E
Cycle call, 1-4 Engraving cycle – CYCLE60, 3-174
Cycle setting data, milling, 3-3 Extended stock removal cycle - CYCLE950, 4-56
Cycle setting data, Turning, 4-3 External thread, 3-6
Cycle support for user cycles), 1-18
Cycle support in the program editor, 1-8
CYCLE60, 3-174 F
CYCLE72, 3-65
CYCLE73, 3-90 Face thread, 4-45
CYCLE75, 3-86 FGROUP, 3-4
CYCLE76, 3-73 Free contour programming, 1-11
CYCLE77, 3-79
CYCLE800, 3-109
CYCLE801, 2-58

Cycles
Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0 Index-1
Index

G R
Geometrical parameters, 2-1 Rectangular spigot milling - CYCLE76, 3-73
Grooving cycle - CYCLE93, 4-5 Reference plane, 3-105
relativedrillingdepth, 2-6, 3-15, 3-21, 3-36, 3-62,
3-105
H residual material, 4-56
Retraction plane, 2-6, 3-105
High speed settings – CYCLE832, 3-160
Return conditions, 1-3
Hole pattern cycles, 1-2
Rigid tapping, 2-18
Hole pattern cycles without drilling cycle call, 2-51
Row of holes, 2-52
HOLES1, 2-52
HOLES2, 2-55
S
L Safety clearance, 2-6, 3-105
SETMS, 3-2
Long holes located on a circle - LONGHOLE, 3-12
Simulation of cycles, 1-7
LONGHOLE, 3-12
Simulation without tool, 1-7
Longitudinal thread, 4-45
SLOT1, 3-18
SLOT2, 3-25
Slots on a circle - SLOT1, 3-18
M Spindle handling, 4-2
Machining parameters, 2-1 SPOS, 2-21, 2-22
Machining plane, 1-3 Start, 2-2
MCALL, 2-48 Start point, 4-33
Messages, 1-4, 5-2 Stock removal cycle - CYCLE95, 4-19
Milling a circular pocket - POCKET4, 3-52 Swiveling – CYCLE800, 3-109
Milling a rectangular pocket - POCKET3, 3-43 Swiveling in JOG (with Cycles SW 6.5 and
Milling circular pockets - POCKET2, 3-38 higher), 3-124
Milling cycles, 1-2
Milling rectangular pockets - POCKET1, 3-32
Modal call, 2-48 T
Tapping with compensating chuck, 2-25
Tapping with compensating chuck with encoder,
O 2-28
Overview of cycle alarms, 5-1 Tapping with compensating chuck without
Overview of cycles, 1-1 encoder, 2-28
Thread chaining - CYCLE98, 4-46
Thread cutting - CYCLE97, 4-38
P Thread milling, 3-4
Thread recutting, 4-54
parallel-contour, 4-56
Thread undercut - CYCLE96, 4-34
Parameter list, 1-4
Transfer island contour - CYCLE75, 3-86
Path milling, 3-65
Turning cycles, 1-2
Plane definition, 1-3
Plausibility checks, 2-51
Pocket milling with islands - CYCLE73, 3-90
POCKET1, 3-32
U
POCKET2, 3-38 Undercut angle, 4-3
POCKET3, 3-43 Undercut cycle - CYCLE94, 4-14
POCKET4, 3-52

Cycles
Index-2 Programming Manual, Release 04/2006, 6FC5398-3BP10-0BA0